DYNAMIC PROTOTYPES for Dormitories - WBDG (rev).pdfB. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within

PROJECT MANUAL

DYNAMIC PROTOTYPESfor Dormitories

Prepared for:

Air Force Center for Engineering and the Environment3300 Sidney Brooks, Bldg 532Brooks City-Base, TX 78235

and

by:

911 Central Parkway NorthSuite 425

San Antonio, Texas 78232

11 May 2009

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMINGSECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONSSECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRSSECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRYSECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRYSECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERSSECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMESSECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORSSECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMESSECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWSSECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARESECTION 087111 - DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)SECTION 088000 - GLAZINGSECTION 088300 - MIRRORS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMINGSECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARDSECTION 093000 - TILINGSECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIESSECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETINGSECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGESECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIESSECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETSSECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERSSECTION 105500 - POSTAL SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

SECTION 123530 - RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPINGSECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPINGSECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPINGSECTION 230518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPINGSECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPINGSECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPINGSECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENTSECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENTSECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENTSECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVACSECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION

SECTION 230800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVACSECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVACSECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLSSECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPINGSECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPSSECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTSSECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIESSECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITSSECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLESSECTION 235239 - FIRE-TUBE BOILERSSECTION 236426 - ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERSSECTION 238219 - FAN COIL UNITS

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLESSECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSSECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSSECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDSSECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICESSECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTINGSECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLINGSECTION 274133 - MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEMSECTION 275116 - PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

NOT APPLICABLE

DYNAMIC PROTOTYPESAFCEE #FA8903-08-D-8773TASK ORDER 0028

JEG #FDWD1301PRINTED 04-30-09

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

GENERALPART 1 -

RELATED DOCUMENTS1.1

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryA.Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY1.2

Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,A.mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

Footings.1.Slabs-on-grade.2.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of theA.following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4

Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified asA.ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certifiedConcrete Flatwork Technician.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concreteB.products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities andequipment.

Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete1.Production Facilities."

Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand fromC.the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures fromsingle source from single manufacturer.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M,D."Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1



ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the ContractE.Documents:

ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," [Sections 1 through 5.] [Sections 11.through 5 and Section 7, "Lightweight Concrete."]ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."2.

Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform materialF.evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

FORM-FACING MATERIALS2.1

Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,A.stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments ofconcrete surfaces.

Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.1.

Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plasticB.form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling ofconcrete on removal.

Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of1.exposed concrete surface.Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in2.concrete surface.Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing3.or waterproofing.

CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL2.2

Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis ofA.laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture1.designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to [0.06] [0.15] [0.30] [1.00]B.percent by weight of cement.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -




FORMWORK3.1

Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,A.lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structurecan support such loads.

Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,B.elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.C.

Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.D.Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Providetop forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.1.Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.2.

Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve requiredE.elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screedstrips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formworkF.is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced toprevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuouslocations.

exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.G.

Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheadsH.required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, andI.other debris just before placing concrete.

Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks andJ.maintain proper alignment.

Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's writtenK.instructions, before placing reinforcement.

EMBEDDED ITEMS3.2

Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work thatA.is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,




diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS3.3

General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that doesA.not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50deg F for [24] <Insert number> hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enoughto not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to bemaintained.

Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports1.weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved[ at least 70 percent of] its 28-daydesign compressive strength.Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without2.loosening or disturbing shores.

Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, orB.otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Applynew form-release agent.

When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.C.Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concretesurfaces unless approved by Architect.

SHORES AND RESHORES3.4

Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring andA.reshoring.

Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.1.

In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories toB.distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or willinduce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate andC.provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

CONCRETE PLACEMENT3.5

Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embeddedA.items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unlessB.approved by Architect.




Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject toC.limitations of ACI 301.

Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no newD.concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes ofweakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures1.and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.2.Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators3.vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete thathave begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to timenecessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and otherembedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work fromE.physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or lowtemperatures.

When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three1.successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperaturerange required by ACI 301.Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete2.on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or3.chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:F.

Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing1.water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent ofice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concreteis Contractor's option.Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep2.subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS3.6

Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is inA.place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required tocomplete the Work.




CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS3.7

Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. RemoveA.and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to twoB.and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handlingand placing.

Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,C.spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, andstains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than1.1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges ofcuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holesand voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bondingagent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in placewith bonding agent.Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and2.standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surroundingcolor. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color matchbefore proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higherthan surrounding surface.Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and3.structural performance as determined by Architect.

Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish andD.verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfacessloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,1.honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or thatpenetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless ofwidth, and other objectionable conditions.After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.2.Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing3.operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repairedareas to blend into adjacent concrete.Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.4.Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer'swritten instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Featheredges to match adjacent floor elevations.Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low5.areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floorelevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to




manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and levelsurface.Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,6.by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except withoutcoarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.7.Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, andloose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Placepatching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish tomatch adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive andE.patching mortar.

Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect'sF.approval.

END OF SECTION 033000




SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Concrete masonry units.1.Pre-faced concrete masonry units.2.Mortar and grout.3.Steel reinforcing bars.4.Masonry joint reinforcement.5.Ties and anchors.6.Embedded flashing.7.Miscellaneous masonry accessories.8.Cavity-wall insulation.9.

Related Sections:B.

Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for[ installing] dovetail slots for masonry1.anchors.Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel [lintels] [and] [shelf2.angles] for unit masonry.Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for[ exposed] sheet metal flashing3.and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for wall vents (brick vents).4.

DEFINITIONS1.3

CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).A.

Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.B.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS1.4

Provide[ structural] unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28A.

UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1



days.

Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive1.strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING1.5

Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency toA.perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply withspecified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 1401.for compressive strength.Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to2.ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength[, ASTM C 1506 for water retention,and ASTM C 91 for air content].Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 7803.for compressive strength.Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019.4.Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314.5.

SUBMITTALS1.6

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.A.

Shop Drawings: For the following:B.

Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.1.Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.2.Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."[ Showelevations of reinforced walls.]Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.3.

Samples for Initial Selection:C.

Decorative CMUs, in the form of small-scale units.1.

List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together withD.manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers,source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mixproportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.

Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup1.constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviationsare specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.




Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:E.

Masonry units.1.

For masonry units[ used in structural masonry], include data and calculationsa.establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.2.

Mix Designs: For each type of mortar[ and grout]. Include description of type and proportionsF.of ingredients.

Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test1.according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for waterretention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with2.compressive strength requirement.


Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture andA.color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from singlesource from single manufacturer for each product required.

Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,B.including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitiouscomponent and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified byC.requirements in the Contract Documents.

Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and toD.demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

Build mockups for [each type of exposed unit masonry construction] [typical exterior1.wall] [typical interior wall] [typical exterior and interior walls] in sizes approximately [48inches] [60 inches] [72 inches] [96 inches] <Insert size> long by [36 inches] [48 inches][60 inches] [72 inches] <Insert size> high by full thickness, including face and backupwythes and accessories.

Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in [each] [exterior wall]a.mockup.Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exteriorb.wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inchlength of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing).




Clean[ one-half of] exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated.2.Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of3.mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualitiesof workmanship.

Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualitiesa.specifically approved by Architect in writing.Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contractb.Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approvedby Architect in writing.

Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of4.Substantial Completion.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements inE.Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.8

Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in anA.enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. Ifunits become wet, do not install until they are dry.

Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do notB.use cementitious materials that have become damp.

Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained andC.contamination avoided.

Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use withD.dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevatedplatforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirtE.and oil.

PROJECT CONDITIONS1.9

Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills withA.waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry whenconstruction is not in progress.

Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely1.in place.Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,2.




secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and holdcover in place.

Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at leastB.three days after building masonry walls or columns.

Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be leftC.exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with suchmasonry.

Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading1.coverings on ground and over wall surface.Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.2.Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and3.integral finishes, from mortar droppings.Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from4.splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with iceD.or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged byfrost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements containedin ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 401.deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven daysafter completing cleaning.

Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained inE.ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL2.1

Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units toA.contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use unitswhere such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements forB.fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, byequivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS2.2




Regional Materials: Provide CMUs that have been manufactured within 500 miles of ProjectA.site from aggregates[ and cement] that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well asmanufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposedB.faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,1.bonding, and other special conditions.Provide [square-edged] [bullnose] units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.2.

Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent [for exposed units]C.[and] [where indicated].

Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does1.not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when testedaccording to ASTM E 514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integralwater-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours,shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following]a.[provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into theWork include, but are not limited to, the following]:

ACM Chemistries; RainBloc.1)BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus.2)Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block.3)<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.4)

CMUs: ASTM C 90.D.

Density Classification: [Lightweight] [Medium weight] [Normal weight][ unless1.otherwise indicated].Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.2.Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's3.sample.Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of4.plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.

Pre-faced CMUs: Lightweight solid concrete units complying with ASTM C 90, withE.manufacturer's standard smooth resinous facing complying with ASTM C 744.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide1.one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Workinclude, but are not limited to, the following]:

<Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name; product name ora.




designation>.

Size: Manufactured to dimensions specified in "CMUs" Paragraph but with pre-faced2.surfaces having 1/16-inch- wide returns of facing to create 1/4-inch- wide mortar jointswith modular coursing.Colors and Patterns: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match3.Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].

MASONRY LINTELS2.3

General: Provide one of the following:A.

Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUsB.with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintelsbefore handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS2.4

Regional Materials: Provide aggregate for mortar and grout[, cement, and lime] that haveA.been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Projectsite.

Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.B.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one1.of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, butare not limited to, the following]:

Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement.a.Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.; [Brikset Type N] [Citadel Type S] [Dixie Type S]b.[Kosmortar Type N] [Richmortar] [Victor Plastic Cement].Essroc, Italcementi Group; [Brixment] [or] [Velvet].c.Holcim (US) Inc.; [Mortamix Masonry Cement] [Rainbow Mortamix Custom Buffd.Masonry Cement] [White Mortamix Masonry Cement].Lafarge North America Inc.; [Magnolia Masonry Cement] [Lafarge Masonrye.Cement] [Trinity White Masonry Cement].Lehigh Cement Company; [Lehigh Masonry Cement] [Lehigh White Masonryf.Cement].National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement.g.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.h.

Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.C.

For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or1.crushed stone.For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the2.




No. 16 sieve.White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.3.

Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.D.

Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying withE.ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortarof composition indicated.


Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.a.Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.b.Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.c.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.d.

Water: Potable.F.

REINFORCEMENT2.5

Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.A.

Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.B.

Exterior Walls: [Hot-dip galvanized, carbon] [Stainless] steel.1.Wire Size for Side Rods: [0.148-inch] [0.187-inch] diameter.2.Wire Size for Cross Rods: [0.148-inch] [0.187-inch] diameter.3.Wire Size for Veneer Ties: [0.148-inch] [0.187-inch] diameter.4.Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.5.Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet[, with prefabricated corner and tee units].6.

Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:C.

Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches1.wide, plus [1 side rod] [2 side rods] at each wythe of masonry 4 inches wide or less.

Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors:D.Single 0.187-inch- diameter, [hot-dip galvanized, carbon] [stainless]-steel continuous wire.

TIES AND ANCHORS2.6

Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials thatA.comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.




Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with1.ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfwayB.through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.

Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide.C.

Where wythes [do not align] [are of different materials], use adjustable ties with pintle-1.and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches.

Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:D.

General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and1.compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to woodor metal studs, and as follows:

Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load ina.both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of0.05 inch.

Slip-in, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and an anchor2.section designed to interlock with metal studs and be slipped into place as sheathing isinstalled.


Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; AA308.1)<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.2)

Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a3.connector section designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortarjoint.


Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 213S.1)Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10-X-Seismiclip.2)Wire-Bond; RJ-711 with Wire-Bond clip.3)<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.4)




MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS2.7

Anchor Bolts: [Headed] [or] [L-shaped] steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A;A.with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to complywith ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.

Postinstalled Anchors: [Torque-controlled expansion anchors] [or] [chemical anchors].B.

Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load1.imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installedin concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualifiedindependent testing agency.Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy [Group 1]2.[Group 2] stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS2.8

Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with [SMACNA's "Architectural SheetA.Metal Manual"] [Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"]" and as follows:

Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00, cold-rolled copper sheet, 16-oz./sq. ft. weight or1.0.0216 inch thick or ASTM B 370, Temper H01, high-yield copper sheet, 12-oz./sq. ft.weight or 0.0162 inch thick.Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 122.feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from [stainless steel]3.[copper], with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide an integralmortar bond.


Cheney Flashing Company; [Cheney Flashing (Dovetail)] [or] [Cheney 3-1)Way Flashing (Sawtooth)].Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3-Way Interlocking Thruwall2)Flashing.Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Mechanically Keyed Flashing.3)<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.4)

Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge [where] [unless otherwise] indicated.4.Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30degrees[ and hemmed].Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop [where] [unless otherwise] indicated.5.Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior face of wall and down into




joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

Flexible Flashing: Use[ one of] the following unless otherwise indicated:B.

Copper-Laminated Flashing: [5-oz./sq. ft.] [7-oz./sq. ft.] copper sheet bonded between 21.layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.


Advanced Building Products Inc.; [Copper Fabric Flashing] [Copper1)Sealtite 2000].Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Fabric Thru-2)Wall Flashing.Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing.3)Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper.4)Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing.5)York Manufacturing, Inc.; Multi-Flash 500.6)<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.7)

Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:C.

Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.1.Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal2.flashing.Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal3.flashing [with a drip edge] [with a sealant stop] [or flexible flashing with a metal dripedge] [or elastomeric thermoplastic flashing with drip edge] [or flexible flashing with ametal sealant stop].Where flashing is fully concealed, use [metal flashing] [or] [flexible flashing].4.

Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:[ As specified in Division 07 Section "SheetD.Metal Flashing and Trim."]

Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead.1.Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing [urethane] [polysulfide] [silicone]2.sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metalflashing and trim and remain watertight.

MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES2.9

Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;A.compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from [neoprene][urethane] [or] [PVC].

Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from [styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complyingB.




with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805] [or] [PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287,Type PVC-65406] and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability inmasonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,C.Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

Weep/Vent Products: Use[ one of] the following unless otherwise indicated:D.

Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from [cotton] [or] [UV-resistant synthetic1.fiber], 1/4 to 3/8 inch in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch exposure onexterior and 18 inches in cavity. Use only for weeps.

Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will notE.degrade within the wall cavity.


Advanced Building Products Inc.; [Mortar Break] [Mortar Break II].a.Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat.b.Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop.c.Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.d.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.e.

Provide one of the following configurations:2.

Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail shaped notches 7a.inches deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings.

Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanningF.masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of barsindicated.


Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 ora.D/A 817.Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.b.Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.c.Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.d.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.e.




CAVITY-WALL INSULATION2.10

Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, [Type IV] [Type X], closed-cellA.product extruded with an integral skin.

Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated.B.

MASONRY CLEANERS2.11

Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removingA.mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry withoutdiscoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended useby cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of1.the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated intothe Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

Diedrich Technologies, Inc.a.EaCo Chem, Inc.b.ProSoCo, Inc.c.<Insert manufacturer's name>.d.

MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES2.12

General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,A.retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwiseindicated.

Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.1.Use masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.2.For exterior masonry, use masonry cement mortar.3.For reinforced masonry, use [portland cement-lime] [masonry cement] [or] [mortar4.cement] mortar.Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to5.view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, [Proportion] [Property] Specification.B.Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type isindicated[ or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry].

For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use [Type M] [Type S].1.For reinforced masonry, use [Type S] [Type N].2.For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for3.




interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for otherapplications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.4.

Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.C.

Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will1.comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of groutspaces and pour height.Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, [Table 1] [or] [paragraph 4.2.2 for2.specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi].Provide grout with a slump of [8 to 11 inches] [10 to 11 inches] as measured according to3.ASTM C 143/C 143M.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installationA.tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions1.detrimental to performance of work.Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.2.Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.3.

Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verifyB.actual locations of piping connections.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.C.

INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.2

Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thicknessA.shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widthsindicated.

Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.B.

Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installingC.equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuousD.pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install




cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors andE.textures.

Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.1.

Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.F.

TOLERANCES3.3

Dimensions and Locations of Elements:A.

For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or1.minus 1/4 inch.For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or2.minus 1/2 inch.For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or3.minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

Lines and Levels:B.

For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/41.inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary2.from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,3.3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and4.expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet,1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch5.in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/46.inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more7.than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified forwarpage of units.

Joints:C.

For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,1.with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more2.than 1/8 inch.For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/83.inch or minus 1/4 inch.




For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus4.1/8 inch.[ Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than1/8 inch.]

LAYING MASONRY WALLS3.4

Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform jointA.thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, atother locations.

Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry inB.[running bond] [stack bond] [one-third running bond] [Flemish bond] [English bond][bond pattern indicated on Drawings]; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inchhorizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not lessC.than [2 inches] [4-inches]. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do notuse units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those inD.course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receivemortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying freshmasonry.

Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.E.Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer ofF.metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, andG.similar items unless otherwise indicated.

Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure1.above.Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells2.of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout toprovide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors[48 inches] <Insert spacing> o.c. unless otherwise indicated.Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,3.or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approachesfinal position.At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure4.above to comply with Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."




MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING3.5

Lay hollow CMUs as follows:A.

With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.1.With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.2.With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on3.footings.With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on4.footings where cells are not grouted.

Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficientB.mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush headjoints.

Set trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similarC.holes.

Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear1.water.Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting.2.Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.3.

Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than jointD.thickness unless otherwise indicated.

Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other thanE.paint) unless otherwise indicated.

COMPOSITE MASONRY3.6

Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods:A.

Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less1.than one metal tie for [4.5 sq. ft.] [2.67 sq. ft.] [1.77 sq. ft.] of wall area spaced not toexceed [36 inches] [24 inches] [16 inches] o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically.Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings andspace not more than 36 inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting andabutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically.

Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type ties.a.

Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.2.

Where bed joints of both wythes align, use [ladder-type reinforcement extendinga.




across both wythes] [tab-type reinforcement].Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) typeb.reinforcement[ with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties].

Header Bonding: Provide masonry unit headers extending not less than 3 inches into3.each wythe. Space headers not over [8 inches] [12 inches] clear horizontally and 16inches clear vertically.

Bond wythes of composite masonry together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.B.

Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shovingC.units of other wythe into place.

Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners unlessD.otherwise indicated.

Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown atE.juncture, bond walls together as follows:

Provide individual metal ties not more than [8 inches] [16 inches] o.c.1.

CAVITY WALLS3.7

Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:A.

Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less1.than one metal tie for [4.5 sq. ft.] [2.67 sq. ft.] [1.77 sq. ft.] of wall area spaced not toexceed [36 inches] [24 inches] [16 inches] o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically.Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings andspace not more than 36 inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting andabutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically.

Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type ties.a.Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, useb.adjustable (two-piece) type ties to allow for differential movement regardless ofwhether bed joints align.

Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.2.

Where bed joints of both wythes align, use [ladder-type reinforcement extendinga.across both wythes] [tab-type reinforcement].Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) typeb.reinforcement[ with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties].Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, usec.adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement[ with continuous horizontal wire infacing wythe attached to ties] to allow for differential movement regardless ofwhether bed joints align.




Header Bonding: Provide masonry unit headers extending not less than 3 inches into3.each wythe. Space headers not over [8 inches] [12 inches] clear horizontally and 16inches clear vertically.Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.4.

Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel bedsB.away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel orremove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

Apply air barrier to face of backup wythe to comply with Division 07 Section "[ModifiedC.Bituminous Sheet Air Barriers] [Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers]."

Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12D.inches o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fastenersdesigned for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confiningobstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against insidewythe of masonry or other construction as shown.

Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and1.masonry.

MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT3.8

General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8A.inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.1.Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls.2.Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and3.extending 12 inches beyond openings[ in addition to continuous reinforcement].

Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.B.

Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.C.

Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at[ corners,] returns,D.offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS3.9

Anchor masonry veneers to [wall framing] [and] [concrete and masonry backup] with[ seismic]A.masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

Fasten [screw-attached] [and] [seismic] anchors [through sheathing to wall framing] [and]1.[to concrete and masonry backup] with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two




fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and2.down.Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c.3.horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additionalanchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, aroundperimeter.

CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS3.10

General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.A.Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

Form control joints in concrete masonry [as follows] [using one of the following methods]:B.

Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint.1.Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application ofsealant.Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is2.complete for application of sealant.

Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting aC.compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified inDivision 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than [3/8 inch] <Insert minimum width>.

Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.1.

LINTELS3.11

Install steel lintels where indicated.A.

Provide concrete][masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches forB.brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or othersupporting lintels.

Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.C.

FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS3.12

General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,A.other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.[ Install vents atshelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and whereindicated.]




Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:B.

Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could1.puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing onsloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, sealpenetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashingmanufacturer.At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer2.wythe, turned up a minimum of [4 inches] [8 inches], and through inner wythe to within1/2 inch of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of wall is toreceive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turnflashing up approximately 2 inches on interior face.

Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediatelyC.above embedded flashing and as follows:

Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.1.Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking2.down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.3.Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.4.

Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavityD.drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/ventE.products open head joints to form vents.

REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION3.13

Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to supportA.reinforced masonry elements during construction.

Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as1.indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing ofreinforced masonry.Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened2.sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them duringconstruction.

Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.B.

Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enoughC.strength to resist grout pressure.




Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout1.placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than [60 inches] [12.67 ft.] <Insert2.height>.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL3.14

Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspectionsA.and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed toperform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specifiedrequirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 forB.compressive strength.

Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according toC.ASTM C 780.

Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.D.

REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING3.15

Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwiseA.damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; installin fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, andB.completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacentconstruction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,where indicated.

In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to removeC.mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:D.

Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes1.or chisels.Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for2.comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceedingwith cleaning of masonry.Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering3.them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof maskingtape.Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by4.




rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to5.type of stain on exposed surfaces.

MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL3.16

Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor'sA.property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-B.contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fillmaterial as fill is placed.

Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension.1.Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of2.masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.3.

Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, asC.described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.





SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified1.in other Sections.Shelf angles.2.Fabricated closet orginizers.3.

Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:B.

Loose steel lintels.1.Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated2.to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not3.specified in other Sections.

Related Sections:C.

Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe1.sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other2.items built into unit masonry.Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs."3.Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings."4.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: For the following:A.

Paint products.1.Grout.2.

METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1




Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,A."Structural Welding Code - Steel."

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:B.

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."1.


Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous withA.metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

COORDINATION1.6

Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paintA.and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoatsare compatible with one another.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

METALS, GENERAL2.1

Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwiseA.indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materialswithout seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

FERROUS METALS2.2

Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.A.

NONFERROUS METALS2.3

Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntzA.metal, 60 percent copper).

CLOSET ORGINIZERS2.4




At Owner's opinion, provide and install prefabricated vinyl-coated wire shelves, tubural rodsA.and accessories where indicated.

Secure entire assembly to concealed solid wood blocking as directed by manufacturer.1.

Manufacturers:B.

ClosetMaid.1.Another manufacturer may be consider if that manufacturer can demonstrate the2.capability to provide products that comply with the requirements and is approved asequal to the above by the Architect.

FASTENERS2.5

General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide [Type 304] [Type 316] stainless-steel fastenersA.for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTMF 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,B.ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts,C.ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.

Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM FD.593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy [Group 1] [Group2].

Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.E.

Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.F.

Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1.G.

Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.H.

Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.I.

Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.J.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.6

Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloyA.welded.




Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.B.

FABRICATION, GENERAL2.7

Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble unitsA.only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintainstructural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinatedinstallation.

Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius ofB.approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposedsurfaces.

Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation orC.otherwise impairing work.

Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.D.

Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:E.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion1.resistance of base metals.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.2.Remove welding flux immediately.3.At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no4.roughness shows after finishing[ and contour of welded surface matches that ofadjacent surface].

Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners orF.welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to excludeG.water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,H.and similar items.

Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoringI.devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with1.integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inchembedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.




MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS2.8

General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed toA.complete the Work.

Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwiseB.indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacentconstruction.

Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with where indicated.C.

FINISHES, GENERAL2.9

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" forA.recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

Finish metal fabrications after assembly.B.

Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend intoC.surrounding surface.

STEEL AND IRON FINISHES2.10

Shop prime iron and steel items[ not indicated to be galvanized] unless they are to beA.embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

Shop prime with unless indicated.1.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -


Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installingA.metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; withedges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines andlevels.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that areB.not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized afterfabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.




Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:C.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion1.resistance of base metals.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.2.Remove welding flux immediately.3.At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no4.roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacentsurface.

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metalD.fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners foruse with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws,and other connectors.

Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,E.masonry, or similar construction.





SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes the following:A.

Industrial-type stairs with steel floor plate grating treads.1.[Steel tube ]railings attached to metal stairs.2.[Steel tube ]handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.3.Railing gates at the level of exit discharge.4.

Related Sections include the following:B.

Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal treads and nosings not installed in1.metal stairs.Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings.2.Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings not attached to3.metal stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs.Division 06 Section "" for wood blocking for anchoring railings.4.


Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects ofA.gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft..1.Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in..2.Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.3.Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition4.to loads specified above.Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to [L/240] [L/360] <Insert5.deflection ratio> or 1/4 inch, whichever is less.

Seismic Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of earthquakeB.motions determined according to [ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings andOther Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."] <Insert applicable code

METAL STAIRS 055100 - 1



requirement.>

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: For metal stairs and the following:A.

Abrasive nosings.1.Metal floor plate treads.2.Grout.3.

LEED Submittal:B.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1[ and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled1.content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer andpreconsumer recycled content.

Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.a.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.C.

Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.1.For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis2.data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for theirpreparation.

Welding certificates.D.

Qualification Data: For professional engineer .E.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualifiedF.testing agency, for .

Test railings according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.1.


Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.A.

NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards forB.Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated,unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

Preassembled Stairs: class.1.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:C.




AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."1.AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."2.

COORDINATION1.6

Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, andA.directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and itemswith integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items toProject site in time for installation.

Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach onB.required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply toA.product selection:

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be1.incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products2.specified.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers3.offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,manufacturers specified.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the4.manufacturers specified.

METALS, GENERAL2.2

Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwiseA.indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials withoutseam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steelB.products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content isnot less than [25] <Insert number> percent.

FERROUS METALS2.3




Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.A.

Steel Tubing: [ASTM A 500 (cold formed)] [or] [ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn)].B.

Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying withC.ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate [with abrasive granules rolled into surface] [or]D.[with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel by a proprietary process].

[Available ]Products:1.

IKG Industries, a Harsco company; Mebac.a.W. S. Molnar Company; SlipNOT.b.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>c.

Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36/A 36M.E.

Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510.F.

Iron Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated.G.

Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by1.structural loads.Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.2.

NONFERROUS METALS2.4

Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.A.

Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400B.(leaded semired brass).

Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickelC.bronze).

ABRASIVE NOSINGS2.5

Cast-Metal Units: Cast [gray iron, Class 20] [aluminum] [bronze (leaded red or semiredA.brass)] [nickel silver (leaded nickel bronze)], with an integral abrasive finish consisting ofaluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in sizes andconfigurations indicated and in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.

Configuration: Cross-hatched angle-shaped units, same depth as bar-grating treads and 11.to 1-1/2 inches wide.




Extruded Units: Extruded-units with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, siliconB.carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in sizes andconfigurations indicated and in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.

Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch above aluminum1.extrusion.Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs.2.Nosings: Square-back units, [1-7/8 inches] [3 inches] [4 inches] wide, without lip.3.Nosings: Two-piece units, 3 inches wide, with subchannel for casting into concrete.4.

Apply bituminous paint to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of cast-metal units set intoC.concrete.

FASTENERS2.6

General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633,A.Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Selectfasteners for type, grade, and class required.

Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,B.ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.C.

Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts for exterior stairs .1.

Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.D.

Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.E.

Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.F.

Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.G.

Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, withoutH.failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and fourtimes the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according toASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts1.complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.


Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloyA.




welded.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.B.

Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches--W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated.C.


Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips,A.brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs andplatforms on supporting structure.

Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated.1.Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.2.Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to3.drain.

Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble unitsB.only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly andcoordinated installation.

Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius ofC.approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposedsurfaces.

Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation orD.otherwise impairing work.

Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.E.

Weld connections to comply with the following:F.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion1.resistance of base metals.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.2.Remove welding flux immediately.3.Weld exposed corners and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated.4.At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no5.roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacentsurface.

Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fastenersG.where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weepH.holes where water may accumulate.




STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS2.9

Stair Framing:A.

Fabricate stringers of steel [plates] [channels] [plates or channels] [tubes].1.

Provide closures for exposed ends of [channel] [tube] stringers.a.

Construct platforms of steel tube headers and miscellaneous framing members as [needed2.to comply with performance requirements] [indicated].Weld[ or bolt] stringers to headers; weld[ or bolt] framing members to stringers and3.headers.[ If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finishedsurfaces.]Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board[ shaft-wall] assemblies, provide hanger rods4.or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rodsand struts where they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within thefire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed5.for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.

Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from [rolled-B.steel] [abrasive-surface] floor plate of thickness [needed to comply with performancerequirements but not less than 1/4 inch] [needed to comply with performancerequirements but not less than 3/16 inch] [needed to comply with performancerequirements but not less than 1/8 inch] [indicated].

Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Form risers of same material as1.treads.Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Form risers from steel sheet2.not less than 0.0966 inch thick, welded to tread nosings and stiffeners and to platforms.Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener, and with open risers.3.Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets.4.Fabricate platforms with integral nosings matching treads and weld to platform framing.5.

Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from metal barC.grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."

Fabricate treads and platforms from welded steel grating with 1-1/4-by-3/16-inch bearing1.bars at 15/16 inch o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches o.c., NAAMM designation: W-15-4 (1-1/4 x 3/16) STEEL.Surface: [Plain] [Serrated].2.Finish: .3.Fabricate grating treads with cast abrasive nosing and with steel angle or steel plate4.carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts.Fabricate grating platforms with nosing matching that on grating treads. Provide5.toeplates at open-sided edges of grating platforms. Weld grating to platform framing.




STEEL TUBE RAILINGS2.10

General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,A.details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, andanchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.

Configuration: 1-5/8-inch- diameter top and bottom rails, 1-1/2-inch- square posts, and1.1/2-inch- square pickets spaced less than 4 inches clear.Gates: Form gates from steel tube of same size and shape as top rails, with infill to match2.guards. Provide with [cam-type self-closing] [spring] hinges for fastening to wall andoverlapping stop with rubber bumper to prevent gate from opening in direction oppositeegress.

Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components atB.connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around atconnections, including at fittings.

Form changes in direction of railings as follows:C.

As detailed.1.

Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.D.

Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close endsE.of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,F.miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to otherwork. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work.

Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated.1.For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,2.fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry andconcrete construction.

STAIR RAILINGS2.11

Comply with applicable requirements in Division 05 Section " for railings, and as follows:A.

Fabricate newels of square steel tubing and provide newel caps of [pressed steel] [gray-1.iron castings], as shown.Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using prefabricated2.fittings.Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated.3.




FINISHES2.12


Finish metal stairs after assembly.B.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -


Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessaryA.for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete andmasonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installingB.metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured fromestablished lines and levels and free of rack.

Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast intoC.concrete, unless otherwise indicated.

Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,D.masonry, or similar construction.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that areE.not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized afterfabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:F.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion1.resistance of base metals.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.2.Remove welding flux immediately.3.At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no4.roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacentsurface.

INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES3.2

Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen toA.




improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates.

Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been positionedB.and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut offflush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout, unless otherwise indicated.1.Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.2.

INSTALLING STEEL TUBE RAILINGS3.3

Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance fromA.inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if notindicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to buildingconstruction as follows:

Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.1.Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.2.For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or3.lag bolts.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING3.4

Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, andA.abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.





SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Steel pipe tube railings.1.

Related Sections:B.

Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs.1.Division 05 Section "Decorative Metal Railings" for ornamental railings fabricated from2.pipes and tubes.Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood3.blocking for anchoring railings.Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring4.railings.Division 09 Section "Access Flooring" for railings included with access flooring.5.


Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by aA.qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowableB.design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:

Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.1.

Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the followingC.loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:1.

Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.a.Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.b.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1



Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.c.

Infill of Guards:2.

Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..a.Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.b.

Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperatureD.changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.1.

Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulatingE.metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

SUBMITTALS1.4


Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.1.Railing brackets.2.Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.3.

LEED Submittals:B.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1[ and Credit MR 4.2]: Indicating percentages by weight1.of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content.Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.


Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design[,D.including mechanical finishes on stainless steel].

Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.E.

Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails,1.posts, and balusters.Fittings and brackets.2.Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail,3.post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height.

Show method of [finishing] [connecting] members at intersections.a.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performanceF.requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified




professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer .G.

Welding certificates.H.

Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primersI.certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualifiedJ.testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.


Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.A.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,B."Structural Welding Code - Steel."

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:C.

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."1.AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."2.AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."3.


Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous withA.metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING1.7

Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paintA.and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoatsare compatible with one another.

Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, andB.directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and itemswith integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items toProject site in time for installation.

Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not supportC.railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.




PRODUCTSPART 2 -

METALS, GENERAL2.1

Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, rollerA.marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish asB.supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

STEEL AND IRON2.2

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steelA.products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content isnot less than [25] <Insert number> percent.

Tubing: [ASTM A 500 (cold formed)] [or] [ASTM A 513].B.

Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unlessC.another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.1.

Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, square pattern, 2-inch woven-wire mesh, made fromD.0.135-inch nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510.

FASTENERS2.3

General: Provide the following:A.

Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or1.ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel2.fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.

Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, andB.class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types ofconstruction indicated[ and capable of withstanding design loads].

Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:C.

Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching1.them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.




Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching2.them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standardfastening method for railings indicated.Provide [Phillips] [tamper-resistant] [square or hex socket] flat-head machine screws3.for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

Post-Installed Anchors: [Torque-controlled expansion anchors] [or] [chemical anchors]D.capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installedin unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined bytesting according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with1.ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy [Group 1]2.[Group 2] stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.


Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.A.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 andB.compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with [Division 09 painting Sections.] [Division 09C.Section "High-Performance Coatings."] [Division 09 painting Sections and Division 09Section "High-Performance Coatings."]

Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with [Division 09 paintingD.Sections.] [Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings."] [Division 09 paintingSections and Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings."]

Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.E.


<Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name; product name ora.designation>.

Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.F.


<Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name; product name ora.




designation>.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.G.

Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansionH.cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching,and grouting compound.

Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to1.erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coatingand that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.

FABRICATION2.5

General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,A.member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage[, but not less than that required tosupport structural loads].

Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing andB.assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearlymark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintainstructural value of joined pieces.

Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius ofC.approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposedsurfaces.

Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.D.

Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. ProvideE.weep holes where water may accumulate.

Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.F.

Connections: Fabricate railings with either welded or nonwelded connections unless otherwiseG.indicated.

Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittingsH.designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion1.resistance of base metals.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.2.Remove flux immediately.3.At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness4.shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.




Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members withI.concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard systemof sleeve and socket fittings.

Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.J.Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is1.manufacturer's standard splicing method.

Form changes in direction as follows:K.

As detailed.1..2..3.

Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintainL.cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, orotherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.M.

Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close endsN.of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneousO.fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-1.resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structuralsupports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonryP.work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

For railing posts set in concrete, provide [steel] [stainless-steel] sleeves not less than 6 inchesQ.long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, withmetal plate forming bottom closure.

Perforated-Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from perforated metal made from [steel]R.[galvanized steel] [aluminum] [stainless steel] [same metal as railings in which they areinstalled].

Edge panels with U-shaped channels made from metal sheet, of same metal as perforated1.metal and not less than 0.043 inch thick.Orient perforated metal with pattern [parallel to top rail] [perpendicular to top rail]2.




[horizontal] [vertical] [as indicated on Drawings].

Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven-wire mesh crimped into 1-S.by-1/2-by-1/8-inch metal channel frames. Make wire mesh and frames from same metal asrailings in which they are installed.

Orient wire mesh with [diamonds vertical] [wires perpendicular and parallel to top1.rail] [wires horizontal and vertical].



Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,B.temporary protective covering before shipping.

Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces areC.acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variationsin the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components areacceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed tominimize contrast.

Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, ofD.railings.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verifyA.that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locatereinforcements and mark locations if not already done.


Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.A.

Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately inB.location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or1.finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical orother means without further cutting or fitting.




Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.2.Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel3.with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,C.concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.D.

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary forE.securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

RAILING CONNECTIONS3.3

Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connectingA.railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement fillercolored to match finish of railings.

Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.B.Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding isperformed in the shop or in the field.

ANCHORING POSTS3.4

Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have beenA.inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with anchoring cement, mixedand placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, [welded to post after placingB.anchoring material] [attached to post with set screws].

Leave anchorage joint exposed with [1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post] [anchoringC.material flush with adjacent surface].

ATTACHING RAILINGS3.5

Attach railings to wall with wall brackets[, except where end flanges are used]. ProvideA.brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

Use type of bracket with [flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger1.bolt] [predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage].Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural2.loads.




Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:B.

For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or1.lag bolts.


Clean [aluminum] [and] [stainless steel] by washing thoroughly with clean water and soapA.and rinsing with clean water.

Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, andB.abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shoppainting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.1.

Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, andC.abraded areas of shop paint are specified in [Division 09 painting Sections.] [Division 09Section "High-Performance Coatings."] [Division 09 painting Sections and Division 09Section "High-Performance Coatings."]

PROTECTION3.7

Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protectiveA.coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time ofSubstantial Completion.





SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2


Wood blocking[, cants,] and nailers.1.


Division 31 Section "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to wood1.framing.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

FASTENERS2.1

General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specifiedA.in this Article for material and manufacture.

Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative1.treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners[ with hot-dip zinc coatingcomplying with ASTM A 153/A 153M] [of Type 304 stainless steel].

Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below withB.capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed inunit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete asdetermined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing andinspecting agency.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -


ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1



Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, andA.fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.Locate nailers, blocking, [grounds, ]and similar supports to comply with requirements forattaching other construction.

Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.B.

Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or withC.fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere withfunction of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints oroptimum joint arrangement.

Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,D.complying with the following:

Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.1.Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof2.Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's Uniform Building Code.Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's BOCA National Building Code.3.Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in SBCCI's Standard Building Code.4.Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),5."Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2),6."Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code.

Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fullyE.penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do notcountersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.

For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, withF.fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.

Comply with [approved] [indicated] fastener patterns where applicable.[ Before1.fastening, mark fastener locations, using a template made of sheet metal, plastic, orcardboard.]Use finishing nails, unless otherwise indicated. [Do not countersink nail heads]2.[Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler].

PROTECTION3.2

Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet,A.apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply withEPA-registered label.


ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2



SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2


Interior standing and running trim.1.Interior railings.2.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:A.

NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.1.NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association.2.NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.3.SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.4.WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.5.WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.6.

MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.B.

MDO Plywood: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.C.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate componentA.materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and applicationdetails.


Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber,A.plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.

INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 1



Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.

Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meetB.requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must bestored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meetrequirements specified for installation areas.


Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials untilA.building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, andHVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancylevels during the remainder of the construction period.

Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.B.

Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,1.discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or2.splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS, GENERAL2.1

Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC'sA.Board of Review.

Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating1.grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece[, or omit grade2.stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency].

STAIRS AND RAILINGS2.2

Treads: 1-1/16-inch, clear, kiln-dried, edge-glued, [rift-sawn red oak] [red oak] [hardA.maple] [poplar] <Insert species> stepping with half-round nosing.

Finished Stringers: 3/4-inch finish boards as specified above for interior lumber trim forB.opaque finish.

Interior Railings: Clear, kiln-dried [red oak] [hard maple] [yellow poplar] <Insert species>,C.of pattern indicated, either solid or laminated.




Balusters: 1-1/16-inch- square, clear, kiln-dried [red oak] [hard maple] [yellow poplar]D.<Insert species>.


Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type,A.size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,concealed where possible.

Where galvanized finish is indicated, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip1.galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturerB.for general carpentry use.

Use wood glue that has a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to 401.CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that isC.recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.

FABRICATION2.4

Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finishedA.work:

Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds.1.Wood board paneling.2.

Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges ofB.lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installationA.tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moistureB.damaged, and mold damaged.





PREPARATION3.2

Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.A.

Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity inB.installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours[ unless longer conditioning is recommended bymanufacturer].


Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequatelyA.seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.

Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.1.

Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. UseB.concealed shims where necessary for alignment.

Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as1.recommended by manufacturer.Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable.2.Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior3.finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inchmaximum offset for reveal installation.Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and4.with no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers withineach flight.Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.5.Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finishcarpentry.

STAIR AND RAILING INSTALLATION3.4

Treads and Risers at Interior Stairs: Secure treads and risers by gluing and nailing to roughA.carriages.

Closed Stringers: [House treads and risers into wall stringers, glue, and wedge into1.place] [Cope wall stringers to fit tightly over treads and risers].Open Stringers: Miter risers and stringer at open stringers. Extend tread over open2.stringers and finish with bullnose edge[ cut from tread stock and fitted to tread withmitered return at nosing].

Balusters: Dovetail or mortise balusters into treads, glue, and nail in place. Let into railingsB.and glue in place.




Newel Posts: Secure newel posts to stringers, rough carriages, and risers with countersunk-C.head wood screws and glue.

Railings: Secure wall rails with metal brackets. Fasten freestanding railings to newel posts andD.to trim at walls with countersunk-head wood screws or rail bolts, and glue. Assemble railingsat goosenecks, easements, and splices with rail bolts and glue.

ADJUSTING3.5

Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements.A.Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements andshows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

CLEANING3.6

Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-appliedA.finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

PROTECTION3.7

Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during remainder of theA.construction period.

Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and moldB.damaged.

Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,1.discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or2.splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.





SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2


Wood ironing board cabinets complete with folding-down ironing board.1.Solid-surfacing-material countertops.2.Closet and utility shelving.3.Shop finishing of interior woodwork.4.


Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging1.strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction beforewoodwork installation.Division 06 Section "Wood Paneling."2.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips forA.installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodworkinstallation.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: For [panel products] [high-pressure decorative laminate] [adhesive for bondingA.plastic laminate] [solid-surfacing material] [fire-retardant-treated materials] [cabinet hardwareand accessories] [handrail brackets] [and] [finishing materials and processes].


Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate productsA.similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1



service performance.

Installer Qualifications: .B.

Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibilityC.for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers [andwood doors with face veneers that are sequence matched with woodwork] [andtransparent-finished wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork].

Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural WoodworkD.Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction,finishes, installation, and other requirements.

Provide AWI Quality Certification Program [labels] [and] [certificates] indicating that1.woodwork[, including installation,] complies with requirements of grades specified.

Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with WI's "Manual of Millwork" forE.grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, andother requirements.

Provide WI-certified compliance [labels] [and] [certificates] indicating that woodwork[,1.including installation,] complies with requirements of grades specified.The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard2.and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with suchselections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.


Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodworkA.have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other thaninstallation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirementsspecified in "Project Conditions" Article.


Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wetA.work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relativehumidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wetB.work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and90 deg F and relative humidity between [25 and 55] [43 and 70] [17 and 50] <Inserthumidity range> percent during the remainder of the construction period.

Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verifyC.dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate




measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progressto avoid delaying the Work.

Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field1.measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying2.the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without fieldmeasurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction toensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

COORDINATION1.8

Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other relatedA.units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can besupported and installed as indicated.

Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in DivisionB.08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" to fabricator of architecturalwoodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS2.1

General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of quality standard for each type ofA.woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: [Red oak, plain sawn or sliced] [White oak,B.rift sawn or cut] [White ash, plain sawn or sliced] [Hickory, plain sawn or sliced] <Insertspecies and cut>.

Wood Products: Comply with the following:C.

Hardboard: AHA A135.4.1.Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.2.Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade [M-2] [M-2-Exterior Glue].3.Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1,4.Grade M-2, except for density.Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1[, Medium Density Overlay].5.Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.6.

Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished withD.thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components1.




with exposed or semiexposed edges.

Decorative Glass for Cabinet Doors: Provide decorative glass complying with Division 08E.Section "Decorative Glass Glazing."


Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried toA.less than 15 percent moisture content.

Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secureB.anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside faceof exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel orlead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.


Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for woodA.moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installationareas.

Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radiusB.indicated for the following:

Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or1.Less: 1/16 inch.Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.2.

Complete fabrication, including assembly[, finishing,] and hardware application, to maximumC.extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary forshipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance forscribing, trimming, and fitting.

Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will1.be complete.Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.2.Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can beremoved after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and checkmeasurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawingsbefore disassembling for shipment.

Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbingD.fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates orroughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutoutsto remove splinters and burrs.




Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and inE.GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops.

WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH2.4

Grade: Premium .A.

Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: [Red oak, plain sawn or sliced] [White ash,B.plain sawn or sliced] [White birch, plain sawn or sliced] [As indicated] <Insert species andcut>.

Grain Direction: [Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels] [Horizontally1.for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels] [As indicated].Veneer Matching within Panel Face: [Running] [Balance] [Center-balance] match.2.

Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:C.

Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: [Same species and cut indicated for exposed1.surfaces] [Thermoset decorative panels] [Compatible species to that indicated forexposed surfaces, stained to match].Drawer Sides and Backs: [Solid-hardwood lumber, same species indicated for2.exposed surfaces] [Solid-hardwood lumber, stained to match species indicated forexposed surfaces] [Solid-hardwood lumber] [Thermoset decorative panels].Drawer Bottoms: [Hardwood plywood] [Thermoset decorative panels].3.

Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments andD.drawers, unless located directly under tops.

LAMINATED-PLASTIC LABORATORY TOPS2.5

Grade: .A.

High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: .B.

Colors and Patterns: Provide materials and products that result in colors and patterns ofC.exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

As indicated by manufacturer's designations.1.As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of [solid colors] [colors and2.patterns].

Core Material: .D.

CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING2.6




Grade: .A.

Shelf Material: 3/4-inch [solid lumber] [veneer-faced panel product with solid-lumberB.edge] [veneer-faced panel product with veneer edge banding] [thermoset decorative panelwith solid-lumber edge] [thermoset decorative panel with PVC or polyester edge banding][medium-density fiberboard with solid-lumber edge] [particleboard with solid-lumberedge] [medium-density fiberboard with radiused edge] [particleboard with radiused andfilled edge].

Cleats: 3/4-inch [solid lumber] [thermoset decorative panel] [panel product].C.

Wood Species: [Red oak] [Match species indicated for other types of transparent-finishedD.architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated][Match species indicated for door to closet where shelving is located] [Any closed-grainhardwood] [Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine] <Insert species>.

SHOP FINISHING2.7

Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for transparent-A.finished items specified to be field finished. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for materialand application requirements.

Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, fillingB.countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishingarchitectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to1.concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grainsurfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not requirebackpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorativepanels.

Transparent Finish:C.

Staining: [None required] [Match approved sample for color] [Match Architect's1.sample].Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-2.grain wood before staining and finishing.Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.3.Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to4.open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.

Apply wash-coat sealer after staining and before filling.a.

Sheen: [Flat, 15-30] [Satin, 31-45] [Semigloss, 46-60] [Gloss, 61-100] gloss units5.measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.




EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1

Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions inA.installation areas.

Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion andB.complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

INSTALLATION3.2

Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2A.for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements forB.fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.C.Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finishD.at cuts.

Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. SecureE.with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation.Use fine finishing nails[ or finishing screws] for exposed fastening, countersunk and filledflush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.


Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visualA.defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniformappearance.

Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes toB.restore damaged or soiled areas.





SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2


Fluid-applied membrane air barrier, vapor retarding.1.


Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedded flashings.1.Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashings.2.Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.3.

DEFINITIONS1.3

ABAA: Air Barrier Association of America.A.

Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied toB.an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movementthrough the wall.


General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor- air barrier[ and as aA.liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensationor water penetration]. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substratemovement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes,and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceedingspecified limits.


Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar inA.

FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - 1



material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted inapplications with a record of successful in-service performance [and that is an ABAA-licensed contractor, employs certified and registered installers, and complies with ABAA'sQuality Assurance Program] <Insert requirements>.


Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected locationA.and within temperature range required by air barrier manufacturer.

Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.B.

Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.C.

Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.D.


Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrateA.temperatures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmentalconditions that affect performance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wetsubstrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

AUXILIARY MATERIALS2.1

General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use andA.compatible with air barrier membrane. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOClimits of authorities having jurisdiction.

Primer: Liquid [waterborne] [solvent-borne] primer recommended for substrate byB.manufacturer of air barrier material.

Counterflashing Strip: Modified bituminous, 40-mil- thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 32C.mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to an 8-mil- thick, crosslaminated polyethylene film withrelease liner backing.

Butyl Strip: Vapor-retarding, 30- to 40-mil- thick, self-adhering; polyethylene-film-reinforcedD.top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive with release liner backing.

Modified Bituminous Strip: Vapor-retarding, 40-mil- thick, smooth-surfaced, self-adhering;E.consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick polyethylene film withrelease liner backing.




Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.F.

Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.G.

Adhesive and Tape: Air barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitiveH.adhesive tape.

Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, [0.0187 inch] [0.0250 inch] <InsertI.dimension> thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners.

Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1- or 2-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foamJ.sealant, 1.5 to 2.0 lb/cu. ft density; flame spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162;with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.

Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low-K.modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substratesindicated, Use O. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withA.requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other1.contaminants.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.2.

SURFACE PREPARATION3.2

Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.A.Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application.

Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and oversprayB.affecting other construction.

Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and otherC.penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,D.holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate patching membrane.

Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.E.




At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners andF.edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to anotherG.with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuoussupport for air barrier.

TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION3.3

Install strips, transition strips, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier manufacturer'sA.written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous airbarrier.

Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base1.flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.Install [butyl] [modified bituminous] strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that2.a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates.

Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will beB.covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane airC.barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing andwindow systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exteriordoor framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials[as indicated].

At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate withD.termination mastic.

Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommendedE.application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied withinthese temperature ranges.

Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, andF.miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant.

Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations withG.termination mastic.

Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch- wide, [modifiedH.bituminous] [counterflashing] strip.

Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed byI.metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.




Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit andJ.flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repairedareas in strip direction.

AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION3.4

Apply air barrier membrane to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve aA.continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

Apply air barrier membrane within manufacturer's recommended application temperatureB.ranges.

Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will beC.covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

Apply a continuous unbroken air barrier to substrates according to the following minimumD.thickness. Apply membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties.

Apply [strip and transition strip a minimum of 1 inch onto cured air membrane] [or]E.[strip and transition strip over cured air membrane overlapping 3 inches onto eachsurface] according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.F.

Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repairG.substrates and reapply air barrier components.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.5

Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of constructionA.period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required1.by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed for more than [30] [60]<Insert number> days.Protect air barrier from contact with creosote, uncured coal-tar products, TPO, EPDM,2.flexible PVC membranes, and sealants not approved by air barrier manufacturer.

Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed workB.using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

Remove masking materials after installation.C.





SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Silicone joint sealants.1.Urethane joint sealants.2.Preformed joint sealants.3.Acoustical joint sealants.4.

Related Sections:B.

Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and1.gaskets.Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.2.Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.3.Division 09 Section "Tiling" for sealing tile joints.4.


Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approvedA.for installation of units required for this Project.

Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from singleB.manufacturer.


Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:A.

When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-1.sealant manufacturer[ or are below 40 deg F].When joint substrates are wet.2.Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for3.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1



applications indicated.Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed4.from joint substrates.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS, GENERAL2.1

Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatibleA.with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, asdemonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicatedB.for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints1.that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergonetesting according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water,unless otherwise indicated.

Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porousC.substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and havenot stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come inD.repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [MatchE.Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].


Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion ofA.sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substratetests and field tests.

Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealantsB.and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining orharming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated topromote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfacesC.adjacent to joints.




EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance withA.requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affectingjoint-sealant performance.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

PREPARATION3.2

Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants toA.comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of1.joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested andapproved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old jointsealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a2.combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developingoptimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaningoperations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.Porous joint substrates include the following:

Concrete.a.Masonry.b.Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.c.Exterior insulation and finish systems.d.<Insert other porous joint substrate>.e.

Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.3.Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do4.not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of jointsealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

Metal.a.Glass.b.Porcelain enamel.c.Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.d.<Insert other nonporous joint substrate>.e.

Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or asB.indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to




comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas ofjoint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer withC.adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact orby cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately aftertooling without disturbing joint seal.

INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS3.3

General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for productsA.and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of jointB.sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at positionC.required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to jointwidths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.1.Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.2.Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and3.replace them with dry materials.

Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same timeD.backings are installed:

Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.1.Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.2.Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow3.optimum sealant movement capability.

Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning orE.curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to formsmooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensurecontact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.1.Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not2.discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise3.indicated.Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.4.Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per5.Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.




Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.a.

Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements:F.

Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.1.Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with2.preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering abonding area of not less than 3/8 inch. Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch inside maskingtape.Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet3.extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniformcontact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical4.joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusionwith a razor knife.

Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately afterG.removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends,turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat tosealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, sealH.construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with acontinuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions atperimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer'swritten recommendations.

CLEANING3.4

Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methodsA.and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and ofproducts in which joints occur.

PROTECTION3.5

Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substancesA.and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are withoutdeterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damageor deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediatelyso installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.





SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Standard hollow metal doors and frames.1.Stock stile-and-rail hollow metal doors, sidelite and frames.2.

Related Sections:B.

Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into1.masonry construction.Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" for door2.hardware for hollow metal doors.Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and3.frames.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.A.

Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.B.

Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM-C.HMMA 861.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, materialA.descriptions, core descriptions, [fire-resistance rating,] [temperature-rise ratings,] and finishes.

Shop Drawings: Include the following:B.

Elevations of each door design.1.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1



Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.2.Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.3.Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.4.Details of each different wall opening condition.5.Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.6.Details of accessories.7.Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.8.

Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.C.

Samples for Verification:D.

For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 51.inches.

Other Action Submittals:E.

Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision1.of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.Coordinate with door hardware schedule.


Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.A.

Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeledB.by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at [positivepressure] [as close to neutral pressure as possible] according to [NFPA 252] [UBC Standard 7-2] [or] [UL 10B] [UL 10C].

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.C.


Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transitA.and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.1.

Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in aB.vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking.Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.





Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements beforeA.fabrication.

COORDINATION1.8

Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,A.templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchorbolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of theA.following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Workinclude, but are not limited to, the following]:

Amweld Building Products, LLC.1.Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.2.Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.3.Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.4.Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.5.Firedoor Corporation.6.Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.7.Habersham Metal Products Company.8.Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames.9.Kewanee Corporation (The).10.Mesker Door Inc.11.Pioneer Industries, Inc.12.Security Metal Products Corp.13.Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.14.Windsor Republic Doors.15.<Insert manufacturer's name>.16.

MATERIALS2.2

Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free ofA.scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.B.

Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for applicationC.indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices




for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according toD.ASTM C 143/C 143M.

Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);E.consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; withmaximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passingASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."F.

Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dryG.film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS2.3

General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated withA.smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated.Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

Design: Flush panel and stock embossed panels as indicated.1.Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,2.polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection[ and temperature-rise]a.ratings indicated.Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated withb.thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than [4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu] [6.0deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu] [12.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu] <Insert R-value> when testedaccording to ASTM C 1363.

Locations: Exterior doors.1)

Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: [Beveled edge] [Square edge] [Manufacturer's3.standard].

Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doorsB.complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level andmodel and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), [Model 1 (Full Flush)]1.[Model 2 (Seamless)] [Model 3 (Stile and Rail)].

STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES2.4




General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.A.

Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.B.

Fabricate frames as [knocked down] [face welded] [full profile welded] unless otherwise1.indicated.Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.2.

FRAME ANCHORS2.5

Jamb Anchors:A.

Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not1.less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 incheswide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and asB.follows:

Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.1.

STOPS AND MOLDINGS2.6

Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inchA.high unless otherwise indicated.

Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from sameB.material as frames in which they are installed.

ACCESSORIES2.7

Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.A.

FABRICATION2.8

Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately formA.metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Wherepractical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Projectsite, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in [SDI 117]B.[ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861].




Hollow Metal Doors:C.

Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit1.moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.2.

Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handlingD.limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metalas frames.

Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,1.flush, and invisible.[Sidelight] [and] [Transom Bar] Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible2.face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members atcrossings and to jambs by butt welding.Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners3.unless otherwise indicated.Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be4.grouted.Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot5.welds per anchor.Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:6.

Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom ofa.frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.1)

Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as7.follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.a.

Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- orE.hot-rolled steel sheet.

Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortisedF.hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the DoorHardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "DoorHardware."

Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to [ANSI/SDI A250.8]1.[ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861].Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door2.hardware.Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series3.specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.




Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with4.Division 26 Sections.

Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. FormG.corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow1.metal work.Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and2.type of installation indicated.

STEEL FINISHES2.9

Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning andA.pretreating.

Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer1.complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primermanufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despiteprolonged exposure.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withA.requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of theWork.

Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frameB.installation.

For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental toC.performance of the Work.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.D.

PREPARATION3.2

Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,A.filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposedfaces.

Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,B.




alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from1.jamb perpendicular to frame head.Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to2.plane of wall.Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel3.lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from4.head to floor.

Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted doorC.hardware.

INSTALLATION3.3

General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened inA.place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply withB.ANSI/SDI A250.11.

Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent1.anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leavingsurfaces smooth and undamaged.

At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.a.Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handlingb.limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.c.Install door silencers in frames before grouting.d.Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have beene.properly set and secured.Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shimf.as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with groutg.containing antifreezing agents.

Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,2.and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalleda.expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space3.between frames and masonry with grout.




Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,4.twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degreesa.from jamb perpendicular to frame head.Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal lineb.parallel to plane of wall.Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs onc.parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.d.

Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specifiedC.below. Shim as necessary.

Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:1.

Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.a.Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.b.Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.c.

Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.2.

Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and withD.hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not1.more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before finalA.inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replacedefective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately afterB.installation.

Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paintC.according to manufacturer's written instructions.





SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Solid-core doors and transom panels with wood-veneer medium-density-overlay faces.1.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edgeA.constructionand trim for openings.

LEED Submittals:B.

Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that flush wood1.doors comply with forest certification requirements. Include evidence that manufactureris certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product.a.

Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;C.construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; andother pertinent data.

Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.1.Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.2.Indicate requirements for veneer matching.3.

Samples for Initial Selection: For .D.

Samples for Verification:E.

Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges1.representing actual materials to be used.

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1



Provide samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.a.Finish veneer-faced door samples with same materials proposed for factory-b.finished doors.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.F.


Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody byA.an FSC-accredited certification body.

Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors[ and wood paneling] from single manufacturer.B.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.C.


Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.A.

Package doors individually in [plastic bags or cardboard cartons] [cardboard cartons andB.wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting].

Mark each door on[ top and] bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.C.


Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed andA.weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating andmaintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during theremainder of the construction period.

Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed andB.weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating andmaintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between [25 and 55][43 and 70] [17 and 50] <Insert humidity range> percent during the remainder of theconstruction period.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL2.1

Particleboard-Core Doors:A.




Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, [Grade LD-1] [or] [Grade LD-2] [, made with binder1.containing no urea-formaldehyde resin].Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 or2.M-2, except for density.Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors [as needed to eliminate3.through-bolting hardware.] [as follows:]

5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers.a.5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick,b.mop, or armor plates.5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.c.

Provide doors with [glued-wood-stave] [structural-composite-lumber] [either glued-4.wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber] cores instead of particleboard cores fordoors indicated to receive exit devices.

Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:B.

Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.1.

Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf.a.Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.b.

Mineral-Core Doors:C.

Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced1.quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved2.for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated [as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.] [as follows:]

5-inch top-rail blocking.a.5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates.b.5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates.c.[4-1/2-by-10-inch lock blocks] [5-inch midrail blocking], in doors indicated tod.have exit devices.

Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved3.screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements forexposed edges.

VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH2.2

Exterior Solid-Core Doors <Insert drawing designation>:A.

Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces Premium, with Grade A faces Custom (Grade A1.




faces) Economy (Grade B faces).Species: [Anigre] [Select white ash] [Figured select white ash] [Select white birch]2.[Cherry] [Select red gum] [Figured select red gum] [Select white maple] [Red oak][Persimmon] [Sapele] [Sycamore] [Walnut] [White oak] [Ucuuba (Virola Duckei)][Cupiuba (Goupia glabra)] <Insert species>.Cut: [Rotary cut] [Plain sliced (flat sliced)] [Quarter sliced] [Rift cut].3.Match between Veneer Leaves: [Book] [Slip] [Pleasing] match.4.Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: [Center-balance] [Balance] [Running]5.match.Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening[ or separated only by6.mullions].Exposed Vertical[ and Top] Edges: [Same species as faces or a compatible species]7.[Same species as faces] [Applied wood-veneer edges of same species as faces andcovering edges of faces] [Applied wood edges of same species as faces and coveringedges of crossbands].Core: Particleboard Glued wood stave Structural composite lumber Either glued wood8.stave or structural composite lumber.Construction: Five Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire9.unit abrasive planed before veneering.[ Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.]Adhesives: Type I per WDMA TM-6.10.

DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH2.3

Exterior Solid-Core Doors <Insert drawing designation>:A.

Grade: Premium Custom Economy.1.Faces: Medium-density overlay Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option.2.

Apply medium-density overlay to [standard-thickness, closed-grain, hardwooda.face veneers] [or] [directly to high-density hardboard crossbands].

Exposed Vertical[ and Top] Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood.3.Core: Particleboard Glued wood stave Structural composite lumber Either glued wood4.stave or structural composite lumber.Construction: Five Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire5.unit abrasive planed before veneering.[ Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.]Adhesives: Type I per WDMA TM-6.6.

FABRICATION2.4

Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposedA.surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and topedges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles.

Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber[, rabbeted,] meeting1.rails. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal




door frames.

Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.B.

Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.1.Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with2.applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors with water repellent after fabrication has beenC.completed but before .

Flash top of outswinging doors (with manufacturer's standard metal flashing).1.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.A.

Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing1.characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.Reject doors with defects.2.


INSTALLATION3.2

Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."A.

Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions andB.the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

ADJUSTING3.3

Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.A.

Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.B.Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows noevidence of repair or refinishing.





SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2


Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.1.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, [A.fire ratings,] materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.


Source Limitations: Obtain [each type of ]access door(s) and frame(s) through one sourceA.from a single manufacturer.

Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, whichB.may vary slightly from sizes indicated.

COORDINATION1.5

Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access toA.concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedulespecified in "Submittals" Article.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

STEEL MATERIALS2.1

Steel Sheet: [Uncoated] [or] [electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M with] cold-A.

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1



rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),exposed.

Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and MetalB.Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent1.Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond.Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.2.Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's3.standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosettingtopcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and bakingto achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's4.standard thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-filmthickness not less than 1.5 mils. Prepare, treat, and coat metal to comply with resinmanufacturer's written instructions.

Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receiveC.joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.

Plaster Beads: Casing bead formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet with flangeD.formed out of expanded metal lath and in size to suit thickness of plaster.

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS2.2

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offeringA.products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of theB.following:

Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.C.

Locations: [Wall] [Ceiling] [Wall and ceiling] surfaces.1.Door: Minimum [0.060-inch-] <Insert dimension> thick sheet metal, set flush with2.surrounding finish surfaces.Frame: Minimum [0.060-inch-] <Insert dimension> thick sheet metal with [drywall]3.[plaster] bead flange.Hinges: [Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type] [Continuous piano].4.Lock: [Cylinder] [Mortise cylinder].5.

Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Division 08a.Section "[Door Hardware] [Door Hardware (Scheduled by DescribingProducts)]."




FABRICATION2.3

General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready forA.installation.

Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materialsB.with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seammarks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. FurnishC.attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supportsindicated.

For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for [gypsum board] [and]1.[gypsum base] securely attached to perimeter of frames.For trimless frames with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide zinc-2.coated expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames.Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.3.Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.[ Furnish4.adjustable metal masonry anchors.]

Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane whenD.closed.

For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.1.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.A.

Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panelsB.aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.

Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.C.


Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.A.

Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.B.





SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes operable aluminum-framed windows for exterior locations.A.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:A.

C: Commercial.1.

Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:B.

Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot used to determine the structural1.test pressure and water test pressure.

Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of theC.design pressure.

Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size).D.Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size tocomply with requirements for performance class.


General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirementsA.indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified,and that are of minimum test size indicated below:

Size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for [gateway performance] [optional1.performance grade] [gateway performance for both gateway performance andoptional performance grade].Size indicated [on Drawings] [in a schedule].2.<Insert size.>3.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1



Windborne-Debris Resistance: Provide glazed windows capable of resisting impact fromB.windborne debris, based on the pass/fail criteria as determined from testing glazed windowsidentical to those specified, according to [ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E1996] [or] [AAMA 506] <Insert test method> and requirements of authorities havingjurisdiction.

Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermalC.movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surfacetemperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure ofjoint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineeringcalculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-skyheat loss.

Temperature Change (Range): [120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces]1.<Insert range>.


Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer forA.installation of units required for this Project.

Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to1.assume engineering responsibility.Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum windows, including Shop2.Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units inassemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows thatB.meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance byinclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.

Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a singleC.manufacturer.

Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements forD.aluminum windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects areindicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assembliesas they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performancecharacteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods includingpreconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminumE.windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "ProductRequirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements.

Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with1.




Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatorydata to Architect for review.

Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North AmericanF.Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and GlassDoors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components,accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.

Provide [AAMA] [WDMA]-certified aluminum windows with an attached label.1.

Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers andG.with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.


Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurements beforeA.fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying1.the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum windowswithout field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual openingdimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1



Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the productC.indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or acomparable product by one of the following:

WINDOW <Insert drawing designation>2.2

Window Type: .A.

AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum windows of performanceB.indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS[ unless more stringentperformance requirements are indicated].




GLAZING2.3

Glass <Insert drawing designation>: [Clear, insulating-glass units] [Clear, insulating-A.glass units, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered on second or thirdsurface,] [Clear, insulating-glass units, argon gas filled, with low-E coating pyrolytic onsecond surface or sputtered on second or third surface,] <Insert glass type, description,and performance requirements> complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing."

Glazing System: [Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that producesB.weathertight seal.] [Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that producesweathertight seal and complies with requirements for windborne-debris resistance.][Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system as indicated in Division 08 Section"Glazing."] <Insert glazing requirements.>

FABRICATION2.4

Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assemblingA.components and anchoring windows.

Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilatorB.framing.

Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum windows with an integral, concealed,C.low-conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window membersexposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.

Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505; determine the allowable design1.shear flow per the appendix in AAMA 505.Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging2.thermal breaks at frame or vent sash.

Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.D.

Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural waterE.penetration.

Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 08 Section "Glazing"F.and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames.








ALUMINUM FINISHES2.6

Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the AluminumA.Association for designating aluminum finishes.

Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular asB.fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complyingwith AAMA 611.

High-Performance Organic Finish (3-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (ChemicalC.Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coatings; OrganicCoating: manufacturer's standard 3-coat, thermocured system consisting of speciallyformulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, withboth color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluorideresin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply withAAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with InstallerA.present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditionsaffecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, andoperational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers,and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation.

Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction1.debris.Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at2.joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3inches of opening.Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag;3.without sharp edges or offsets at joints.




Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.4.

INSTALLATION3.2

Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installingA.windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.

Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermalB.movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wallflashing and other adjacent construction.

Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.C.

Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moistureD.migrating within windows to the exterior.

Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolyticE.action at points of contact with other materials.

ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION3.3

Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, [operators, ]and accessories for aA.tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.Lubricate hardware and moving parts.

Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protectiveB.coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting fromC.construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exteriorconcrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, removecontaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

DEMONSTRATION3.4

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toA.adjust, operate, and maintain window operating system. Refer to Division 01 Section"Demonstration and Training."





SECTION 087111 - DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2


Commercial door hardware for the following:1.

Swinging doors.a.Other doors to the extent indicated.b.

Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.2.


Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" [for astragals provided as part of1.fire-rated labeled assemblies] [and] [for door silencers provided as part of hollow-metalframes].Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for [astragals] [and] [integral intumescent2.seals] provided as part of fire-rated labeled assemblies.Division 10 Section "Postal Specialties" for mailbox units which require keying.3.

Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating,C.purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.

Pivots thresholds weather stripping specified in other Sections.1.Permanent cores to be installed by Owner.2.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size.A.Tag with full description for coordination with the door hardware sets. Submit Samples before,or concurrent with, submission of the final door hardware sets.

Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged1.through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of

DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 087111 - 1



operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturerB.and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locks latches closers.

Other Action Submittals:C.

Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of [Installer] [Architectural1.Hardware Consultant], detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Includeschematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations.


Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered toA.Project site.

Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets,B.and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item orpackage.

Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.C.

Deliver keys[ and permanent cores] to Owner by registered mail or overnight packageD.service.

COORDINATION1.5

Coordinate layout and installation of recessed [pivots] [and] [closers] with floor construction.A.Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements arespecified in Division 03.

Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified toB.be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work toconfirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to complywith indicated requirements.

Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardwareC.with connections to [power supplies] [fire alarm system and detection devices] [accesscontrol system] [security system] [building control system].

WARRANTY1.6

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orA.replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specifiedwarranty period.




Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:1.

Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.a.Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.b.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normalc.weathering and use.

Warranty Period: [Three] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion,2.except as follows:

[Electromagnetic] [Delayed-Egress] Locks: [Five] <Insert number> years froma.date of Substantial Completion.Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.b.Manual Closers: [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantialc.Completion.Concealed Floor Closers: [Five] [10] [25] <Insert number> years from date ofd.Substantial Completion.

EXTRA MATERIALS1.7

Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below, before installation begins, that matchA.products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified withlabels describing contents.

Door Hardware: <Insert detailed descriptions and specific numbers of units.>1.Electrical Parts: <Insert detailed descriptions and specific numbers of units.>2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE2.1

General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section[A.and door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule] [ and door hardware setsindicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article].

Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated.1.Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of2.operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply toB.product selection:

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the1.manufacturers specified.




HINGES, GENERAL2.2

Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:A.

Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.1.Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.2.For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 303.inches of door height greater than 120 inches.

Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) intoB.wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.

Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:C.

Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges.1.Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges.2.Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges.3.

Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:D.

Interior Hinges: [Brass, with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads]1.[Steel, with steel pin] [Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin].Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: [Steel, with steel pin] [Stainless steel, with2.stainless-steel pin].

Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings:E.

Hospital Tips: Slope ends of hinge barrel.1.Decorator Tips: [Oval] [Ball] [Steeple] [Urn] [Acorn].2.Safety Stud: Designed for stud in one leaf to engage hole in opposing leaf.3.Maximum Security Pin: Fix pin in hinge barrel after it is inserted.4.Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove5.in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for [outswinging exteriordoors] [and] [outswinging corridor doors with locks].Corners: [Square] [5/32-inch radius] [1/4-inch radius] [5/8-inch radius].6.

Electrified Functions for Hinges: Comply with the following:F.

Monitoring: Concealed electrical monitoring switch.1.Power Transfer and Monitoring: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at each leaf2.and continuous through hinge knuckle, and with concealed electrical monitoring switch.

Fasteners: Comply with the following:G.

Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.1.




HINGES2.3

Butts and Hinges: Listed under Category A in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."A.

Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.B.

[Available ]Manufacturers:C.

Baldwin Hardware Corporation.1.

Antifriction-Bearing, Swing-Clear, Full-Mortise (Butt) Hinges: BHMA A156.1, [heavyD.weight; Grade 1, with 4 ball bearings] [standard weight; Grade 2, with 2 ball bearings];button tips; nonrising removable pins; reversible; with 3/32-inch swaging; wrought, forged, orcast steel, or malleable iron.

Plain-Bearing, Swing-Clear, Standard-Weight, Full-Mortise (Butt) Hinges: BHMA A156.1,E.Grade 3, button tips, nonrising removable pins, reversible; wrought, forged, or cast steel, ormalleable iron.

Friction-Type, Heavy-Weight, Full-Mortise (Butt) Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, withF.adjustable friction discs or bearings; wrought, forged, or cast steel, or malleable iron.

Antifriction-Bearing, Swing-Clear, Heavy-Weight, Half-Mortise Hinges: BHMA A156.1,G.Grade 1, button tips, nonrising removable pins, reversible, equipped with 4 ball bearings;wrought, forged, or cast steel, or malleable iron.

Antifriction-Bearing, Swing-Clear, Heavy-Weight, Full-Surface Hinges: BHMA A156.1,H.Grade 1, button tips, nonrising removable pins, reversible, equipped with 4 ball bearings;wrought, forged, or cast steel, or malleable iron.

Antifriction-Bearing, Swing-Clear, Heavy-Weight, Half-Surface Hinges: BHMA A156.1,I.Grade 1, button tips, nonrising removable pins, reversible, equipped with 4 ball bearings;wrought, forged, or cast steel, or malleable iron.

Antifriction-Bearing, Standard-Weight, Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 2, full mortise,J.equipped with concealed bearing unit, handed; only knuckle visible when door is closed;wrought steel.

Pocket Hinges: Heavy weight; antifriction bearing; BHMA A156.1, Grade 1; jamb leaf visibleK.when door is closed and both leaves concealed when door is in pocket; type and size requiredfor application indicated; and base metal as follows:

Base Metal: [Cast, forged, or extruded brass or bronze] [Stainless steel] [Wrought,1.forged, or cast steel, or malleable iron].




SPRING HINGES2.4

Self-Closing Hinges: Listed under Category A in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."A.

[Available ]Manufacturers:B.

Baldwin Hardware Corporation.1.Bommer Industries, Inc.2.

Single-Acting, Full-Mortise, Spring Hinges: BHMA A156.17[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2], wroughtC.steel, with torsion spring[; listed for use on fire doors].

Single-Acting, Half-Surface, Spring Hinges: BHMA A156.17[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2], wroughtD.steel, with torsion spring[; listed for use on fire doors].

MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES2.5

Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets complyA.with the following:

Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2.1.Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.2.

Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 isB.indicated]; Series 4000.[ Listed under Category F in BHMA's "Certified ProductDirectory." ]

[Available ]Manufacturers:1.

Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.a.Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works.b.

Push-Pull Latches: Consisting of paddle handles that retract latchbolt; capable of beingC.mounted vertically or horizontally; and as follows:

Latch Type: [Bored] [Mortise].1.Lettering: Engrave with the words "Pull" and "Push."2.Lead Lining: 0.047 inch thick for escutcheon plate.3.

AUXILIARY LOCKS AND LATCHES2.6

Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 isA.indicated].[ Listed under Category E in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."]





ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.a.Accurate Lock & Hardware Co.b.

Mortise Auxiliary Locks:2.

Deadlocks: Deadbolt operated by key [either side] [outside and turn inside] [onea.side].Deadlatches: Latchbolt and auxiliary deadlatch operated by key [either side]b.[outside and turn inside].Deadlocks for Sliding Doors: Expanding- or interlocking-type deadbolt operatedc.by key [either side] [outside and turn inside] [one side].Deadlatches for Sliding Doors: Hook-type latchbolt operated by key [either side]d.[outside and handle inside].

Rim Auxiliary Locks:3.

Latchbolt: Operated by key outside and turn inside.a.Deadlocking Latchbolt: Operated by key outside and turn inside.b.Deadbolt: Operated by key outside and turn inside.c.Rotary Deadbolt: Operated by key [either side] [outside and turn inside]d.[outside].Interlocking Deadbolt: Operated by key [either side] [outside and turn inside]e.[outside].

Push-Button Combination Locks: BHMA A156.5[, Grade 1 for cylindrical locks] [, Grade 2B.for mortise locks].


Kaba Ilco Inc.; a Kaba Group company.a.<Insert manufacturer's name.>b.

Lockset Configuration: [Standard] [Privacy with inside push button].2.Auxiliary Lock Configuration: [Deadbolt] [Deadlocking latch] [Deadlocking rim3.latch].Provide key override capability by means of cylinder.4.

ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS2.7

General: BHMA A156.23; electrically powered, of strength and configuration indicated; withA.electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door.[ Listed under CategoryE in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." ]

Type: Full exterior or full interior, as required by application indicated.1.




Strength Ranking: [1500 lbf] [1000 lbf] [500 lbf].2.Inductive Kickback Peak Voltage: Not more than [53] [0] V.3.Residual Magnetism: Not more than [4 lbf] [0 lbf] to separate door from magnet.4.

Delayed-Egress Locks: BHMA A156.24.[ Listed under Category G in BHMA's "CertifiedB.Product Directory." ]

Security Grade: Activated from secure side of door by initiating device.1.Movement Grade: Activated by door movement as initiating device.2.

Configuration: Direct-hold type.C.

Mounting: Lock mounted on face of header; strike mounted on pull side of door with1.angle bracket.Mounting: Lock mounted on side of jamb; strike mounted flush on push side of door.2.

Configuration: Shear type.D.

Mounting: Lock mortised in header; strike mortised in top of door.1.Mounting: Lock mortised in jamb; strike mortised in edge of door.2.Mounting: Lock mortised in bottom of door; strike mortised in floor.3.Mounting: Lock mortised in floor; strike mortised in bottom of door.4.

Optional Features:E.

Magnetic bond sensor.1.Continuous housing for full width of door.2.Continuous housing for full height of door.3.Single LED indicators.4.Double LED indicators.5.Adjustable time delay with automatic relock.6.Integral door position switch.7.

[Available ]Manufacturers:F.

Door Controls International.1.Doorguard Systems, Inc.2.

EXIT DEVICES, GENERAL2.8

Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 isA.indicated].[ Listed under Category G in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."]

Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devicesB.are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with [the U.S. Architectural& Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." ] [ANSI A117.1.] [FED-




STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards." ] <Insert local regulation.>

Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the1.wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.

Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall notC.require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, orspecial knowledge for operation.

Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable toD.authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.

Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testingE.and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panicprotection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.

Fire-Exit Removable Mullions: Provide removable mullions for use with fire exit devicesF.complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agencyacceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testingaccording to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for whichthey have been tested.

Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.G.

Operation: [Rigid] [Movable] [Movable with monitor switch].1.

Outside Trim: [Lever] [Lever with cylinder] [Knob] [Knob with cylinder] [Pull] [Pull withH.cylinder] [Thumb turn with cylinder]; material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwiseindicated.

Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.1.

Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on [metal doors] [non-fire-rated wood doors] [fire-I.rated wood doors].

[Available ]Manufacturers:J.

Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.1.Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.2.

LOCK CYLINDERS2.9

Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5[, Grade 1] [, Grade 1A] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1A.unless Grade 1A is indicated] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated].

Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainlessB.steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:




Number of Pins: [Five] [Six] [Seven].1.Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.2.Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised3.trim ring.

Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with theC.following:

Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other1.manufacturers' cylinders.Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; for use only with core2.manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.

Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.D.

[Available ]Manufacturers:E.

ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.1.Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.2.

KEY CONTROL SYSTEM2.10

Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.5, Grade [1] [2]; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish;A.containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of [150] <Insertnumber> percent of the number of locks.

Wall-Mounted, Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-1.holding panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock.

Cross-Index System: [Multiple] [Single]-index system for recording key information. IncludeB.three receipt forms for each key-holding hook. Set up by [key control manufacturer] [Installer].


Key Control Systems, Inc.a.Lund Equipment Co., Inc.b.MMF Industries.c.Sunroc Corporation.d.<Insert manufacturer's name.>e.

Key Lock Boxes: Designed for storage of [two] [10] <Insert number> keys[, with tamperC.switches to connect to intrusion detection system].





ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.a.Knox Company.b.Supra Products.c.<Insert manufacturer's name.>d.

ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS2.11

Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unlessA.automatic or self-latching bolts are used.

Rigid, Housed Astragals: Gasket material held in place by metal housing; fastened to face ofB.door with screws.

Housing Material: [Aluminum] [Copper alloy (brass or bronze)].1.

Overlapping-with-Gasket Astragals: T-shaped metal, surface mounted on edge of door withC.screws; with integral gasket and base metal as follows:

Gasket Material: [Vinyl] [Silicone] [Sponge neoprene] [Brush pile] [Polypropylene].1.

CLOSERS, GENERAL2.12

Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devicesA.are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with [the U.S. Architectural& Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." ] [ANSI A117.1.] [FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards." ] <Insert local regulation.>

Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:1.

Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.a.Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch.b.

Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closerB.device with fire alarm system.

Flush Floor Plates: Provide finish cover plates for floor closers unless thresholds are indicated.C.Match door hardware finish, unless otherwise indicated.

Recessed Floor Plates: Provide recessed floor plates with insert of floor finish material forD.floor closers unless thresholds are indicated. Provide extended closer spindle to accommodatethickness of floor finish.

Power-Assist Closers: As specified in Division 08 Section "Automatic Door Operators" forE.access doors for people with disabilities or where listed in door hardware sets.




Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 isF.indicated].[ Listed under Category C in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." ]Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unlessotherwise indicated.


Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.a.Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.b.

STOPS AND HOLDERS, GENERAL2.13

Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 isA.indicated].

Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated.1.Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops arenot appropriate, provide overhead holders.

Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA A156.16[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless GradeB.2 is indicated].

Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimumC.5/8 by 3/4 inch; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.

Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimumD.diameter 1/2 inch; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.

[Available ]Manufacturers:E.

Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc.1.Baldwin Hardware Corporation.2.

THRESHOLDS, GENERAL2.14

Standard: BHMA A156.21.[ Listed under Category J in BHMA's "Certified ProductA.Directory." ]

Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibilityB.requirements, comply with [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers ComplianceBoard's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildingsand Facilities (ADAAG)." ] [ANSI A117.1.] [FED-STD-795, "Uniform FederalAccessibility Standards." ] <Insert local regulation.>

Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more1.




than [1/2 inch high] [3/4 inch high for exterior sliding doors].

Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch high.C.

[Available ]Manufacturers:D.

Hager Companies.1.M-D Building Products, Inc.2.

SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE, GENERAL2.15

General: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails, hangers, supports,A.bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.

Exterior Door Hardware: Galvanized steel or anodized aluminum.1.

Horizontal Sliding Door Hardware: Grade 1; rated for minimum door weight of [240 lb] [320B.lb] [450 lb] [560 lb] [640 lb] [800 lb] [1000 lb] [1500 lb].


Cox, Arthur & Sons, Inc.1.Hager Companies.2.

FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE, GENERAL2.16

General: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including overhead rails, hangers,A.supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.

Interior Doors: Provide door hardware for interior bifolding doors when not furnished as1.part of door package.

Bifolding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to [125 lb] [50 lb].B.


Cox, Arthur & Sons, Inc.1.Hager Companies.2.

MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE, GENERAL2.17

Boxed Power Supplies: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure; filtered andA.regulated; voltage rating and type matching requirements of door hardware served; and listedand labeled for use with fire alarm systems.




Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 isB.indicated] [, Grade 3].


Baldwin Hardware Corporation.a.Cal-Royal Products, Inc.b.

FABRICATION2.18

Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or tradeA.name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and asotherwise approved by Architect.

Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.1.

Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generallyB.prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according tocommercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminumfasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to matchsurface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,1.except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts forinstallation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only meansof securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow doorand frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications:2.

Strike plates to frames.a.

Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications unless door blocking is3.provided:

Closers to doors and frames.a.

Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.4.Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended5.Fasteners for Wood Doors."

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1




Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forA.installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, andother conditions affecting performance.

Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiringB.connections before electrified door hardware installation.

PREPARATION3.2

Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.A.

Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series.B.


Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independentA.Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in1.each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements,including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

ADJUSTING3.4

Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door toA.ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted tooperate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heatingand ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely1.from an open position of 30 degrees.Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage2.lock bolt.Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep3.period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 secondsto move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately [three] [six] <Insert number> months after date ofB.Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine andreadjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary toensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.





Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.A.

Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.B.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is withoutC.damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

DEMONSTRATION3.6

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toA.adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01Section "Demonstration and Training."

DOOR HARDWARE SETS3.7

Item Description FinishA.

Specifier's Note: The above items, their descriptions and finishes are to be scheduled by theB.Architect-of-Record and shall include, at a minimum and where required, peepholes, closers,locksets with integrated deadbolt and master entry capability.

Note: Although residental in nature, it is the design intent that the door hardware1.employed in the Work shall be commerical quality, BHMA Grade 1.





SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

GENERALPART 1 -



DEFINITIONS1.2

Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined inA.referenced glazing publications.

Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according toB.ASTM C 1036.

Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.C.


General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind andA.impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable tothe following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gasketsto remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects inconstruction.

Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperatureB.changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.1.


Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings:A.A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved[ and certified] by coated-glassmanufacturer.

Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project whoB.are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according toC.

GLAZING 088000 - 1



ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain [ultraclear float glass] [tinted float glass] [coated floatD.glass] [laminated glass] [and] [insulating glass] from single source from single manufacturerfor each glass type.

Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from singleE.manufacturer for each product and installation method.

Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass productF.manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or inreferenced standards.

GANA Publications: [GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual"1.and ]GANA's "Glazing Manual."AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and2.AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped3.Glazing."IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing4.Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at leastG.one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.


Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage toA.glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, orother causes.

Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealingB.units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrateA.temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and whenglazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL2.1

GLAZING 088000 - 2



Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites inA.thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than [6.0] <Insert thickness1.designation> mm.Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated2.throughout Project.

Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treatedB.float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass[ as needed to comply with "PerformanceRequirements" Article]. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass[ as needed to comply with"Performance Requirements" Article]. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provideKind FT heat-treated float glass.

Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance propertiesC.specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicatedbelow:

For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites [6.0 mm thick] [of1.thickness indicated].For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.2.For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall3.unit and for each lite.U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's4.WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,5.according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.6.

GLASS PRODUCTS2.2

Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.A.

Film-Faced Polished Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 1, Quality-B.Q6 and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.


<Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name; product name ora.designation>.

Mesh: [M1 (diamond)] [M2 (square)].2.

GLAZING 088000 - 3



MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS2.3

General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazingA.standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for applicationindicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.B.

Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus orC.minus 5.

Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glassD.manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (sideE.walking).

Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size andF.density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealantperformance.

Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency thatG.listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.

FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS2.4

Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and faceA.clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of productmanufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performancerequirements.

Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edgesB.with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.C.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with theA.following:

GLAZING 088000 - 4



Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and1.offsets at corners.Presence and functioning of weep systems.2.Minimum required face and edge clearances.3.Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.4.


PREPARATION3.2

Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.A.Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed soB.that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leavevisible marks in the completed work.

GLAZING, GENERAL3.3

Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, andA.other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those inreferenced glazing publications.

Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation toB.provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealantthicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glassC.from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edgedamage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performanceand appearance.

Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined byD.preconstruction testing.

Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazingE.publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course ofcompatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.F.

Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.G.

Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.1.Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and

GLAZING 088000 - 5



glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearancesand to comply with system performance requirements.Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant2.width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness oftape.

Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sidewaysH.in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according torequirements in referenced glazing publications.

Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.I.

Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.J.


Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossedA.streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Removenonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from constructionB.operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact withglass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces atC.frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged fromD.natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days beforeE.date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass asrecommended in writing by glass manufacturer.


GLAZING 088000 - 6



SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:A.

Glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing.1.


Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project whoA.are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer.B.

Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from singleC.source.

Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations:D.

GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to1.this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in thisSection or in referenced standards.GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional2.on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

Safety Glazing Products: For mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements inE.16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.


Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to preventA.damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, orother causes.

MIRRORS 088300 - 1



Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handlingB.mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glasssurfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.


Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidityA.conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS2.1

Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503[; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirrorA.coating process].

FABRICATION2.2

Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes.A.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, forA.compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affectingperformance of the Work.

Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror masticB.with existing finishes or primers.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfacesC.are dry.

INSTALLATION3.2

General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and withA.referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoidsdistorting reflected images.

MIRRORS 088300 - 2



Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for airB.circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with [mastic and ]mirror hardware. Attach mirrorC.hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors orinserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.


Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from constructionA.operations.

Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.B.

Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moistureC.from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.

Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspectionsD.that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommended in writing bymirror manufacturer.


MIRRORS 088300 - 3



SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:A.

Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).1.

SUBMITTALS1.3



Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-A.load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested inassembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and constructionB.identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classifiedaccording to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL2.1

Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.A.

Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless1.otherwise indicated.Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60]2.[Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40], hot-dipgalvanized, unless otherwise indicated.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1



SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS2.2

Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameterA.wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.

Hanger Attachments to Concrete:B.

Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching1.wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to [5] <Insertnumber> times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according toASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.

Type: [Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms]a.[Postinstalled, chemical anchor] [Postinstalled, expansion anchor].

Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from2.corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of typeindicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to [10] <Insertnumber> times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according toASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.C.

Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, [in size indicated on Drawings] [1 by 3/16 inch by lengthD.indicated] <Insert size>.

Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538E.inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [2-1/2 inches] [2 inches] [1-1/2 inches].1.

Furring Channels (Furring Members):F.

Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide1.flanges, 3/4 inch deep.Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.2.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.0179 inch]a.[0.0312 inch] <Insert thickness>.Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [1-5/8 inches] [2-1/2 inches] [3-5/8 inches]b.<Insert depth>.

Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.3.

Minimum Base Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.0179 inch]a.[0.0312 inch] <Insert thickness>.




Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound4.transmission.

Configuration: [Asymmetrical or hat shaped] [Asymmetrical] [Hat shaped].a.

Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of mainG.beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be1.incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:2.

Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.a.Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-C Fire Front 650-C 660-C Fire Front 670-Cb.Drywall Furring System.USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.c.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>d.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS2.3

General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.A.

Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding1.power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metalA.frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and otherconditions affecting performance.


PREPARATION3.2

Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation ofA.overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to buildingstructure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work andthat hangers will develop their full strength.

Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in1.




advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:B.

Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling1.runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Whereoffset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structurenot more than 24 inches o.c.After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary2.for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protectadjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.


Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.A.

Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavyB.trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.C.

Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framingD.members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS3.4

Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not lessA.than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assemblycomponents indicated.

Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated byB.building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:C.

Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling1.plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resultinga.horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger2.spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspensionsystem members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form oftrapezes or equivalent devices.




Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads withina.[performance limits established by referenced installation standards] <Insertdeflection limit>.

Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to3.inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate forsubstrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching4.to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate forstructure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate orotherwise fail.Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.5.Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts6.that extend through forms.Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.7.Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.8.

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.D.

Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems [with hangers used for support] <InsertE.requirements>.

Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systemsF.meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each otherand butt-cut to fit into wall track.

Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within [1/8 inch in 12 feet]G.<Insert tolerance> measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes andtransversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.





SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2


Interior gypsum board.1.

SUBMITTALS1.3


Samples: For the following products:B.

Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory1.indicated.


Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials andA.construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by anindependent testing agency.

STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and constructionB.identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classifiedaccording to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. inC.surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials andexecution.

Install mockups for the following:1.

Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.a.

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1



Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on2.exposed surfaces for review of mockups.Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.3.Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of4.Substantial Completion.

STORAGE AND HANDLING1.5

Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage fromA.weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flatto prevent sagging.


Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum boardA.manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.B.

Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are moldC.damaged.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,1.discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or2.splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PANELS, GENERAL2.1

Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each areaA.and that correspond with support system indicated.

INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD2.2

General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable toA.type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers1.offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:




Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the2.following:

Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.B.

Thickness: 1/2 inch.1.Long Edges: Tapered.2.

JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS2.3

General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.A.

Joint Tape:B.

Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.1.

Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that isC.compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

Prefilling: At open joints[, rounded or beveled panel edges,] and damaged surface1.areas, use setting-type taping compound.Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and2.trim flanges, use [setting-type taping] [drying-type, all-purpose] compound.

Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.a.

Fill Coat: For second coat, use [setting-type, sandable topping] [drying-type, all-3.purpose] compound.Finish Coat: For third coat, use [setting-type, sandable topping] [drying-type, all-4.purpose] compound.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal framesA.and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and moldB.damaged.


APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL3.2




Comply with ASTM C 840.A.

Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoidB.abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacentpanels not less than one framing member.

Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends withC.not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediateD.supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place taperededges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do notmake joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.E.

Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,F.etc.), except in chases braced internally.

Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke1.ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.2.Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof3.slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structuralG.abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trimedges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges andabutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openingsH.and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at bothfaces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and withmanufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flankingpaths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readilyI.installed after panels have been installed on one side.

APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD3.3

Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:A.

Ceiling Type: [As indicated on Drawings] [Ceiling surfaces].1.




INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES3.4

General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with sameA.fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's writteninstructions.

FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD3.5

General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,A.fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces fordecoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

Prefill open joints[, rounded or beveled edges,] and damaged surface areas.B.

Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intendedC.for tape.

PROTECTION3.6

Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,A.construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.B.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,1.discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or2.splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.





SECTION 093000 - TILING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Ceramic tile.1.Stone thresholds.2.Waterproof membrane.3.Crack isolation membrane.4.

Related Sections:B.

Division 07 Section "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing Elastomeric Sheet1.Waterproofing Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofing Hot Fluid-Applied RubberizedAsphalt Waterproofing" Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing for waterproofing underthickset mortar beds.Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and2.isolation joints in tile surfaces.Division 09 Section "Portland Cement Plastering" for portland cement scratch coat over3.metal lath on wall surfaces.Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" for cementitious backer units.4.Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for [cementitious backer units] [glass-mat,5.water-resistant backer board].

DEFINITIONS1.3

General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1A.apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSIB.A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSIA108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15,ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National StandardSpecifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

TILING 093000 - 1



Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.C.

Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.D.


Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with theA.following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:

Level Surfaces: Minimum <Insert required static coefficient of friction>.1.Step Treads: Minimum <Insert required static coefficient of friction>.2.Ramp Surfaces: Minimum <Insert required static coefficient of friction>.3.

SUBMITTALS1.5


LEED Submittal:B.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For [adhesives] [and] [sealants], including printed1.statement of VOC content.

Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, andC.locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finishedtile surfaces.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples ofD.accessories involving color selection.

Samples for Verification:E.

Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish1.required.[ For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of eachcolor blend.]Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and2.composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least [12inches square] <Insert size>, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in coloror colors approved for completed Work.Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory[ for each color and finish required].3.

Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.F.

Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tileG.manufacturer and Installer.

TILING 093000 - 2



Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.H.

Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product[ and special purpose tile].I.


Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain [tile of each type and color or finish] [tile of each type]A.[tile of each color or finish] [tile] from one source or producer.

Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent1.quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform qualityB.for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregatefrom one source or producer.

Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in thisC.Section from a single manufacturer for each product:

Waterproof membrane.1.Crack isolation membrane.2.Joint sealants.3.


Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labelsA.intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.B.

Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained andC.contamination can be avoided.

Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.D.

Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coatedE.surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bondingsurfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete andA.ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated inreferenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

TILING 093000 - 3



PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PRODUCTS, GENERAL2.1

ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,A.compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.1.

ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSIB.A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced byTCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirementsspecified.

Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory andC.package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken fromother packages and match approved Samples.

Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies asD.standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

Where tile is indicated for installation [in swimming pools] [on exteriors] [or] [in wet1.areas], do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturerspecifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and hasa record of successful in-service performance.

Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protectE.exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuousfilm of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.

TILE PRODUCTS2.2

Tile Type [CT-<#>]: Factory-mounted [unglazed] [glazed] ceramic mosaic tile.A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of1.the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated intothe Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product2.indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> orcomparable product by one of the following:Composition: [Porcelain] [Impervious natural clay or porcelain] [Vitreous or3.impervious natural clay or porcelain].Module Size: [1 by 1 inch] [1 by 2 inches] [2 by 2 inches] <Insert size>.4.Thickness: 1/4 inch.5.

TILING 093000 - 4



Face: [Plain] [Pattern of design indicated,] with cushion edges.6.Surface: [Smooth, without] [Slip-resistant, with] abrasive admixture.7.Finish: [Bright, opaque] [Bright, clear] [Mat, opaque] [Mat, clear] [Semimat,8.opaque] [Semimat, clear] [Vellum, opaque] [Vellum, clear] [Crystalline] <Insertdescription> glaze.Tile Color and Pattern: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match9.Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]<Insert color and pattern>.Grout Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's10.sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable[11.and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile]. Provide shapes as follows,selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

Base Cove: Cove, module size [1 by 1 inch] [2 by 1 inch] <Insert size>.a.Base Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bead (bullnose), module sizeb.[1 by 1 inch] [2 by 1 inch] <Insert size>.Base Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size [1 by 1c.inch] [2 by 1 inch] [2 by 2 inches] <Insert size>.Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bead (bullnose), moduled.size [1 by 1 inch] [2 by 1 inch] <Insert size>.Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size [1e.by 1 inch] [2 by 1 inch] [2 by 2 inches] <Insert size>.Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tilef.wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile.External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bead (bullnose),g.module size [1 by 1 inch] [2 by 1 inch] <Insert size>.External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module sizeh.[1 by 1 inch] [2 by 1 inch] [2 by 2 inches] <Insert size>.Internal Corners: Cove, module size [1 by 1 inch] [2 by 1 inch] <Insert size>.i.Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap, use anglej.pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness ofk.tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to providereduction in thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 inch across nominal 4-inch dimension.

Tile Type [CT-<#>]: Glazed wall tile .B.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of1.the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated intothe Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product2.indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> orcomparable product by one of the following:Module Size: [4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches] [6 by 4-1/4 inches] [6 by 6 inches] [200 by 2003.mm] [250 by 250 mm] [200 by 300 mm] <Insert size>.Thickness: 5/16 inch.4.

TILING 093000 - 5



Face: [Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges] [Plain with modified5.square edges] [Plain with cushion edges] [Pattern of design indicated, withmanufacturer's standard edges].Finish: [Bright, opaque] [Bright, clear] [Mat, opaque] [Mat, clear] [Semimat,6.opaque] [Semimat, clear] [Vellum, opaque] [Vellum, clear] [Crystalline] <Insertdescription> glaze.Tile Color and Pattern: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match7.Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]<Insert color and pattern>.Grout Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's8.sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.Mounting: Factory, back mounted.9.Mounting: Pregrouted sheets of tiles factory assembled and grouted with manufacturer's10.standard white silicone rubber.Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable[11.and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile]. Provide shapes as follows,selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved, module size [4-1/4 by 4-1/4a.inches] [6 by 6 inches] [6 by 3-3/4 inches] <Insert size>.Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Straight, module size [4-1/4 by 4-1/4b.inches] [6 by 6 inches] [6 by 2 inches] <Insert size>.Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose cap, module sizec.[4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches] [6 by 6 inches] [6 by 2 inches] <Insert size>.Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size [4-d.1/4 by 4-1/4 inches] [6 by 6 inches] [6 by 2 inches] <Insert size>.Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tilee.wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile.External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape withf.radius of at least 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated.External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size asg.adjoining flat tile.Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angleh.pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

Accessories: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, suitable forC.installing by same method as adjoining wall tile.

One soap holder[ with grab handle] for each shower and tub indicated.1.One paper holder at each water closet.2.Color and Finish: [Match adjoining glazed wall tile] [As indicated by manufacturer's3.designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect frommanufacturer's full range] [White, bright glaze] <Insert color and finish>.

WATERPROOF MEMBRANE2.3

TILING 093000 - 6



General: Manufacturer's standard product[, selected from the following,] that complies withA.ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Includereinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet: Self-adhering, SBS-modified-bituminousB.sheet with woven reinforcement facing; 0.040-inch nominal thickness.

Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, liquid-applied urethane, with aC.VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPAMethod 24), in a consistency suitable for trowel application and intended for use as bothwaterproofing and tile-setting adhesive in a two-step process.

SETTING MATERIALS2.4

Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02.A.

Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches by 0.062-inch1.diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.Latex Additive: [Manufacturer's standard] [acrylic resin] [or] [styrene-butadiene-2.rubber] water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of typespecifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixedportland cement and aggregate mortar bed.

Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.B.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of1.the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated intothe Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product2.indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> orcomparable product by one of the following:For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging3.mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.

Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or lessC.when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of1.the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated intothe Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product2.indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> orcomparable product by one of the following:Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to3.temperatures of up to 140 deg F and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified bymanufacturer for intended use.

TILING 093000 - 7



Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less whenD.calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of1.the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated intothe Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product2.indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> orcomparable product by one of the following:

GROUT MATERIALS2.5

Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.A.


Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets.B.

ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS2.6

General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply withA.the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "JointSealants."

Use sealants that have a VOC content of [250] <Insert limit> g/L or less when calculated1.according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant manufacturer.2.

Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealedB.joints unless otherwise indicated.

One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;C.Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated withfungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates thatare subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.


TILING 093000 - 8



DAP Inc.; [Titanium Enriched Kitchen and Bath Sealant] [100 percent Siliconea.Kitchen and Bath Sealant].Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.b.GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700.c.Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant.d.Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.e.Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White.f.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.g.

Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25;D.Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.


Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 550.a.Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Sonolastic SL 2.b.Pecora Corporation; [Dynatrol II-SG] [NR-200 Urexpan].c.Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-2c SL.d.Tremco Incorporated.; [THC-900] [THC-901] [Vulkem 245].e.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.f.

Chemical-Resistant Sealants: For chemical-resistant floors, provide chemical-resistantE.elastomeric sealant of type recommended and produced by chemical-resistant mortar and groutmanufacturer for type of application indicated, with proven service record and compatibilitywith tile and other setting materials, and with chemical resistance equivalent to mortar/grout.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of1.the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporatedinto the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc.a.<Insert manufacturer's name>.b.


Temporary Protective Coating: [Either product] [Product] indicated below that is formulatedA.to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile,mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaginggrout or tile.

Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil1.with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87.Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is2.specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.

TILING 093000 - 9



Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile andB.grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and groutmanufacturers.

Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard[ silicone] product for sealing grout joints and that doesC.not change color or appearance of grout.

MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT2.8

Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and groutA.manufacturers' written instructions.

Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.B.

Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, andC.other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performancecharacteristics for installations indicated.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, forA.compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affectingperformance of installed tile.

Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are1.incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substancesthat contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required byANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with [adhesives] [bonded mortar2.bed] [or] [thin-set mortar] comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01for installations indicated.

Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanicallya.scarified.Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding orb.grinding.

Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical3.units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if4.not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.

TILING 093000 - 10




PREPARATION3.2

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed withA.[adhesives] [or] [thin-set mortar] with trowelable leveling and patching compoundspecifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortarB.bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended andC.packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken fromother packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return tomanufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to preventD.grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film oftemporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

TILE INSTALLATION3.3

Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methodsA.specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installationmethods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and groutingmaterials used.

For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile1.installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

Tile floors in wet areas.a.Tile swimming pool decks.b.Tile floors in laundries.c.Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.d.Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.e.

Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form completeB.covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly atobstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marringC.visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items forstraight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and otherpenetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

TILING 093000 - 11



Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work andD.center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work tominimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unlessotherwise indicated.

For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within1.tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same2.size, align joints.Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on3.floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:E.

Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.1.

Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.F.

Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,G.contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of settingmaterials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above1.them.Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section2."Joint Sealants."

Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to[ cementitious] grout joints[ in tile floors] according toH.grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated groutjoints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION3.4

Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions toA.produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured andB.been tested to determine that it is watertight.

CLEANING AND PROTECTING3.5

Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they areA.free of foreign matter.

Remove [epoxy] [and] [latex-portland cement] grout residue from tile as soon as1.

TILING 093000 - 12



possible.Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written2.instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleanersrecommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleanersare safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protectmetal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with cleanwater before and after cleaning.Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer3.and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to preventdrain clogging.

Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction periodB.to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat ofneutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting isC.completed.

Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner fromD.tile surfaces.

INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE3.6

Bathtub/Shower Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring:A.

Tile Installation B411: Cement mortar bed (thickset); TCA B411 and ANSI A108.1A.1.

Tile Type: <Insert tile-type designation>.a.Bond Coat Mortar for Wet-Set Method: Dry-set portland cement mortar.b.Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.c.


TILING 093000 - 13



SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Resilient base.1.Resilient molding accessories.2.

SUBMITTALS1.3



Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according toA.ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.1.


Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, withA.ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less thanA.[70 deg F] <Insert temperature> or more than [95 deg F] <Insert temperature>, in spaces toreceive resilient products during the following time periods:

48 hours before installation.1.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1



During installation.2.48 hours after installation.3.

Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended byB.manufacturer, but not less than [55 deg F] <Insert temperature> or more than [95 deg F]<Insert temperature>.

Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have beenC.completed.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

RESILIENT BASE <Insert drawing designation>2.1

Resilient Base:A.


Allstate Rubber Corp.; Stoler Industries.a.Armstrong World Industries, Inc.b.Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.c.Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.d.Estrie Products International; American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.e.Flexco, Inc.f.Johnsonite.g.Mondo Rubber International, Inc.h.Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.i.Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.j.PRF USA, Inc.k.Roppe Corporation, USA.l.VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.m.

Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.B.

Material Requirement: [Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic)] [Type TS (rubber, vulcanized1.thermoset)] [Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic)] [Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset)or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic)].Manufacturing Method: [Group I (solid, homogeneous)] [Group II (layered)] [Group I2.(solid, homogeneous) or Group II (layered)].Style: [Cove (base with toe)] [Straight (flat or toeless)] [Butt to (fit-to-floor)] <Insert3.special style>.

Minimum Thickness: [0.125 inch] [0.080 inch] <Insert thickness>.C.




Height: [2-1/2 inches] [4 inches] [6 inches] [As indicated on Drawings].D.

Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.E.

Outside Corners: Preformed.F.

Finish: [Satin] [Matte] [Low luster] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].G.

Colors and Patterns: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample]H.[As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors].

RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY <Insert drawing designation>2.2

Resilient Molding Accessory:A.


Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.a.Flexco, Inc.b.Johnsonite.c.R.C.A. Rubber Company (The).d.Roppe Corporation, USA.e.VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.f.<Insert manufacturer's name>.g.

Description: Cap for cove carpet .B.

Material: Rubber.C.

Profile and Dimensions: [As indicated] <Insert profile and dimensions>.D.

Colors and Patterns: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample]E.[As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors].

INSTALLATION MATERIALS2.3

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based orA.blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer forapplications indicated.

Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products andB.substrate conditions indicated.




Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated1.according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.a.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximumA.moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified inB.other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreigndeposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


PREPARATION3.2

Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion ofA.resilient products.

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patchingB.compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are toC.be installed.

Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed1.at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately beforeD.installation.

RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION3.3

Do not stretch resilient base during installation.A.

Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.B.

RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION3.4




Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substratesA.throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of [carpet] [resilient floorcovering] that would otherwise be exposed.


Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilientA.products.

Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:B.

Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.1.Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.2.

Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from constructionC.operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.D.





SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes modular, [fusion-bonded] [tufted] <Insert carpet tile construction>A.carpet tile.


Division 09 Section "[Resilient Base and Accessories] [Resilient Tile Flooring]" for1.resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.Division 09 Section "Sheet Carpeting."2.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data onA.physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendationsfor each type of substrate.

Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. LabelB.each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designationindicated on Drawings and in schedules.

Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.1.


Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor CoveringA.Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification programrequirements.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant fluxB.classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1



Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements inC.Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."A.


Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and SectionA.7.12, "Ventilation."

Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete andB.dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated forProject when occupied for its intended use.

Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry toC.bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tilemanufacturer.

Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles,D.install carpet tiles before installing these items.

WARRANTY1.7

Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agreesA.to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanshipwithin specified warranty period.

Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,1.failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge2.raveling, snags, runs, [loss of tuft bind strength,] [dimensional stability,] [excess staticdischarge,] <Insert failure characteristic> and delamination.Warranty Period: [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.3.

EXTRA MATERIALS1.8

Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match productsA.installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labelsdescribing contents.

Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to [5] <Insert number> percent of amount installed for1.




each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd..

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

CARPET TILE <Insert designation>2.1

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:A.

<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>1.

Color: [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect froma.manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.Pattern: [Match Architect's samples] <Insert pattern>.b.Source: <Insert carpet tile supplier's name and contact information.>c.

Fiber Content: [100 percent nylon 6, 6] [100 percent nylon 6] [100 percent polypropylene]B.[100 percent wool] [80 percent wool; 20 percent nylon 6, 6] [80 percent wool; 20 percent nylon6] <Insert fiber and content by percentage.>

Fiber Type: <Insert proprietary fiber type.>C.

Pile Characteristic: Level-loop pile.D.

Yarn Twist: <Insert twist in TPI.>E.

Yarn Count: <Insert yarn count.>F.

Density: <Insert oz./cu. yd..>G.

Pile Thickness: <Insert inches> for finished carpet tile[ per ASTM D 6859].H.

Stitches: <Insert stitches per inch.>I.

Gage: <Insert gage in ends per inch.>J.

Surface Pile Weight: <Insert oz./sq. yd..>K.

Total Weight: <Insert oz./sq. yd.> for finished carpet tile.L.

Primary Backing/Backcoating: [Manufacturer's standard composite materials] [PVC]M.[Fiberglass-reinforced PVC] [Fiberglass-reinforced amorphous resin] [Reinforced polyurethanecomposite cushion] [Reinforced polyurethane composite] [Reinforced thermoplasticcopolymer] <Insert specific primary backing materials; consult manufacturers>.

Secondary Backing: [Manufacturer's standard material] <Insert specific secondary backingN.material>.




Size: [18 by 18 inches] [24 by 24 inches] [18 by 36 inches] [36 by 36 inches] <InsertO.dimension>.

Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: [Manufacturer's standard material] <Insert treatment>.P.

Antimicrobial Treatment: [Manufacturer's standard material] <Insert treatment>.Q.

Performance Characteristics: As follows:R.

Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than [0.45 W/sq. cm] [0.22 W/sq. cm].1.Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf per ASTM D 2646.2.Tuft Bind: Not less than [3 lbf] [5 lbf] [6.2 lbf] [8 lbf] [10 lbf] <Insert tuft bind> per3.ASTM D 1335.Delamination: Not less than [3.5 lbf/in.] [4 lbf/in.] <Insert force> per ASTM D 3936.4.Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch of specified size dimensions, as determined by5.physical measurement.Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less per ISO 2551 (Aachen Test).6.Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24.7.Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): <Insert NRC> per ASTM C 423.8.Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165.9.Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after [40] [60] <Insert number> AFU (AATCC10.fading units) per AATCC 16, Option E.Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria;11.not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal growth; perAATCC 174.Electrostatic Propensity: Less than [3.5] [2] <Insert number> kV per AATCC 134.12.Environmental Requirements: Provide carpet tile that complies with testing and product13.requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute's "Green Label Plus" program.

INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES2.2

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-basedA.formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suitB.products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements forinstalled carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated1.according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1




Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withA.requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and otherconditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, andpotential defects.

Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:B.

Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other1.materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and drynesscharacteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tilemanufacturer.Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-2.Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.3.


PREPARATION3.2

General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and withA.carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated toreceive carpet tile installation.

Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's writtenB.instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless morestringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible withC.adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanicalmethods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.D.

INSTALLATION3.3

General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tileA.manufacturer's written installation instructions.

Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.B.

Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.C.

Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-inD.furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut




edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removableE.flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cuttingF.by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining markingdevice.

Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.G.


Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:A.

Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner1.recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.2.Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.3.

Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of IndoorB.Installations."

Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipmentC.and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated orrecommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.





SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

GENERALPART 1 -




MPI Standards:A.

Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved1.Products List."Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural2.Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.


Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambientA.temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.1.Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.2.


Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures areA.between 50 and 95 deg F.

Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 degB.F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1


INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1




PAINT, GENERAL2.2

Material Compatibility:A.

Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another1.and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated bymanufacturer, based on testing and field experience.For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by2.manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

Colors: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [Match Architect'sB.samples] [As indicated in a color schedule] <Insert requirements>.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirementsA.for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existingB.finishes and primers.

Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfacesC.are dry.

Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and1.conditions.

PREPARATION3.2

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI ArchitecturalA.Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.B.If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to1.reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.




Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,2.identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, andC.incompatible paints and encapsulants.

Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required1.to produce paint systems indicated.

APPLICATION3.3

Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.A.

Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.1.Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.2.Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniturewith prime coat only.Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar3.hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats ofB.same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but providesufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured filmC.has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,D.roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and colorbreaks.

Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms andE.occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

Mechanical Work:1.

Uninsulated metal piping.a.Uninsulated plastic piping.b.Pipe hangers and supports.c.Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.d.Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inletse.and outlets.Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation coveringf.or other paintable jacket material.Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for fieldg.painting.<Insert mechanical items to be painted.>h.




Electrical Work:2.

Switchgear.a.Panelboards.b.Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for fieldc.painting.<Insert electrical items to be painted.>d.


Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at anyA.time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:

Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials1.being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,and certified in presence of Contractor.Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.2.Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being3.used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted withrejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials frompreviously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints areincompatible.


At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials fromA.Project site.

After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints byB.washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work ofC.other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, andleave in an undamaged condition.

At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged orD.defaced painted surfaces.





SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2


Panel signs.1.

DEFINITIONS1.3

ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers ComplianceA.Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings andFacilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."

SUBMITTALS1.4


Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.B.

Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by1.others, and accessories.Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements[, including tactile characters and2.Braille,] and layout for each sign.

Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sectionsC.of units showing the full range of colors available for the following:

Aluminum.1.

Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color,D.texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:

Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6-inch- long sections of extrusions and1.squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches.

SIGNAGE 101400 - 1



Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches square[ including border].2.Accessories: Manufacturer's full-size unit.3.<Insert Sample and size.>4.

Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.E.

Qualification Data: For [Installer] [and] [fabricator].F.

Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.G.


Installer Qualifications: [Fabricator of products] [An employer of workers trained andA.approved by manufacturer] <Insert requirements>.

Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate productsB.similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a singleC.manufacturer.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA AccessibilityD.Guidelines.


Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when[ existing and forecasted] weatherA.conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according tomanufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication andB.indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

COORDINATION1.7

Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.A.

WARRANTY1.8

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orA.replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warrantyperiod.

SIGNAGE 101400 - 2




Deterioration of metal finishes beyond normal weathering.a.Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors.b.

Warranty Period: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS2.1

Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminumA.producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength anddurability properties of Alloy 5005-H32.

PANEL SIGNS2.2


ACE Sign Systems, Inc.1.Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division.2.Allen Industries Architectural Signage3.Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc.4.APCO Graphics, Inc.5.ASI-Modulex, Inc.6.Best Sign Systems Inc.7.Bunting Graphics, Inc.8.Fossil Industries, Inc.9.Gemini Incorporated.10.Grimco, Inc.11.Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.12.InPro Corporation13.Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division.14.Mills Manufacturing Company.15.Mohawk Sign Systems.16.Nelson-Harkins Industries.17.Seton Identification Products.18.Signature Signs, Incorporated.19.Supersine Company (The)20.<Insert manufacturer's name.>21.

Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat underB.installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from

SIGNAGE 101400 - 3



corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:

Aluminum Sheet: [0.050 inch] [0.080 inch] <Insert dimension> thick.1.Edge Condition: Square cut.2.Corner Condition: Square.3.Mounting: [Framed] [Unframed] [As indicated].4.

Wall mounted with concealed anchors .a.

Color: [As indicated] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert5.color>.Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with6.contrasting colors.

Changeable Message Inserts: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of changeable messages in theC.form of [slide-in inserts] [transparent covers with paper inserts printed by Owner] [changeablepanel inserts for use in fixed frames] <Insert description>.

Furnish insert material and software for creating text and symbols for PC-Windows1.computers for Owner production of paper inserts.Furnish insert material cut-to-size for changeable message insert.2.

Panel Sign Schedule:D.

Sign Type <Insert designation>:1.

Sign Size: [As indicated] <Insert dimensions>.a.Message Panel Material: [As indicated] <Insert material>.b.Message Panel Finish/Color: <Insert finish/color.>c.Character Size: [As indicated] <Insert size>.d.Character Finish/Color: <Insert finish/color.>e.Text/Message: [As indicated] <Insert text/message>.f.Location: [As indicated] <Insert designation>.g.Room: <Insert designation.>h.Quantity: <Insert number.>i.

ACCESSORIES2.3

Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts forA.exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel orlead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be setinto concrete or masonry work.

FABRICATION2.4

General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.A.

SIGNAGE 101400 - 4



Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as1.necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly andinstallation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly.Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be2.inconspicuous.






Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals;A.Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: asspecified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's writteninstructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.

Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system1.complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils,medium gloss.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withA.requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

Verify that itemsare sized and located to accommodate signs.B.


SIGNAGE 101400 - 5



INSTALLATION3.2

Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described andA.complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion1.and other defects in appearance.

Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where moreB.stringent requirements apply.

Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled1.holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrateas recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.


After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.A.Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.


SIGNAGE 101400 - 6



SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Public-use washroom accessories.1.Private-use bathroom accessories.2.Underlavatory guards.3.Custodial accessories.4.

Owner-Furnished Material: <Insert product>.B.

Related Sections:C.

Division 08 Section "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors.1.Division 09 Section "Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories.2.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:A.

Construction details and dimensions.1.Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work2.and substrate preparation.Material and finish descriptions.3.Features that will be included for Project.4.Manufacturer's warranty.5.

Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finishB.requirements.

Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.1.

Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of eachC.accessory required.

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1



Identify locations using room designations indicated.1.

Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.D.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.E.


Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain productsA.from single source from single manufacturer.

COORDINATION1.5

Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances requiredA.for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to preventB.delaying the Work.

WARRANTY1.6

Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees toA.replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials orworkmanship within specified warranty period.

Warranty Period: [15] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.1.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS2.1

Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unlessA.otherwise indicated.

Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.B.

Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized afterC.fabrication.

Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-D.theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.




Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).E.

Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.F.

ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.G.

PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES2.2


A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.1.American Specialties, Inc.2.Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.3.Bradley Corporation.4.GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.5.Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.6.<Insert manufacturer's name>.7.

Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser <Insert drawing designation>:B.

Description: [Roll-in-reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler lockset]1.[Single-roll dispenser] [Double-roll dispenser] [Double-roll dispenser with shelf] <Insertdescription>.Mounting: [Recessed] [Partition mounted serving two adjacent toilet compartments]2.[Surface mounted].Operation: [Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle] [Noncontrol delivery with theft-3.resistant spindle] [Spindleless with tension-spring controlled delivery] [Spindleless withtension-spring controlled delivery and self-locking device extending through core thatprevents core removal until roll is empty] [Eccentric-shaped, molded-plastic spindlerevolves one-half revolution per dispensing operation for controlled delivery; core cannotbe removed until roll is empty] <Insert description>.Capacity: Designed for [4-1/2- or 5-inch-] [5-inch-] <Insert dimension> diameter tissue4.rolls.Material and Finish: [Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)] [Chrome-plated zinc alloy5.(zamac) or steel] [Satin-finish aluminum bracket with plastic spindle] [ABS plastic, gray]<Insert material and finish>.

Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser <Insert drawing designation>:C.

Mounting: [Recessed] [Semirecessed] [Deck mounted, recessed] [Surface mounted].1.Minimum Capacity: [400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels] [600 C-fold or 800 multifold2.towels] [400 single-fold towels] <Insert capacity>.Material and Finish: [Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)] [ABS plastic, gray] <Insert3.material and finish>.




Lockset: Tumbler type.4.Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.5.

Waste Receptacle <Insert drawing designation>:D.

Mounting: [Open top, recessed] [Self-closing disposal-opening cover, recessed]1.[Semirecessed] [Surface mounted] [Wall mounted for corner installation] [Freestanding][Undercounter] <Insert description>.Minimum Capacity: <Insert gal.>.2.Material and Finish: [Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)] <Insert material and finish>.3.Liner: [Reusable vinyl liner] <Insert liner description>.4.Lockset: Tumbler type for waste-receptacle.5.

Combination Towel (Roll) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle <Insert drawing designation>:E.

Description: Combination unit for dispensing preset length of roll paper towels, with1.removable waste receptacle.Mounting: Recessed.2.Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: [8-inch- wide, 800-foot- long roll] <Insert3.capacity>.Minimum Waste Receptacle Capacity: [8 gal.] [12 gal.] [15 gal.] <Insert value>.4.Material and Finish: [Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)] <Insert material and finish>.5.Liner: [Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner] <Insert liner description>.6.Lockset: Tumbler type for towel dispenser compartment[ and waste receptacle].7.

Liquid-Soap Dispenser <Insert drawing designation>:F.

Description: Designed for dispensing soap in [liquid or lotion] [lather] form.1.Mounting: [Deck mounted on vanity] [Deck mounted on lavatory] [Horizontally2.oriented, recessed] [Horizontally oriented, surface mounted] [Vertically oriented, surfacemounted].Capacity: <Insert oz.>.3.Materials: <Insert requirements for valve and reservoir materials and finishes>.4.Lockset: Tumbler type.5.Refill Indicator: Window type.6.

Grab Bar <Insert drawing designation>:G.

Mounting: Flanges with [concealed] [exposed] fasteners.1.Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.2.

Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin)[ on ends and slip-resistant texture in gripa.area].

Outside Diameter: [1-1/4 inches] [1-1/2 inches].3.Configuration and Length: [As indicated on Drawings] [Straight, 36 inches long] <Insert4.configuration and length>.




Mirror Unit <Insert drawing designation>:H.

Frame: [Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick] [Stainless-steel channel] [Stainless steel,1.fixed tilt] [Stainless steel, adjustable tilt].

Corners: [Manufacturer's standard] [Mitered and mechanically interlocked]a.[Welded and ground smooth].

Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated2.below.

One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action lockinga.mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.

Size: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimensions>.3.

PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES2.3

Shower Curtain <Insert drawing designation>:A.

Size: Minimum [6 inches] [12 inches] wider than opening by 72 inches high.1.Material: [Vinyl, minimum 0.006 inch thick, opaque, matte] [Duck, minimum 8 oz.,2.white, 100 percent cotton] [Nylon-reinforced vinyl, minimum 10 oz. or 0.008-inch- thickvinyl, with integral antibacterial agent] <Insert material>.Color: [White] [Green] [As selected from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.3.Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem.4.

Soap Dish <Insert drawing designation>:B.

Description: [With] [Without] washcloth bar.1.Mounting: [Recessed] [Surface mounted].2.Material and Finish: [Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)] <Insert material and finish>.3.

PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES2.4


Basco, Inc.1.Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.2.Franklin Brass by Liberty Hardware Manufacturing Corporation; a Masco company.3.GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.4.Ginger; a Masco company.5.Seachrome Corporation.6.




Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.7.<Insert manufacturer's name>.8.

Toilet Tissue Dispenser <Insert drawing designation>:B.

Description: [Single-roll dispenser] [Double-roll dispenser] [Single-roll dispenser with1.hood] [Double-roll dispenser with hood] <Insert description>.Mounting: [Recessed] [Surface mounted].2.Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls.3.Material and Finish: [Solid brass, polished] [Polished brass-plated zinc alloy (zamac)]4.[Polished chrome-plated brass] [Polished chrome-plated zinc alloy (zamac)] [Stainlesssteel, No. 4 finish (satin)] [Stainless steel, No. 7 finish (polished)] <Insert material andfinish>.

Shower Curtain Rod <Insert drawing designation>:C.

Outside Diameter: [1 inch] [1-1/4 inches].1.Mounting: Flanges with [exposed] [concealed] fasteners.2.Rod Material and Finish: [Solid brass, polished] [Polished chrome-plated brass]3.[Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)] [Stainless steel, No. 7 finish (polished)] <Insertmaterial and finish>.Flange Material and Finish: [Polished brass-plated zinc alloy (zamac)] [Polished chrome-4.plated brass] [Polished chrome-plated zinc alloy (zamac)] [Stainless steel, No. 4 finish(satin)] [Stainless steel, No. 7 finish (polished)] <Insert material and finish>.Accessories: Integral chrome-plated brass glide hooks.5.

Soap Dish <Insert drawing designation>:D.

Description: <Insert description>.1.Mounting: [Recessed] [Surface mounted].2.Material and Finish: [Solid brass, polished] [Polished brass-plated zinc alloy (zamac)]3.[Polished chrome-plated brass] [Polished chrome-plated zinc alloy (zamac)] [Stainlesssteel, No. 4 finish (satin)] [Stainless steel, No. 7 finish (polished)] <Insert material andfinish>.

Medicine Cabinet <Insert drawing designation>:E.

Mounting: [Recessed, for nominal 4-inch wall depth] [Surface mounted].1.Size: [12 x 18 by 24 inches] <Insert dimensions>.2.Door: [Framed mirror door concealing storage cabinet equipped with continuous hinge3.and spring-buffered, rod-type stop and magnetic door catch] <Insert description>.Shelves: [Three, adjustable] <Insert requirements>.4.Material and Finish:5.

Cabinet: .a.Mirror Frame: <Insert material and finish>.b.Door: <Insert material and finish>.c.Hinge: <Insert material and finish>.d.




Shelves: <Insert material and finish>.e.

Robe Hook <Insert drawing designation>:F.

Description: [Double] [Single]-prong unit.1.Material and Finish: [Solid brass, polished] [Polished brass-plated zinc alloy (zamac)]2.[Polished chrome-plated brass] [Polished chrome-plated zinc alloy (zamac)] [Stainlesssteel, No. 4 finish (satin)] [Stainless steel, No. 7 finish (polished)] <Insert material andfinish>.

Towel Bar <Insert drawing designation>:G.

Description: [3/4-inch- square tube with rectangular end brackets] [3/4-inch- round tube1.with circular end brackets] <Insert description>.Mounting: Flanges with [concealed] [exposed] fasteners.2.Material and Finish: [Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)] [Stainless steel, No. 7 finish3.(polished)] [Polished aluminum] <Insert material and finish>.

UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS2.5


Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.1.Truebro by IPS Corporation.2.<Insert manufacturer's name>.3.

Underlavatory Guard <Insert drawing designation>:B.

Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent1.direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removingcoverings.Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.2.

CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES2.6


A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.1.American Specialties, Inc.2.Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.3.Bradley Corporation.4.GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.5.




Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.6.<Insert manufacturer's name>.7.

Utility Shelf <Insert drawing designation>:B.

Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch and supported by1.two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside.Size: [16 inches long by 6 inches deep] <Insert dimensions>.2.Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel, No. 4 finish3.(satin).

Mop and Broom Holder <Insert drawing designation>:C.

Description: [Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf] <Insert1.description>.Length: [36 inches] <Insert dimension>.2.Hooks: [Three] <Insert number>.3.Mop/Broom Holders: [Four] <Insert number>, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.4.Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).5.

Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel.a.

FABRICATION2.7

General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doorsA.and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage andwith corrosion-resistant backing plates.

Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.B.Provide minimum of [six] <Insert number> keys to Owner's representative.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriateA.to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, andfirmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.


Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.A.

Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.B.




Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.C.





SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Fire protection cabinets for the following:1.

Portable fire extinguishers.a.

Related Sections:B.

Division 09 painting Sections for field painting fire protection cabinets.1.Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers."2.Division 26 Sections for low-voltage wiring for fire protection cabinet alarms.3.

UNIT PRICES1.3

Work of this Section is affected by <Insert name of unit price>.A.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, materialA.descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protectioncabinets.

Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting1.methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware,cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.Show location of knockouts for hose valves.2.

Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, andB.attachments to other work.

Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinetC.

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 1



schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.[ Use samedesignations indicated on Drawings.]

Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.D.


Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements inA.ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,B.by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

COORDINATION1.6

Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishersA.indicated are accommodated.

Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire hoses, hoseB.valves, and hose racks indicated are accommodated.

Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.C.

SEQUENCING1.7

Apply [decals] [vinyl lettering] on field-painted, fire protection cabinets after painting isA.complete.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS2.1

Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.A.

Copper-Alloy Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge brass, 70B.percent copper).

Copper-Alloy Bronze Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60C.percent copper).

Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, [3] [6] mm thick.D.

Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick,E.




[Class 1 (clear)] [Class 2 (tinted, heat absorbing, and light reducing), bronze tint].

Break Glass: Clear annealed float glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 1.5 mmF.thick, single strength.

Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mmG.thick.

Wire Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1, Form 1, Quality q8, Mesh m1 (diamond), 6 mmH.thick.

Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), [1.5] [3] [6] mmI.thick, with [Finish 1 (smooth or polished)] [Finish 2 (patterned, textured)].

<Insert pattern, texture>.1.

Acrylic Bubble: One piece.J.

FIRE PROTECTION CABINET <Insert drawing designation>2.2

Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher .A.

Cabinet Construction: 2-hour fire rated.B.

Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from1.0.0428-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet.C.

Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.1.

Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit styleD.of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlappingsurrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth toaccommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.

Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.1.

Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless-steel sheet .E.

Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet .F.

Door Style: [Fully glazed, frameless, backless, acrylic panel] [Fully glazed panel withG.frame] [Full bubble, frameless] [Full bubble with frame] [Full bubble with frameless,rotating turntable] [Horizontal duo panel with frame] [Vertical duo panel with frame]




[Center glass panel with frame] [Solid opaque panel with frame] [Flush opaque panel,frameless, with no exposed hinges].

Door Glazing: [Clear float glass] [Tempered float glass (clear)] [Tempered float glassH.(bronze tint)] [Break glass] [Tempered break glass] [Wire glass] [Mirror glass] [Acrylicsheet] [Break acrylic bubble] [Molded acrylic bubble].

Acrylic Sheet Color: [Clear] [Bronze] transparent acrylic sheet.1.Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet painted [white] [red] [black] on2.unexposed side.Acrylic Bubble Color: [Clear] [Bronze] [Red], transparent.3.

Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinetI.type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

Provide [projecting lever handle with cam-action latch] [projecting door pull and1.friction latch] [recessed door pull and friction latch] [manufacturer's standard].Provide [continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim,] [concealed hinge]2.[pivot hinge] [manufacturer's standard hinge] permitting door to open 180 degrees.

Accessories:J.

Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to1.fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishersindicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and2.mounting clip, secured to cabinet.Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed3.into face.Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,4.size, spacing, and location. Locate [as indicated] [as directed by Architect] <Insertlocation>.

Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "[FIREa.EXTINGUISHER] <Insert identification>."

Location: Applied to [cabinet door] [cabinet glazing] [location indicated1)on Drawings].Application Process: [Silk-screened] [Engraved] [Etched] [Decals]2)[Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters].Lettering Color: [Red] [Black] [White].3)Orientation: [Vertical] [Horizontal] [As indicated on Drawings].4)

Finishes:K.

Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:1.

Exterior of cabinet [door] [trim] [, door, and trim] except for those surfacesa.




indicated to receive another finish.Interior of cabinet[ and door].b.

Stainless Steel: [No. 2B] [No. 4] [No. 6] [No. 7] [No. 8].2.

FABRICATION2.3

Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, andA.hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

Weld joints and grind smooth.1.Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.2.Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.3.Install door locks at factory.4.

Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicatedB.and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/21.inch thick.Miter and weld perimeter door frames.2.

Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and groundC.smooth.

GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS2.4


Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage byB.applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.C.

Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.D.Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range ofapproved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

STEEL FINISHES2.5

Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complyingA.with [SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning"] [or] [SSPC-SP 8,"Pickling"] <Insert surface preparation method>.[ After cleaning, apply a conversioncoating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.]




STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES2.6

Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.A.

Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.B.

Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.1.When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign2.matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.3.Reflective, Directional Polish: No. 7.4.Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No. 8.5.

Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B.C.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine roughing-in for hose [valves] [racks] and cabinets to verify actual locations of pipingA.connections before cabinet installation.

Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessedB.recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed.


PREPARATION3.2

Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size ofA.cabinet and trim style.

INSTALLATION3.3

General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated[ or, ifA.not indicated, at heights indicated below:] [or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.]

Fire Protection Cabinets: [54 inches] <Insert dimension> above finished floor to top of1.cabinet.

Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.B.




Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is1.not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets.Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.2.Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.3.Fire-Rated, [Hose and Valve] [Hose-Valve] Cabinets:4.

Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch tolerance between pipe OD anda.knockout OD. Center pipe within knockout.Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Division 07b.Section "Penetration Firestopping."

Identification: Apply [decals] [vinyl lettering] at locations indicated.C.


Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinetsA.are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integralB.locking devices operate properly.

On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces asC.recommended by manufacturer.

Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-D.finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fireprotection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successfulE.repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.





SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fireA.extinguishers.

Owner-Furnished Material: fire extinguishers.B.

Related Sections:C.

Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."1.

UNIT PRICES1.3

Work of this Section is affected by <Insert name of unit price>.A.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, materialA.descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fireextinguisher and mounting brackets.

Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fireB.protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.[ Use same designationsindicated on Drawings.]

Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.C.


NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "PortableA.Fire Extinguishers."

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1



Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independentB.testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.1.

COORDINATION1.6

Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit andA.function.

WARRANTY1.7

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orA.replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warrantyperiod.


Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.a.Faulty operation of valves or release levers.b.

Warranty Period: [Six] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS2.1

Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated.A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of1.the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated intothe Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product2.indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> orcomparable product by one of the following:Valves: [Manufacturer's standard] [Nickel-plated, polished brass body].3.Handles and Levers: [Manufacturer's standard] [Stainless steel].4.Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,5.Appendix B[ and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections,maintenance, and recharging].

MOUNTING BRACKETS <Insert drawing designation>2.2




Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard[ galvanized] steel, designed to secure fireA.extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishersindicated, with plated or [red] [black] baked-enamel finish.


Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,B.spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in1.red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

Orientation: [Vertical] [Horizontal].a.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.A.

Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.1.


INSTALLATION3.2

General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and inA.compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Mounting Brackets: [54 inches] <Insert dimension> above finished floor to top of fire1.extinguisher.

Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locationsB.indicated.





SECTION 105500 - POSTAL SPECIALTIES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2


Horizontal apartment mailboxes.1.


Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders, keyed to building keying1.system, for postal specialties.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individualA.components and profiles, and finishes for each type of postal specialty.

Shop Drawings: For each type of postal specialty. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,B.and attachments to other work.

Include identification sequence for compartments.1.


Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of postal specialty manufacturer forA.installation of units required for this Project.

Source Limitations: Obtain mail chutes and receiving boxes through one source from a singleB.manufacturer to ensure that mail will flow without restriction from chute into box.

Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of postalC.specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section"Product Requirements."

POSTAL SPECIALTIES 105500 - 1



Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with1.Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatorydata to Architect for review.


Deliver combination-lock combinations to Owner by registered mail or overnight packageA.service with a record of each corresponding lock and combination.

COORDINATION1.6

Coordinate layout and installation of postal specialties with wall construction.A.

Templates: Obtain and distribute to parties involved templates for installing postal specialties.B.

WARRANTY1.7

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orA.replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within specifiedwarranty period.


EXTRA MATERIALS1.8

Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packagedA.with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

Key Blanks: Furnish not less than [50] <Insert number> for every <Insert number> locks1.or fraction thereof, of each type of compartment door lock installed.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1


Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be1.incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products2.




specified.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers3.offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,manufacturers specified.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the4.manufacturers specified.

MATERIALS2.2

Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finishA.indicated, and as follows:

Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.1.Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.2.

Die-Cast Brass: ASTM B 176, copper alloy UNS No. C85800.B.

Steel Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or 55, hot-dip galvanized.C.

Stainless-Steel Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B8M, TypeD.316.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, exceptE.containing no asbestos fibers.

HORIZONTAL APARTMENT MAILBOXES2.3

USPS-Approved, Front-Loading, Horizontal Apartment Mailboxes <Insert drawingA.designation>: Consisting of multiple compartments with fixed, solid compartment backs,enclosed within recessed wall box. Provide access to compartments for distributing incomingmail from front of unit by unlocking master lock and swinging side-hinged master door toprovide accessibility to entire group of compartments. Provide access to each compartment forremoving mail by swinging compartment door. Comply with USPS STD-4B.

Manufacturers: Manufacturers listed on USPS's "Approved Sources List."1.Compartments: [Number and size of compartments as follows:] [As indicated on2.Drawings, of the following sizes:] [As indicated on Drawings.]

Type A: Inside dimensions not less than 5 inches high by 6 inches wide by 15.5a.inches deep.[ Provide <Insert number> compartments.]

FABRICATION2.4

Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.A.Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid,




and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metaledges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch.

Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weatherB.to exclude water penetration.

Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners whereC.fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing.

Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finishedD.surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of flux,and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

Fabricate doors of postal specialties to preclude binding, warping, or misalignment.E.

Fabricate rack ladders to support five to form a column of units.F.

Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by paintingG.contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended bymanufacturers of dissimilar metals.



Finish postal specialties after assembly.B.



Baked-Enamel Finish: Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's writtenA.instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.

Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system with a1.minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss.

COPPER-ALLOY FINISHES2.7

Finish designations prefixed by CDA comply with the system established by the CopperA.




Development Association for designating copper-alloy finish systems.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions[, with Installer present,] for compliance withA.requirements for installation tolerances, roughing-in openings, clearances, and other conditionsaffecting performance of work.

For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions1.detrimental to performance of work.


INSTALLATION3.2

General: Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to manufacturer's writtenA.instructions and roughing-in drawings.

Metal Protection: Where aluminum and copper alloys will contact grout, concrete,1.masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contactsurfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended bymanufacturers of dissimilar metals.Final acceptance depends on compliance with USPS requirements.2.

ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION3.3

Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as postal specialties areA.installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operateB.properly.

On completion of postal specialty installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces asC.recommended by manufacturer.

Touch up marred finishes, or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory-D.finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by postalspecialty manufacturer.

Replace postal specialties that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successfulE.repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.




DEMONSTRATION3.4

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toA.adjust, operate, and maintain postal specialties. Refer to Division 01 Section "[CloseoutProcedures] [Demonstration and Training]."





SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Cooking appliances; gas or electric as required by project location.1.Kitchen exhaust ventilation.2.Refrigeration appliances.3.Cleaning appliances; gas or electric as required by project location.4.

Related Sections:B.Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for waste disposers.1.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operatingA.characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance.

Warranties: Sample of special warranties.B.


Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintains, within 50 miles of Project site, a service centerA.capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer forB.installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

Source Limitations: Obtain [residential appliances from single source] [and] [each type ofC.residential appliance from single manufacturer].

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:D.

NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a1.

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 1



qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

WARRANTY1.5

Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orA.replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship withinspecified warranty period[.][ except as qualified below:]

Warranty Period: [Two] [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial1.Completion.

Electric Range: [Full warranty including parts and labor] [Limited warranty includingB.parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter] <Insert description> for on-site serviceon surface-burner elements.


Microwave Oven: [Full warranty including parts and labor] [Limited warranty including partsC.and labor for first year and parts thereafter] for on-site service [on the magnetron tube] <Insertrequirement>.


Refrigerator/Freezer , Sealed System: [Full warranty including parts and labor] [LimitedD.warranty including parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter] for on-site serviceon the product.

Warranty Period for [Sealed Refrigeration System] <Insert item>: [Two] [Five]1.<Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.Warranty Period [for Other Components] <Insert requirement>: [Two] <Insert2.number> years from date of Substantial Completion.

Dishwasher: [Full warranty including parts and labor] [Limited warranty including parts andE.labor for first year and parts thereafter] for on-site service on the product.

Warranty Period for [Deterioration of Tub and Metal Door Liner] <Insert requirement>:1.[Three] [Five] [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.Warranty Period [for Other Components] <Insert requirement>: [Two] <Insert number>2.years from date of Substantial Completion.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

RANGES2.1





Amana; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.1.BOSCH Home Appliances.2.BSH Home Appliances Corporation (Thermador).3.Dacor, Inc.4.Dynamic Cooking Systems, Inc.; a subsidiary of Fisher & Paykel Appliances Holdings5.Limited.Electrolux Home Products (Frigidaire).6.Fisher & Paykel.7.General Electric Company (GE).8.General Electric Company (Hotpoint).9.Jade Home Products Company.10.Jenn-Air; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.11.KitchenAid; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.12.LG Appliances.13.Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.14.Samsung.15.Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore).16.Sharp Electronics Corp.17.Viking Range Corporation.18.Whirlpool Corporation.19.Wolf Appliance, Inc.20.<Insert manufacturer's name>.21.

Electric Range [RG #] <Insert drawing designation>: [Freestanding] [Slide-in] [Drop-in] rangeB.with [one] [two] oven(s) and complying with AHAM ER-1.

Width: [30 inches] [36 inches] <Insert dimension>.1.Electric Burner Elements: [Four] [Six] <Insert number>.2.

Coil Type: [Manufacturer's standard] [Two 1200 W and two 2200 W] [One 1200a.W, one 2200-W dual element, and two 2200 W] <Insert burner combination andpower ratings>.Radiant Type: [Two 1500 W and two 2000 W] [One 1200-W element, dual 1500-b.W/1500-W bridge element, and one 1200-W/2500-W expandable element] <Insertburner combination and power ratings>.Induction Type: [Manufacturer's standard] [Two 1200 W and two 1800 W] [Onec.1200 W, one 1800 W, one 2700 W, and one 3300 W] <Insert burner combinationand power ratings>.Controls: Digital panel controls, located on [front] [left side] [right side] [splashd.panel at rear of rangetop].<Insert feature>.e.




Oven Features:3.

Capacity: [3.3 cu. ft.] [and] <Insert capacity for each oven>.a.Operation: [Baking] [convection] [and] [self-cleaning] <Insert requirement>.b.Broiler: Located in [top of oven] [separate roll-out drawer on bottom].c.Oven Door(s): Counterbalanced, removable, with [observation window] [and]d.[full-width] <Insert type of handle> handle.Electric Power Rating:e.

Oven(s): [Manufacturer's standard] [2400 W] [and] <Insert power rating for1)each oven>.Broiler: [Manufacturer's standard] [3500 W] <Insert power rating>.2)

Controls: Digital panel controls and timer display, located on [front] [left side]f.[right side] [splash panel at rear of rangetop].<Insert feature>.g.

Material: [Porcelain-enameled] [Stainless] steel with [manufacturer's standard] [ceramic-4.glass] <Insert material> cooktop.

Color/Finish: [White] [Black] <Insert color or finish>.a.

Gas Range [RG #] <Insert drawing designation>: [Freestanding] [Slide-in] range with [one]C.[two] oven(s).

Width: [30 inches] [36 inches] <Insert dimension>.1.Gas Burners: [Four] [Six] <Insert number>.2.

Power Ratings: [Manufacturer's standard] [One 5000 Btu/h, two 9100 Btu/h, anda.one 12,000 Btu/h] <Insert burner combination and power ratings>.Controls: [Digital panel] [Manual-dial] controls, located on [front] [left side] [rightb.side] [splash panel at rear of rangetop].Grates: [Individual] [Continuous] <Insert description>.c.Other Feature(s): [Sealed burners] [auto-re-igniting burners] [and] [grill] <Insertd.feature>.

Oven Features:3.

Capacity: [3.3 cu. ft.] [and] <Insert capacity for each oven>.a.Operation: [Baking] [convection] [and] [self-cleaning] <Insert requirement>.b.Broiler: Located in [top of oven] [separate roll-out drawer on bottom].c.Oven Door(s): Counterbalanced, removable, with [observation window] [and]d.[full-width] <Insert type of handle> handle.Gas Power Ratings:e.

Oven(s): [Manufacturer's standard] [9100 Btu/h] [and] <Insert power rating1)for each oven>.




Broiler: [Manufacturer's standard] [14,500 Btu/h] <Insert power rating>.2)

Controls: [Digital panel] [Manual-dial] controls and timer display, located onf.[front] [left side] [right side] [splash panel at rear of rangetop].<Insert feature>.g.

Anti-Tip Device: Manufacturer's standard.4.Electric Power Supply: [120 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 15 A] [As indicated on Drawings]5.<Insert requirement>.Material: [Porcelain-enameled] [Stainless] steel with [manufacturer's standard] [ceramic-6.glass] <Insert material> cooktop.


MICROWAVE OVENS2.2


Amana; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.1.BOSCH Home Appliances.2.BSH Home Appliances Corporation (Gaggenau).3.BSH Home Appliances Corporation (Thermador).4.Dacor, Inc.5.Dynamic Cooking Systems, Inc.; a subsidiary of Fisher & Paykel Appliances Holdings6.Limited.Electrolux Home Products (Frigidaire).7.General Electric Company (GE).8.General Electric Company (Hotpoint).9.Jenn-Air; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.10.KitchenAid; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.11.LG Appliances.12.Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.13.Samsung.14.Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore).15.Sharp Electronics Corp.16.Viking Range Corporation.17.Whirlpool Corporation.18.Wolf Appliance, Inc.19.<Insert manufacturer's name>.20.

Microwave Oven [MO #] <Insert drawing designation>:B.

Mounting: Wall cabinet.1.Type: [Conventional] [Convection] <Insert type>.2.Dimensions:3.




Width: [24 inches] [30 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.a.Depth: [19-1/2 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.b.Height: [14 inches] [18 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.c.

Capacity: [Oven Door: Door with observation window [and pull handle] [and push-4.button latch release] <Insert requirement>.Exhaust Fan: [Variable] [Two] [Four]-speed fan, [vented to outside] [nonvented,5.recirculating type with charcoal filter] and with [manufacturer's standard] [300-cfm]<Insert value> capacity.Microwave Power Rating: [Manufacturer's standard] [1000 W] <Insert power rating>.6.

Convection Element Power Rating: [Manufacturer's standard] [1450 W] <Inserta.power rating>.

Electric Power Supply: [120 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 15 A] [As indicated on Drawings]7.<Insert requirement>.Controls: Digital panel controls and timer display.8.Other Features: [Turntable] [temperature probe] [and] [lock-out feature] <Insert feature>.9.Material: [Porcelain-enameled steel] [Stainless steel] [Manufacturer's standard] <Insert10.material>.


KITCHEN EXHAUST VENTILATION2.3


BOSCH Home Appliances.1.BSH Home Appliances Corporation (Thermador).2.Dacor, Inc.3.Dynamic Cooking Systems, Inc.; a subsidiary of Fisher & Paykel Appliances Holdings4.Limited.Electrolux Home Products (Frigidaire).5.Fisher & Paykel.6.General Electric Company (GE).7.General Electric Company (Hotpoint).8.KitchenAid; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.9.Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.10.Miele, Inc.11.Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore).12.Sharp Electronics Corp.13.Viking Range Corporation.14.Whirlpool Corporation.15.Wolf Appliance, Inc.16.<Insert manufacturer's name>.17.




Overhead Exhaust Hood [EX #] <Insert drawing designation>:B.

Type: [Wall-mounted,] [Suspended-island-canopy,] <Insert requirement> exhaust-hood1.system.Dimensions:2.

Width: [30 inches] [36 inches] [48 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Inserta.dimension>.Depth: [30 inches] [36 inches] [48 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insertb.dimension>.

Exhaust Fan: [Variable] [Two] [Three]-speed fan [built into hood] [remotely located,3.with separate housing] and with [manufacturer's standard] [500-cfm] [900-cfm] <Insertvalue> capacity.

Venting: [Vented to outside through roof with weatherproof roof cap, backdrafta.damper, and rodent-proof screening] [Vented to outside through wall withweatherproof wall cap, backdraft damper, and rodent-proof screening] [Nonvented,recirculating type with charcoal filter] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insertrequirement>.Fan Control: [Hood] [Wall]-mounted[ touch-pad to control] fan switch, withb.separate hood-light control switch.

Duct Type: [Manufacturer's standard] [7-inch- diameter round] [3-1/4 by 10 inches4.rectangular] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert requirement>.Finish: [Baked enamel] [Stainless steel] <Insert finish>.5.

Color: [White] <Insert color>.a.

Features:6.

Permanent, washable [aluminum mesh] [stainless-steel mesh] [baffle-type] filter(s).a.Built-in [halogen] [incandescent] [fluorescent] lighting.b.<Insert feature>.c.

REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS2.4


Amana; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.1.BOSCH Home Appliances.2.BSH Home Appliances Corporation (Thermador).3.Dacor, Inc.4.Electrolux Home Products (Frigidaire).5.




Fisher & Paykel.6.General Electric Company (GE).7.General Electric Company (Hotpoint).8.Jenn-Air; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.9.KitchenAid; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.10.LG Appliances.11.Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.12.Samsung.13.Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore).14.Sub-Zero, Inc.15.Viking Range Corporation.16.Whirlpool Corporation.17.<Insert manufacturer's name>.18.

Refrigerator/Freezer [RF #] <Insert drawing designation>: [One-door refrigerator with insideB.freezer compartment] [Two-door, side-by-side refrigerator/freezer] [Two-doorrefrigerator/freezer with freezer on top] [Two-door refrigerator/freezer with freezer on bottom]<Insert description> and complying with AHAM HRF-1.

Type: [Freestanding] [Built in] [Undercounter].1.Dimensions:2.

Width: [16 inches] [24 inches] [27 inches] [30 inches] [36 inches] [42 inches] [48a.inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.Depth: [24 inches] [27 inches] [33-1/4 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insertb.dimension>.Height: [34-1/2 inches] [70 inches] [73 inches] [84 inches] [As indicated onc.Drawings] <Insert dimension>.

Storage Capacity:3.

Refrigeration Compartment Volume: [15.6 cu. ft.] <Insert volume>.a.Freezer Volume: [5.13 cu. ft.] <Insert volume>.b.Shelf Area: [Three] <Insert number> adjustable [wire] [glass] shelves, [26 sq. ft.]c.<Insert area>.

Refrigerator Features:4.

Interior light in refrigeration compartment.a.Door Storage: [Glazed door without storage] [Modular compartments] [Gallonb.milk-container storage] <Insert requirement>.Temperature-controlled meat/deli bin.c.<Insert feature>.d.

Freezer Features: [One] [Two] <Insert number> freezer compartment(s) [with door(s)]5.[configured as pull-out drawer(s)].

[Automatic] [Manual] defrost.a.




Interior light in freezer compartment.b.Automatic icemaker and storage bin.c.<Insert feature>.d.

Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the6.EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.Front Panel(s): [Manufacturer's standard] [Wood panel(s) to match kitchen cabinets]7.[Porcelain enamel] [Stainless steel] [Wood-panel insert(s) specified in Division 06Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" to match kitchen cabinets] [Wood-panelinsert(s) specified in Division 12 Section "Residential Casework" to match kitchencabinets] [Reversible panel(s) with choice of colors] <Insert description>.

Panel Color: [White] [Black] <Insert color(s)>.a.

Appliance Color/Finish: [White] [Black] [Stainless steel] <Insert color or finish>.8.

DISHWASHERS2.5


Amana; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.1.ASKO North America; a division of AM Appliance Group.2.BOSCH Home Appliances.3.BSH Home Appliances Corporation (Thermador).4.Dacor, Inc.5.Dynamic Cooking Systems, Inc.; a subsidiary of Fisher & Paykel Appliances Holdings6.Limited.Electrolux Home Products (Frigidaire).7.Fisher & Paykel.8.General Electric Company (GE).9.General Electric Company (Hotpoint).10.Jenn-Air; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.11.KitchenAid; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.12.LG Appliances.13.Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.14.Miele, Inc.15.Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore).16.Viking Range Corporation.17.Whirlpool Corporation.18.<Insert manufacturer's name>.19.

Dishwasher [DW #] <Insert drawing designation>: Complying with AHAM DW-1 and ASSEB.1006.

Type: [Built-in undercounter] [Built-in under sink] [Portable] <Insert type>.1.




Dimensions:2.

Width: [18 inches] [24 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.a.Depth: [23 inches] [25-3/4 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insertb.dimension>.Height: [34-1/2 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.c.

Capacity:3.

Water Consumption for Full Load: [3.2 gal.] <Insert value> per cycle.a.

Sound Level: Maximum [42] [48] <Insert value> dB.4.Tub and Door Liner: [Manufacturer's standard] [Porcelain-enameled steel] [Stainless5.steel] [Porcelain-enameled steel tub and molded-plastic door liner] <Insert requirement>with sealed detergent and automatic rinsing-aid dispensers.Rack System: [Nylon] [PVC]-coated sliding dish racks, with [removable cutlery basket]6.[top cutlery tray] <Insert feature>.Controls: [Touch-pad] [Rotary-dial] <Insert description> controls with [four] <Insert7.number> wash cycles and hot-air and heat-off drying cycle options.Features:8.

Waste food disposer.a.Self-cleaning food-filter system.b.Hot-water booster heater for [140 deg F] [160 deg F] wash water with incomingc.water at 100 deg F.Half-load option.d.Delay-wash option.e.Digital display panel.f.<Insert feature>.g.

Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the9.EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.Front Panel: [Manufacturer's standard] [Wood panel to match kitchen cabinets]10.[Porcelain enamel] [Stainless steel] [Wood-panel insert specified in Division 06 Section"Interior Architectural Woodwork" to match kitchen cabinets] [Wood-panel insertspecified in Division 12 Section "Residential Casework" to match kitchen cabinets][Reversible panel with choice of colors] <Insert description>.


Appliance Color/Finish: [White] [Black] [Stainless steel] <Insert color or finish>.11.

CLOTHES WASHERS AND DRYERS2.6





ASKO North America; a division of AM Appliance Group.1.BOSCH Home Appliances.2.Electrolux Home Products (Frigidaire).3.Fisher & Paykel.4.General Electric Company (GE).5.General Electric Company (Hotpoint).6.KitchenAid; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.7.LG Appliances.8.Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.9.Miele, Inc.10.Samsung.11.Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore).12.Thor Appliance Company.13.Whirlpool Corporation.14.<Insert manufacturer's name>.15.

Clothes Washer [CW #] <Insert drawing designation>: Complying with ASSE 1007.B.

Type: Stacking, [top] [front]-loading unit.1.Dimensions:2.

Width: [23-1/2 inches] [27 inches] [30 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Inserta.dimension>.Depth: [24 inches] [29 inches] [31 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insertb.dimension>.Height: [34-1/2 inches] [38 inches] [45 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insertc.dimension>.

Drum: [Manufacturer's standard] [Perforated porcelain-enameled steel] [Perforated3.stainless steel] <Insert material>.

Capacity: [2.7 cu. ft.] [3.2 cu. ft.] [3.8 cu. ft.] <Insert volume>.a.

Controls: [Touch-pad] [Rotary-dial] controls for water-fill levels, wash/rinse water4.temperatures, <Insert function,> and variable-speed and fabric selectors.

Wash Cycles: [Four] [Six] [10] <Insert number> wash cycles including regular,a.delicate, and permanent press.Wash Temperatures: [Three] <Insert number> settings.b.Speed Combinations: [Two] [Four] [Five].c.

Electrical Power: [120 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 15 A] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert5.requirement>.Motor: Manufacturer's standard with built-in overload protector.6.Features:7.

Agitator: [Center spindle] [Impeller (without spindle)].a.




Self-cleaning lint filter.b.Unbalanced-load compensator.c.Inlet Hoses: Minimum length 60 inches.d.Drain Hoses: Minimum length 48 inches.e.Self-leveling legs.f.Automatic dispenser for [bleach] [fabric softener] [and] [detergent].g.Spin-cycle safety switch.h.End-of-cycle signal.i.Extra-rinse option.j.Delay-wash option.k.Electronic temperature control.l.Water levels automatically set.m.<Insert feature>.n.

Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the8.EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.Water-Efficient Clothes Washer: Provide clothes washer with modified energy factor9.greater than or equal to 2.0 and water factor less than 5.5.Appliance Finish: [Porcelain enamel on top and lid; baked enamel on front and sides]10.[Stainless steel] <Insert finish>.

Color: [White] [Almond] <Insert color>.a.

Front-Panel Finish: [Manufacturer's standard] [Wood panel to match kitchen cabinets]11.[Porcelain enamel] [Stainless steel] [Wood-panel insert specified in Division 06 Section"Interior Architectural Woodwork" to match kitchen cabinets] [Wood-panel insertspecified in Division 12 Section "Residential Casework" to match kitchen cabinets]<Insert description>.


Clothes Dryer [CD #] <Insert drawing designation>: Complying with AHAM HLD-1.C.

Type: Stacking, frontloading, [gas] [electric] [electric, ventless] unit.1.Dimensions:2.

Width: [23-1/2 inches] [27 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Inserta.dimension>.Depth: [24 inches] [31 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.b.Height: [34-1/2 inches] [36 inches] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insertc.dimension>.

Drum: [Manufacturer's standard] [Perforated porcelain-enameled steel] [Perforated3.stainless steel] <Insert material>.

Capacity: [5.7 cu. ft.] [7.0 cu. ft.] <Insert volume>.a.

Controls: [Touch-pad] [Rotary-dial] controls for drying cycle, temperatures, <Insert4.




function,> and fabric selectors.Electric-Dryer Power: [240 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 30 A] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert5.requirement>.Gas-Dryer Power: [120 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 15 A electric; 22,000-Btu/h gas] [As6.indicated on Drawings] <Insert requirement>.Features:7.

Removable lint filter.a.Electronic temperature and moisture level sensor control.b.End-of-cycle signal.c.Interior drum light.d.Self-leveling legs.e.Antibacterial cycle.f.Built-in electrical power fuse.g.Stacking kit to stack dryer over washer.h.<Insert feature>.i.

Appliance Finish: [Porcelain enamel on top and lid; baked enamel on front and sides]8.[Stainless steel] <Insert finish>.

Color: [White] [Almond] <Insert color>.a.

Front-Panel Finish: [Manufacturer's standard] [Wood panel to match kitchen cabinets]9.[Porcelain enamel] [Stainless steel] [Wood-panel insert specified in Division 06 Section"Interior Architectural Woodwork" to match kitchen cabinets] [Wood-panel insertspecified in Division 12 Section "Residential Casework" to match kitchen cabinets]<Insert description>.


GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS2.7

Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,A.temporary protective covering before shipping.

Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.B.Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range ofapproved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forA.installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and




performance of residential appliances.

Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance ofB.the Work.



General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.A.

Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops withB.concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that roughopenings are completely concealed.

Utilities: See Divisions 22 and 26 for plumbing and electrical requirements.C.





SECTION 123530 - RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2


Kitchen cabinets.1.Vanity cabinets.2.Solid-surfacing-material countertops and 4-inch backsplashes.3.Full-height backsplashes where indicated.4.


Division 11 Section "Residential Appliances" for appliances.1.Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for [nonintegral sinks] [sinks] [and] [plumbing2.fittings].

DEFINITIONS1.3

Exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, includingA.visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors.

Semiexposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, includingB.interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are definedas "semiexposed."

Concealed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, includingC.sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directlyagainst and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utilitycabinets are defined as "concealed."

SUBMITTALS1.4


RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123530 - 1



Cabinets.1.Solid-surfacing-material countertops and sinks.2.Cabinet hardware.3.

Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, andB.attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge andbacksplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.C.

Samples for Verification:D.

Solid wood with transparent finish, 50 sq. in., for each species.1.Solid wood trim with transparent finish, 8 inches long, for each species.2.Solid-surfacing material for countertops, 6 inches square.3.Exposed hardware, for each type of item.4.One full-size[, 16 inches wide], finished base cabinet complete with hardware, doors, and5.drawers but without countertop.[ Sample will be returned to Contractor for use onProject.]One full-size[, 12 inches wide], finished wall cabinet complete with hardware, doors, and6.adjustable shelves. [ Sample will be returned to Contractor for use on Project.]One full-size solid-surfacing-material countertop, 8 by 10 inches, of construction and in7.configuration specified.


Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets through one source from a singleA.manufacturer.

Product Options: Drawings indicate size, configurations, and finish material of cabinets byB.referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' cabinets ofsimilar sizes and door and drawer configurations, same finish material, and complying with theSpecifications may be considered. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards:C.

Cabinets: KCMA A161.1.1.

KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seala.affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with theabove standard.


Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet-A.




work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relativehumidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establishB.dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actualdimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow fortrimming and fitting.

Field Measurements: Where casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verifyC.dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicatemeasurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting.

Field Measurements for Countertops: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurementsD.after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

COORDINATION1.7

Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support ofA.casework.

Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.B.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

CABINET MATERIALS2.1

General:A.

Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.1.Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content.2.Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content.3.Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea4.formaldehyde.

Exposed Materials:B.

Exposed Wood Species: [Oak] [Maple] [Alder] [Birch] [Hickory] [Cherry]1.[Manufacturer's standard domestic hardwood species] <Insert species>.

Select materials for compatible color and grain. Do not use two adjacent exposeda.surfaces that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural charactermarkings.Staining and Finish: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Matchb.Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's fullrange].




Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects.2.Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, with Grade A faces3.and Grade C backs of same species as faces.

Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:C.

Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects. Same1.species as exposed surfaces[ or stained to be compatible with exposed surfaces].

Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with noD.defects affecting strength or utility; particleboard; medium-density fiberboard; or hardboard.

CABINET HARDWARE2.2

General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style,A.material, and finish [as indicated by manufacturer's designations] [matching Architect'ssamples] [as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].

Pulls: [Surface-mounted decorative pulls] [Back-mounted decorative pulls] [Back-B.mounted decorative pulls with backing plates] [Wire pulls] [Back-mounted Knobs][Surface-mounted porcelain knobs] <Insert description>.

Hinges: [Decorative full-surface hinges] [Concealed butt hinges] [SemiconcealedC.(wraparound) butt hinges for overlay doors] [Pivot (knife) hinges] [Concealed European-style self-closing hinges].

Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent reboundD.when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMAA156.9, Type B05011 or B05091.

COUNTERTOP MATERIALS2.3

Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.A.

Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying withB.ISSFA-2.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers1.offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:

Avonite, Inc.a.E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.b.Nevamar Company, LLC.c.




Type: Provide Standard Type[ or Veneer Type made from material complying with2.requirements for Standard Type, as indicated], unless Special Purpose Type isindicated.Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with ISSFA-2 and ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6,3.without a precoated finish.Colors and Patterns: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match4.Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].

CABINETS2.4

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cabinets that may beA.incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>1.

Basis of Design Product: The design for cabinets is based on <Insert manufacturer's nameB.and product>. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or acomparable product by one of the following:

<Insert manufacturer's name.>1.

Face Style: Flush overlay; door and drawer faces cover cabinet fronts with only enough spaceC.between faces for operating clearance.

Cabinet Style: Face Frame .D.

Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid-wood stiles and rails, 5/8 inch thick, with 3/4-inch- thick,E.solid-wood center panels.

Face Frames: 3/4-by-1-5/8-inch solid wood[ with glued mortise and tenon or doweledF.joints].

Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Wood veneer.G.

Back, Top, and Bottom Rails: 3/4-by-2-1/2-inch solid wood, interlocking with end panels andH.rabbeted to receive top and bottom panels. Back rails secured under pressure with glue andwith mechanical fasteners.

Wall-Hung-Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch- thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panelsI.and to top and bottom rails.

Base-Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch- thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and toJ.top and bottom rails.

Front Frame Drawer Rails: 3/4-by-1-1/4-inch solid wood mortised and fastened into faceK.frame.




Drawers: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws fromL.interior of body.

Join subfronts, backs, and sides with [glued rabbeted joints supplemented by1.mechanical fasteners] [or] [glued dovetail joints].Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: [3/4-inch-] [1/2-inch-] thick solid wood.2.Bottoms: [1/4-inch-] [3/16-inch-] thick plywood.3.

Shelves: 1/2-inch- thick plywood.M.

Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners.N.Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to endsand dividers with mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms, and backs into end panels.

Factory Finishing: Finish cabinets at factory. Defer only final touchup until after installation.O.

SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS2.5

Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:A.

Front: [Straight, slightly eased at top] [Bevel] [3/4-inch bullnose] [Radius edge with1.apron, 2 inches high with 3/8-inch radius] [1-1/2-inch laminated bullnose] [1-inchlaminated bullnose] [Wood-trimmed edge as indicated].Endsplash: [Matching backsplash] [None].2.

Countertops: [1/2-inch-] [3/4-inch-] thick, solid-surfacing material with front edge built upB.with same material.

Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges, unless otherwise indicated.C.Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers,fabrication, and finishing.

Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop.1.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims.A.Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips,scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face.

Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. CompleteB.installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.




Install cabinets and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.C.

Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.D.

Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 241.inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into woodframing, blocking, or hanging strips.Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 242.inches o.c., with toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum board.

Fasten solid-surfacing-material countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base unitsE.into underside of countertop. Align adjacent surfaces, and form seams to comply withmanufacturer's written instructions using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefullydress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with solid-surfacing-material1.manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.


Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operateA.smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended bymanufacturer.

Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes toB.restore damaged or soiled areas.





SECTION 210517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Sleeves.1.Sleeve-seal systems.2.Sleeve-seal fittings.3.Grout.4.

SUBMITTALS1.3


PRODUCTSPART 2 -

SLEEVES2.1

Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and weldedA.steel collar; zinc coated.

Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zincB.coated, with plain ends.

Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed withC.welded longitudinal joint.

SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS2.2


SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517 - 1



Advance Products & Systems, Inc.1.CALPICO, Inc.2.Metraflex Company (The).3.Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.4.Proco Products, Inc.5.<Insert manufacturer's name>.6.

Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annularB.space between piping and sleeve.

Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include1.type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.Pressure Plates: Plastic.2.Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length3.required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS2.3

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of theA.following:

Presealed Systems.1.Insert manufacturer's name.2.

Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding inB.concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to matchpiping OD.

GROUT2.4

Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,A.hydraulic-cement grout.

Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.B.

Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.C.

Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.D.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

SLEEVE INSTALLATION3.1




Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.A.

For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough toB.provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.1.

Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and wallsC.are constructed.

Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP1.sleeves.Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.2.

Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas ora.other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal3.system.

Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.D.

Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.1.Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between2.sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants3.appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealantsspecified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floorsE.at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirementsfor firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION3.2

Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at serviceA.piping entries into building.

Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and forB.sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping andsleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make awatertight seal.

SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION3.3




Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.A.

Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs andB.walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.C.

Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.D.

SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE3.4

Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:A.

Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:1.

Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves.a.

Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:2.

Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal systema..

Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping1)and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

Concrete Slabs above Grade:3.

Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.a.

Interior Partitions:4.

Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.a.





SECTION 210518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Escutcheons.1.Floor plates.2.

SUBMITTALS1.3


PRODUCTSPART 2 -

ESCUTCHEONS2.1

One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.A.

Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed exposed-rivet hinge,B.and spring-clip fasteners.

FLOOR PLATES2.2

One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.A.

Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.B.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210518 - 1



INSTALLATION3.1

Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.A.

Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and withB.OD that completely covers opening.

Escutcheons for New Piping:1.

Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,a.stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge or split-plate, stamped-steel type with exposed-rivet hinge.Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate,b.stamped-steel type with concealed hinge or split-plate, stamped-steel type withexposed-rivet hinge.

Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.C.


Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.A.


ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210518 - 2



SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Pipes, fittings, and specialties.1.


Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.A.

Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: [10] [20] <Insert number>1.percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:2.

Residential (Dwelling) Occupancy: [0.05 gpm over 400-sq. ft.] <Insert value>a.area.Light-Hazard Occupancy: [0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.] <Insert value> area.b.Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: [0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.] <Insertc.value> area.Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: [0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.] <Insertd.value> area.Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: [0.30 gpm over 2500-sq. ft.] <Insert value>e.area.Extra-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: [0.40 gpm over 2500-sq. ft.] <Insert value>f.area.Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.g.

Minimum Density for Deluge-Sprinkler Piping Design:3.

Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: [0.15 gpm] <Insert value> over entirea.area.Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: [0.20 gpm] <Insert value> over entireb.area.Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: [0.30 gpm] <Insert value> over entire area.c.

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 1



Extra-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: [0.40 gpm] <Insert value> over entire area.d.Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.e.

Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.4.Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:5.

Residential Areas: [400 sq. ft.] <Insert dimension>.a.Office Spaces: [120 sq. ft.] [225 sq. ft.] <Insert dimension>.b.Storage Areas: [130 sq. ft.] <Insert dimension>.c.Mechanical Equipment Rooms: [130 sq. ft.] <Insert dimension>.d.Electrical Equipment Rooms: [130 sq. ft.] <Insert dimension>.e.Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated.f.

Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless6.otherwise indicated:

Light-Hazard Occupancies: [100 gpm for 30 minutes] <Insert requirement>.a.Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: [250 gpm for 60 to 90 minutes] <Insertb.requirement>.Extra-Hazard Occupancies: [500 gpm for 90 to 120 minutes] <Insertc.requirement>.<Insert requirements>.d.

Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motionsB.determined according to NFPA 13 and [ASCE/SEI 7] <Insert requirement>.


Installer Qualifications:A.

Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems1.and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineeringresponsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and fielda.test reports by a qualified professional engineer.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler andB.Pressure Vessel Code.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,C.by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testingD.shall comply with the following:

NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."1.




NFPA 13R, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and2.Including Four Stories in Height."NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."3.


Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilitiesA.occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then onlyafter arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:

Notify [Architect] [Construction Manager] [Owner] no fewer than [two] <Insert1.number> days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service.Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without [Architect's]2.[Construction Manager's] [Owner's] written permission.

COORDINATION1.6

Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,A.including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PIPING MATERIALS2.1

Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, andA.fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS2.2

Standard Weight, [Galvanized-] [and] [Black-]Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, [Type E]A.<Insert type>, [Grade B] <Insert grade>. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to matchjoining method.

Schedule 30, [Galvanized-] [and] [Black-]Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135; ASTM A 795/A 795M,B.[Type E] <Insert type>; or ASME B36.10M, wrought steel; with wall thickness not less thanSchedule 30 and not more than Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed tomatch joining method.

Thinwall [Galvanized-] [and] [Black-]Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M,C.threadable, with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater than Schedule 10.Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5D.




and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10, plain end.

Hybrid Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, lightwall, with wallE.thickness less than Schedule 10 and greater than Schedule 5.

COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS2.3

Hard Copper Tube: water tube, drawn temper.A.

CPVC PIPE AND FITTINGS2.4

CPVC Fittings: [UL listed] [or] [FM approved], for 175-psig rated pressure at 150 deg F,A.socket type. Include "LISTED" and "CPVC SPRINKLER FITTING" markings.

NPS 3/4 to NPS 1-1/2: ASTM F 438 and UL 1821, Schedule 40, socket type.1.NPS 2 to NPS 3: ASTM F 439 and UL 1821, Schedule 80, socket type.2.CPVC-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC, one piece, with dimensions equivalent to3.pipe; one end with threaded brass insert, and one socket end.CPVC-to-Metal Transition Unions: CPVC, with dimensions equivalent to pipe; one end4.with threaded brass insert, and one socket end.Flanges: CPVC, one or two pieces.5.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1

Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for systemA.design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

Report test results promptly and in writing.B.

SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING3.2

Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building. Comply withA.requirements for exterior piping in Division 21 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping."

Install shutoff valve,[ backflow preventer,] pressure gage, drain, and other accessoriesB.indicated at connection to water-service piping.[ Comply with requirements for backflowpreventers in Division 21 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping."]

Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water service.C.




WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS3.3

Connect sprinkler piping to building's interior water-distribution piping. Comply withA.requirements for interior piping in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

Install shutoff valve,[ backflow preventer,] pressure gage, drain, and other accessoriesB.indicated at connection to water-distribution piping.[ Comply with requirements forbackflow preventers in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."]

Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water supply.C.

PIPING INSTALLATION3.4

Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate generalA.location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from1.authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviatingfrom approved working plans.

Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.B.

Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint deviceC.materials and installation in NFPA 13.

Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions inD.pipe sizes.

Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.E.

Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, andF.equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,G.and sized and located according to NFPA 13.

Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.H.

Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes whenI.sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, toJ.drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to andspill over floor drain or to outside building.




Install alarm devices in piping systems.K.

Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply withL.requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of eachM.standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metalseated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permitremoval, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

Pressurize and check preaction sprinkler system piping and [air-pressure maintenanceN.devices] [air compressors].

Fill sprinkler system piping with water.O.

Install electric heating cables and pipe insulation on sprinkler piping in areas subject toP.freezing. Comply with requirements for heating cables in Division 21 "Heat Tracing for Fire-Suppression Piping" and for piping insulation in Division 21 Section "Fire-SuppressionSystems Insulation."

Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirementsQ.for sleeves specified in Division 21 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-SuppressionPiping."

Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply withR.requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 21 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals forFire-Suppression Piping."

Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withS.requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 21 Section "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping."

JOINT CONSTRUCTION3.5

Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittingsA.that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating foraboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.B.

Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, andC.equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.D.

Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings beforeE.




assembly.

Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for waterF.service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. CutG.threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restorefull ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.1.Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or2.damaged.

Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting. Rotate retainerH.lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.

Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittingsI.with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualifiedJ.processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for1.galvanized-steel pipe.

Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according toK.AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipeand grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according toL.AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipeand grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittingsM.with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"N."Brazed Joints" Chapter.

Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of tube according toO.AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tubeand grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and copper pressure-seal fittings withP.tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use toolQ.designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating




stop, and braze branch tube into collar.

Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials ofR.both piping systems.

Plastic-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittingsS.according to the following:

Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent1.cements. Apply primer.CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.2.

FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION3.6

Install wall-type, fire-department connections.A.

Install yard-type, fire-department connections in concrete slab support. Comply withB.requirements for concrete in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete.".

Install [two] [three] <Insert number> protective pipe bollards [around] [on sides of]1.each fire-department connection. Comply with requirements for bollards in Division 05Section "Metal Fabrications.".

Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection.C.

IDENTIFICATION3.7

Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements inA.NFPA 13.

Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements forB.identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

SPRINKLER SCHEDULE3.8

Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:A.

Rooms without Ceilings: .1.Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: .2.

Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.B.

Residential Sprinklers: Dull chrome.1.





SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Sleeves.1.Sleeve-seal systems.2.Sleeve-seal fittings.3.Grout.4.

SUBMITTALS1.3


PRODUCTSPART 2 -

SLEEVES2.1

Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and weldedA.steel collar; zinc coated.

Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zincB.coated, with plain ends.

PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.C.

Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed withD.welded longitudinal joint.

SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS2.2

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of theA.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 1



following:

Advance Products & Systems, Inc.1.CALPICO, Inc.2.Metraflex Company (The).3.Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.4.Proco Products, Inc.5.<Insert manufacturer's name>.6.

Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annularB.space between piping and sleeve.

Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include1.type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.Pressure Plates: Plastic.2.Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to3.sealing elements.

SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS2.3


Presealed Systems.1.Insert manufacturer's name.2.

Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding inB.concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to matchpiping OD.

GROUT2.4





EXECUTIONPART 3 -






For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough toB.provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.


Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and wallsC.are constructed.

Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP1.sleeves.Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.2.

Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas ora.other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal3.system.

Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.D.

Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.1.Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between2.sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants3.appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealantsspecified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floorsE.at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirementsfor firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION3.2

Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at serviceA.piping entries into building.

Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and forB.sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping andsleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make awatertight seal.

SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION3.3




Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.A.

Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs andB.walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.C.

Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.D.

SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE3.4

Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:A.

Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:1.

Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves.a.

Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:2.

Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seala.system.


Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:3.

Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seala.system.


Concrete Slabs above Grade:4.

Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves or PVC-pipe sleeves.a.





SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Escutcheons.1.Floor plates.2.

SUBMITTALS1.3


PRODUCTSPART 2 -

ESCUTCHEONS2.1

One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.A.

One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.B.

Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed hinge, and spring-clipC.fasteners.

FLOOR PLATES2.2

One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.A.

Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.B.

ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 1



EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1


Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated pipingB.and with OD that completely covers opening.


Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.a.Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-platedb.finish.Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel typec.with concealed hinge .Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,d.stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass typee.with polished, chrome-plated finish.Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type withf.polished, chrome-plated finish.Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,g.chrome-plated finish.

Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.C.

Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and withD.OD that completely covers opening.

New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.1.




ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 2



SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Liquid-in-glass thermometers.1.Dial-type pressure gages.2.Test plugs.3.

Related Sections:B.

Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic water meters and1.combined domestic and fire-protection water-service meters outside the building.Division 22 Section " Domestic Water Piping" for water meters inside the building.2.

SUBMITTALS1.3


Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation andB.maintenance manuals.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS2.1

Plastic-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:A.


Flo Fab Inc.a.Miljoco Corporation.b.

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 1



Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.c.Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.d.Weiss Instruments, Inc.e.WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.f.<Insert manufacturer's name>.g.

Standard: ASME B40.200.2.Case: [Plastic] <Insert material>; 6-inch nominal size.3.Case Form: [Back angle] [Straight] unless otherwise indicated.4.Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue[ or red] organic liquid.5.Tube Background: Nonreflective with permanently etched scale markings graduated in6.[deg F] [deg F and deg C].Window: Glass or plastic.7.Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.8.

Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.a.

Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.9.Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of10.1.5 percent of scale range.

PRESSURE GAGES2.2

Direct-Mounted, Plastic-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:A.


AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.a.Ashcroft Inc.b.Flo Fab Inc.c.Marsh Bellofram.d.Miljoco Corporation.e.Noshok.f.<Insert manufacturer's name>.g.

Standard: ASME B40.100.2.Case: [Sealed] <Insert type> type; [plastic] <Insert material>; [4-1/2-inch] [6-inch]3.<Insert dimension> nominal diameter.Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.4.Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-5.outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.6.Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi7.and kPa.Pointer: Dark-colored metal.8.Window: Glass or plastic.9.




Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.10.

GAGE ATTACHMENTS2.3

Snubbers: ASME B40.5, brass; with NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion resistant porousA.metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 , ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.B.

TEST PLUGS2.4


Flow Design, Inc.1.Miljoco Corporation.2.National Meter, Inc.3.Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.4.Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.5.Trerice, H. O. Co.6.Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.7.Weiss Instruments, Inc.8.<Insert manufacturer's name>.9.

Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.B.

Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. IncludeC.extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

Thread Size: [NPS 1/4] [or] [NPS 1/2], ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.D.

Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: [500 psig at 200 deg F] <Insert ratings>.E.

Core Inserts: [Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic] [and] [EPDM] self-sealing rubber.F.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Install direct-mounted thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.A.

Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at theB.most readable position.




Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.C.

Install test plugs in piping tees.D.

Install thermometers in the following locations:E.

Inlet and outlet of each water heater.1.Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger.2.Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank.3.Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller.4.<Insert location>.5.

Install pressure gages in the following locations:F.

Building water service entrance into building.1.Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.2.Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.3.<Insert location>.4.

CONNECTIONS3.2

Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenanceA.of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

ADJUSTING3.3

Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.A.

THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE3.4

Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F .A.

Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F .B.

PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE3.5

Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi .A.





SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes the following general-duty valves:A.

Copper-alloy ball valves.1.


Division 21 fire-suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire-protection valves.1.Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags2.and charts.Division 22 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.3.

DEFINITIONS1.3

The following are standard abbreviations for valves:A.

CWP: Cold working pressure.1.EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.2.NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.3.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials;A.valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement;dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Includerated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; andaccessories.


ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension andA.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1



design criteria.

NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.B.


Prepare valves for shipping as follows:A.

Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.1.Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.2.Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.3.Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.4.Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.5.Block check valves in either closed or open position.6.

Use the following precautions during storage:B.

Maintain valve end protection.1.Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If2.outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not useC.handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1

In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the followingA.requirements apply for product selection:

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers1.offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the manufacturers specified.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the2.manufacturers specified.

VALVES, GENERAL2.2

Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.A.

Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.B.

Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.C.




Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for systemD.pressures and temperatures.

Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.E.

Valve Actuators:F.

Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in the1."Valve Installation" Article in Part 3.Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.2.Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.3.Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.4.Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 105.plug valves, for each size square plug head.

Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.G.

Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, andH.ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.

Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.I.

Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.1.

Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate,a.and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.

Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.2.

Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.J.

COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES2.3

Available Manufacturers:A.

Manufacturers:B.

Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:1.

Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.a.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.b.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.c.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.d.DynaQuip Controls.e.Flow-Tek, Inc.f.Grinnell Corporation.g.




Hammond Valve.h.Honeywell Braukmann.i.Jamesbury, Inc.j.Jomar International, LTD.k.Kitz Corporation of America.l.Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.m.Milwaukee Valve Company.n.Nexus Valve Specialties.o.NIBCO INC.p.R & M Energy Systems (Borger, TX).q.Red-White Valve Corp.r.Richards Industries; Marwin Ball Valves.s.Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.t.

Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.C.

Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with full -port, chrome-platedD.bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.

BRONZE CHECK VALVES2.4


Manufacturers:B.

Type 4, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:1.

Cincinnati Valve Co.a.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.b.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.c.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.d.Grinnell Corporation.e.Hammond Valve.f.McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.g.Milwaukee Valve Company.h.NIBCO INC.i.Red-White Valve Corp.j.Walworth Co.k.Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.l.

Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.C.

Type 3, Class 200, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.D.

GRAY-IRON SWING CHECK VALVES2.5





Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves, General: MSS SP-71.B.

Type I, Class 250, gray-iron, swing check valves with metal seats.C.

BRONZE GATE VALVES2.6


Manufacturers:B.

Type 2, Bronze, Rising-Stem, Solid-Wedge Gate Valves:1.

American Valve, Inc.a.Cincinnati Valve Co.b.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.c.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.d.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.e.Grinnell Corporation.f.Hammond Valve.g.Kitz Corporation of America.h.Milwaukee Valve Company.i.NIBCO INC.j.Powell, Wm. Co.k.Red-White Valve Corp.l.Walworth Co.m.

Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.C.

Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solidD.wedge [and union-ring bonnet].

CAST-IRON GATE VALVES2.7


Manufacturers:B.

Type I, Cast-Iron, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:1.

Cincinnati Valve Co.a.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.b.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.c.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.d.




Grinnell Corporation.e.Hammond Valve.f.Kitz Corporation of America.g.Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.h.Milwaukee Valve Company.i.NIBCO INC.j.Powell, Wm. Co.k.Red-White Valve Corp.l.Walworth Co.m.Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.n.

Cast-Iron Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-70, Type I.C.

Class 125, NRS, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim,D.nonrising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

CAST-IRON PLUG VALVES2.8


Manufacturers:B.

Nonlubricated-Type, Cast-Iron Plug Valves:1.

General Signal; DeZurik Unit.a.Grinnell Corporation.b.Mueller Flow Technologies.c.Tyco International, Ltd.; Tyco Valves & Controls.d.Wheatley Gaso, Inc.e.Xomox Corporation.f.

Cast-Iron Plug Valves, General: MSS SP-78.C.

Class 125 or 150, nonlubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.D.

RESILIENT-SEATED, CAST-IRON, ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES2.9


Manufacturers:B.

General Signal; DeZurik Unit.1.Milliken Valve Company.2.Olson Technologies; Homestead Div.3.Pratt, Henry Company.4.Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.5.




Resilient-Seated, Cast-Iron, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Smaller: Design similar toC.MSS SP-108, and rated for 175-psig minimum CWP.

Resilient Seating Material: Suitable for potable-water service, unless otherwise1.indicated.

Resilient-Seated, Cast-Iron, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: MSS SP-108, and ratedD.for 175-psig minimum CWP.

Resilient Seating Material: Suitable for potable-water service, unless otherwise1.indicated.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and otherA.conditions affecting performance.


Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. RemoveB.special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping andhandling.

Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats madeC.accessible by such operations.

Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.D.

Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for properE.size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition issuitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.F.

VALVE APPLICATIONS3.2

Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated,A.use the following:

Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, gate, or plug valves.1.Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves.2.Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.3.




If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higherB.CWP ratings may be substituted.

Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:C.

Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two -piece, 600-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.1.Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: [Flangeless] [Single-flange] [Flanged], 150-2.psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with EPDM liner.

Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:D.

For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends.1.For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged [or threaded] ends.2.For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.3.For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.4.For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged [or threaded] ends.5.For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.6.For Grooved-End, [Copper Tubing] [and] [Steel Piping]: Valve ends may be grooved.7.

VALVE INSTALLATION3.3

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicateA.general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,B.maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.C.

Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.D.

Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.E.

Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:F.

Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.1.Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.2.Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.3.


Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping jointA.construction.

Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and boltsB.




according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-C.alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

ADJUSTING3.5

Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service butA.before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.





SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Metal pipe hangers and supports.1.Trapeze pipe hangers.2.Thermal-hanger shield inserts.3.

Related Sections:B.

Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze1.hangers for pipe and equipment supports.Division 21 fire-suppression piping Sections for pipe hangers for fire-suppression piping.2.

DEFINITIONS1.3

MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.A.

SUBMITTALS1.4



Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWSA.D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler andB.Pressure Vessel Code.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING ANDEQUIPMENT

220529 - 1



METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS2.1

Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:A.

Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.1.Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to2.support bearing surface of piping.Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.3.

TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS2.2

Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made fromA.structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS2.3


Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.1.Clement Support Services.2.ERICO International Corporation.3.National Pipe Hanger Corporation.4.PHS Industries, Inc.5.Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.6.<Insert manufacturer's name>.7.

Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psigB.minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type IC.calcium silicate with 100-psig minimum compressive strength.

For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.D.

For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.E.

Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambientF.air temperature.



220529 - 2



Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black andA.galvanized.

Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink andB.nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.1.Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.2.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION3.1

Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,A.supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the buildingstructure.

Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. ArrangeB.for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricatedtrapeze pipe hangers.

Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or1.install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipehangers.Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being2.supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.C.

Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,D.washers, and other accessories.

Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of pipingE.systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action ofexpansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.F.

Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stressesG.from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceedH.maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.


220529 - 3



Insulated Piping:I.

Attach clamps and spacers to piping.1.

Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project througha.insulation.Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shieldb.insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building servicesc.piping.

Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is2.indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-a.distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.3.Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-a.distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:4.

NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.a.NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.b.NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.c.NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.d.NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.e.

Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts5.of length at least as long as protective shield.Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.6.

METAL FABRICATIONS3.2

Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers .A.

Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot beB.shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;C.appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with thefollowing:


220529 - 4



Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion1.resistance of base metals.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.2.Remove welding flux immediately.3.Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so4.contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

ADJUSTING3.3

Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieveA.indicated slope of pipe.

Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to [1-1/2 inches] <InsertB.dimension>.

HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE3.4

Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems andA.equipment.

Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified inB.piping system Sections.

Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that willC.not have field-applied finish.

Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are inD.direct contact with copper tubing.

Use carbon-steel metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.E.

Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel attachments for hostile environmentF.applications.

Use copper-plated pipe hangers and or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.G.

Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.H.

Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.I.

Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified inJ.piping system Sections, install the following types:

Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or1.


220529 - 5



insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping systemK.Sections, install the following types:

Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to1.NPS 24.

Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping systemL.Sections, install the following types:

Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with1.insulation that matches adjoining insulation.Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer2.to prevent crushing insulation.Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.3.

Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are notM.specified in piping system Sections.

Use instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.N.



220529 - 6



SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Pipe labels.1.Valve tags.2.Warning tags.3.

SUBMITTALS1.3


Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identificationB.material and device.

Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposedC.content for each label.

Valve numbering scheme.D.

Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.E.

COORDINATION1.4

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting ofA.surfaces where devices are to be applied.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.B.

Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.C.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1



PIPE LABELS2.1

General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with letteringA.indicating service, and showing flow direction.

Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumferenceB.of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations orC.abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate1.both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.2.

VALVE TAGS2.2

Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-A.inch numbers.

Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or1.stamped holes for attachment hardware.Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook .2.

Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valveB.number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room orspace), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations foridentification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.1.

WARNING TAGS2.3

Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized cardA.stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

Size: [3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum] [Approximately 4 by 7 inches] <Insert size>.1.Fasteners: [Brass grommet and wire] [Reinforced grommet and wire or string].2.Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO3.NOT OPERATE."Color: Yellow background with black lettering.4.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -




PREPARATION3.1

Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identificationA.devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, andencapsulants.

PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION3.2

Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "[InteriorA.Painting] [High-Performance Coatings]."

Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipeB.labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels [with painted, color-coded bands orrectangles] [, complying with ASME A13.1,] on each piping system.

Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.1.Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.2.

Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;C.machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; andexterior exposed locations as follows:

Near each valve and control device.1.Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.2.Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.3.At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed4.piping.Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.5.Spaced at maximum intervals of [50 feet] <Insert dimension> along each run. Reduce6.intervals to [25 feet] <Insert dimension> in areas of congested piping and equipment.On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.7.

Pipe Label Color Schedule:D.

Domestic Water Piping:1.

Background Color: [Black] [Blue] [Red] [White] [Yellow] <Insert color>.a.Letter Color: [Black] [Blue] [Red] [White] [Yellow] <Insert color>.b.

Sanitary Waste Piping:2.





VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION3.3

Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves withinA.factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-wateringhose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. Listtagged valves in a valve schedule.

Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme andB.with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

Valve-Tag Size and Shape:1.

Cold Water: [1-1/2 inches] [2 inches], [round] [square] <Insert shape>.a.Hot Water: [1-1/2 inches] [2 inches], [round] [square] <Insert shape>.b.

Valve-Tag Color:2.

Cold Water: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.a.Hot Water: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.b.Low-Pressure Compressed Air: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.c.High-Pressure Compressed Air: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.d.

Letter Color:3.

Cold Water: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.a.Hot Water: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.b.Low-Pressure Compressed Air: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.c.High-Pressure Compressed Air: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.d.

WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION3.4

Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items whereA.required.





SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Insulation Materials:1.

Cellular glass.a.Flexible elastomeric.b.

Field-applied jackets.2.


Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."1.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, andA.jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

LEED Submittal:B.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement1.of VOC content.


Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeshipA.program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau ofApprenticeship and Training.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-B.response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,

PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1



by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory labelinsulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers,with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed1.index of 50 or less.Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed2.index of 150 or less.


Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriateA.ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

COORDINATION1.6

Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified inA.Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application andB.equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping ShopDrawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.C.

SCHEDULING1.7

Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, afterA.installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that havesatisfactory test results.

Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area ofB.construction.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

INSULATION MATERIALS2.1

Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall beA.applied.

Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.B.




Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of lessC.than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptableD.according to ASTM C 795.

Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturingE.process.

Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,F.hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.a.Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.b.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>c.

Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.2.Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.3.Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.4.Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.5.Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied [ASJ] [ASJ-SSL]: Comply with6.ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.7.

Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply withG.ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.


Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.a.Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.b.RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.c.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>d.

ADHESIVES2.2

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bondingA.insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.




FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS2.3

Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.A.

Metal Jacket:B.


Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil- thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membraneC.consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or polyesterscrim and laminated aluminum foil.


Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittwrap.a.Polyguard; Insulrap No Torch 125.b.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>c.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and otherA.conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of1.defects.Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.2.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.3.

PREPARATION3.2

Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that willA.adversely affect insulation application.

Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply aB.corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an1.




epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F.Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methodsfor operating temperature range.Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 3002.deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coatingmaterials and application methods for operating temperature range.

Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply withC.requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact withD.stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS3.3

Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;A.free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, andspecialties.

Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses requiredB.for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. InstallC.accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet ordry state.

Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.D.

Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.E.

Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.F.

Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.G.

Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints withH.adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

Install insulation with least number of joints practical.I.

Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,J.supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.1.For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor2.legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taperand seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to3.




insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulationmaterial manufacturer.Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over4.jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wetK.and dry film thicknesses.

Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:L.

Draw jacket tight and smooth.1.Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation2.jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges ofstrip, spaced 4 inches o.c.Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with3.longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at [2 inches] [4 inches] o.c.

For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.a.

Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to4.maintain vapor seal.Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at5.ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominalM.thickness.

Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and crackingN.due to thermal movement.

Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.O.Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patchessimilar to butt joints.

For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:P.

Vibration-control devices.1.Testing agency labels and stamps.2.Nameplates and data plates.3.Manholes.4.Handholes.5.Cleanouts.6.

PENETRATIONS3.4

Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):A.




Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulationB.continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping1.and fire-resistive joint sealers.

Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:C.

Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.1.Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in2.Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION3.5

Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where moreA.specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:B.

Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties1.with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from2.same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightlyagainst adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregularsurfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that isuniform with adjoining pipe insulation.Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same3.material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipeinsulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipediameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulatingcement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed andreplaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusableinsulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vaporbarrier.Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.4.Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipeinsulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a5.mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic forabove ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel themastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric6.and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, andunions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulationfacing using PVC tape.




Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION."7.Match size and color of pipe labels.

Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,C.test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around theconnection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashingsealant.

Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to theD.following:

Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same1.thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipeinsulation.When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation2.from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipeinsulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide3.the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of4.mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attachedinsulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipeinsulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipeinsulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement appliedin two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed5.surfaces with a metal jacket.

CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION3.6

Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:A.

Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without1.deforming insulation materials.Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions2.with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with3.outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple4.longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulationmaterial manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:B.

Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.1.




Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the2.thickness of pipe insulation.Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of3.adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation ofsame thickness as pipe insulation.Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least4.1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:C.

Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when1.available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of2.cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:D.

Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.1.Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without2.disturbing insulation.Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.3.

FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION3.7

Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminateA.openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.1.Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the2.thickness of pipe insulation.Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of3.adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness aspipe insulation.Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive4.to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.1.Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to2.eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when1.




available.When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet2.insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allowvalve operation without disturbing insulation.Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.3.Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's4.recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air tosurface being insulated.

FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION3.8

Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:A.

Draw jacket material smooth and tight.1.Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.2.Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.3.Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at4.end joints.Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation5.with vapor-barrier mastic.

Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:B.

Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe1.insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end2.overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximateoverlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesiveor SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape aroundoverlapped butt joint.Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply3.adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, referto manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edgeto maintain a permanent bond.Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with4.an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch- circumference limitallows for 2-inch- overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections ofjacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap sealfor "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and5.wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

FINISHES3.9

Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material:A.Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting




Sections.

Flat Acrylic Finish: [Two] <Insert number> finish coats over a primer that is1.compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to renderfabric mildew proof.

Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.a.

Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats ofB.insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visualC.inspection of the completed Work.

Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.D.


Testing Agency: a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.A.

Perform tests and inspections.B.

Tests and Inspections:C.

Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-1.applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent ofinspection shall be limited to [one] <Insert number> location(s) for each type ofequipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment,remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing2.field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extentof inspection shall be limited to [three] <Insert number> locations of straight pipe,[three] <Insert number> locations of threaded fittings, [three] <Insert number>locations of welded fittings, [two] <Insert number> locations of threaded strainers,[two] <Insert number> locations of welded strainers, [three] <Insert number>locations of threaded valves, and [three] <Insert number> locations of flanged valvesfor each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection revealsD.noncompliance with requirements.

PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL3.11

Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified forA.each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.




Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:B.

Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.1.Underground piping.2.Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.3.

INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE3.12

Domestic Cold Water:A.

NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Insulation shall be[ one of] the following:1.

Cellular Glass: [1-1/2 inches] <Insert thickness> thick.a.Flexible Elastomeric: [1/2 inch] [3/4 inch] [1 inch] <Insert thickness> thick.b.

NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be[ one of] the following:2.

Cellular Glass: [1-1/2 inches] <Insert thickness> thick.a.Flexible Elastomeric: [1 inch] <Insert thickness> thick.b.

Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:B.

[NPS 1-1/4] <Insert pipe size> and Smaller: Insulation shall be[ one of] the following:1.

Cellular Glass: [1-1/2 inches] <Insert thickness> thick.a.Flexible Elastomeric: [3/4 inch] [1 inch] <Insert thickness> thick.b.

[NPS 1-1/2] <Insert pipe size> and Larger: Insulation shall be[ one of] the following:2.

Cellular Glass: [1-1/2 inches] <Insert thickness> thick.a.Flexible Elastomeric: [1 inch] <Insert thickness> thick.b.

0.024-inch (0.61-mm) or heavier aluminum is recommended for outdoor applications.

0.016-inch (0.41-mm) or heavier stainless steel is recommended for outdoor applications.

Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install theC.field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.D.





SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and1.specialties inside the building.Specialty valves.2.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: For the following products:A.

Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers.1.

LEED Submittal:B.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including1.printed statement of VOC content.

Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.C.

Field quality-control reports.D.


Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.A.

Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.B.

Comply with ASME B31.9.C.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1



PIPING MATERIALS2.1

Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fittingA.materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.


Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.A.

Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.1.Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-2.socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:3.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by onea.of the following:

Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division.1)NIBCO INC.2)Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.3)<Insert manufacturer's name>.4)

NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal inb.each end.NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-c.ring seal in each end.

Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper.B.

Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.1.Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:2.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by onea.of the following:

Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division.1)NIBCO INC.2)Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.3)<Insert manufacturer's name>.4)

NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal inb.each end.

PIPING JOINING MATERIALS2.3




Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick orA.ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring typeunless otherwise indicated.

Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.B.

Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according toC.ASTM B 813.

Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-D.duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by pipingE.system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

SPECIALTY VALVES2.4

Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping"A.for general-duty metal valves.

Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" forB.balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EARTHWORK3.1

Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching,A.and backfilling.


Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement ofA.domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculatefriction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unlessdeviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,B.inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements inDivision 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages andDivision 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.C.




Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupantsD.unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at rightE.angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicatedotherwise.

Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, andF.coordinate with other services occupying that space.

Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.G.

Install piping to permit valve servicing.H.

Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higherI.than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

Install piping free of sags and bends.J.

Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.K.

Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, andL.specialty.

Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22M.Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats.

Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply withN.requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" forthermometers.

Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirementsO.for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply withP.requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals forPlumbing Piping."

Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withQ.requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for PlumbingPiping."


Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.A.




Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings beforeB.assembly.

Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"C."Brazed Joints" Chapter.

Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tubeD.and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials ofE.both piping systems.


General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty ValvesA.for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures orB.equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixturesthat do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Usebutterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,C.and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section"Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.1.Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.2.

Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of eachD.pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ballvalves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" forbalancing valves.

Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and dischargeE.side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but notstop flow. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water PipingSpecialties" for calibrated balancing valves.


Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing PipingA.and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.




Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.1.Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:2.

100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.a.Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.b.Longer Than 100 Feet If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.c.

Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.3.Support pipe rolls on trapeze.Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.4.

Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.B.

Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.C.

Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimumD.rod diameters:

NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.1.NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2.NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3.NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.4.NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.5.NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.6.NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.7.

Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.E.

Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer'sF.written instructions.

CONNECTIONS3.6

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.A.

Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.B.

Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to joinC.dissimilar piping materials.

Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connectD.to the following:

Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not1.smaller than sizes of water heater connections.Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller2.




than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbingfixture Sections for connection sizes.Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than3.equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Useflanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

IDENTIFICATION3.7

Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "IdentificationA.for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.

Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.B.


Perform tests and inspections.A.

Piping Inspections:B.

Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and1.approved by authorities having jurisdiction.During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before2.inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities havingjurisdiction:

Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing ora.closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction tob.observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or3.inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having4.jurisdiction.

Piping Tests:C.

Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound1.and that piping is full of water.Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been2.altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separatereport for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and3.unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered orconcealed before it was tested.Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,4.




without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source andallow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that mustbe repaired.Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until5.satisfactory results are obtained.Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.6.

Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.D.

Prepare test and inspection reports.E.

ADJUSTING3.9

Perform the following adjustments before operation:A.

Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.1.Open shutoff valves to fully open position.2.Open throttling valves to proper setting.3.Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.4.

Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.a.

Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during5.installation.Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.6.Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for7.application where used and are clean and ready for use.Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.8.

CLEANING3.10

Clean and disinfect potable[ and non-potable] domestic water piping as follows:A.

Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or1.repaired before using.Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if2.methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 orAWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear ata.outlets.Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:b.

Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm1)of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 2002)




ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming fromc.system after the standing time.Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeatd.procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:B.

Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or1.repaired before using.Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are2.not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear ata.outlets.Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeatb.procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.C.

Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.D.

PIPING SCHEDULE3.11

Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:A.

Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint fittings;1.and brazed or soldered joints.Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-2.sealed joints.

Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:B.

Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and1.brazed or soldered joints.Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-2.sealed joints.

VALVE SCHEDULE3.12

Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, theA.following requirements apply:

Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball,1.or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.




Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or2.ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.3.Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.4.

Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.B.





SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Pipe, tube, and fittings.1.


Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.A.

Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," forB.plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and ventpiping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.


Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupiedA.by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only afterarranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

Notify [Architect] [Construction Manager] [Owner] no fewer than [two] <Insert1.number> days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service.Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without [Architect's]2.[Construction Manager's] [Owner's] written permission.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PIPING MATERIALS2.1

Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fittingA.materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1



ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS2.2

Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40.A.

ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.B.

Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235.C.

Use ABS solvent cement that has a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated1.according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS2.3

Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.A.

PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patternsB.and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.C.

Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated1.according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.D.

Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated1.according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS2.4

Transition Couplings:A.

General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in1.OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible withpipes to be joined.Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping2.system fitting.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EARTH MOVING3.1




Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31A.Section "Earth Moving."


Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of pipingA.systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate frictionloss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicatedunless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment roomsB.and service areas.

Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at rightC.angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicatedotherwise.

Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.D.

Install piping to permit valve servicing.E.

Install piping at indicated slopes.F.

Install piping free of sags and bends.G.

Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.H.

Install piping to allow application of insulation.I.

Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriateJ.branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be usedon vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by sidewith common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do notchange direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers andreducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in directionof flow is prohibited.

Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661.K.

Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.L.

Install underground ABS and PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.M.

Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:N.




Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.1.Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's2.written installation instructions.Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.3.

Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved byO.authorities having jurisdiction.

Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirementsP.for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply withQ.requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals forPlumbing Piping."

Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withR.requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for PlumbingPiping."


Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces.1.Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, anda.solvent cements.ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.b.PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.c.

SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION3.4Transition Couplings:1.

Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.a.


Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified1.in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosivea.environments.

Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches.2.




CONNECTIONS3.6

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.1.Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting2.to join dissimilar piping materials.Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:3.

Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smallera.than required by plumbing code.Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizesb.indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but notc.smaller than required by plumbing code.

Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance4.of equipment.Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:5.

Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at finala.connection to each piece of equipment.Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and atb.final connection to each piece of equipment.

IDENTIFICATION3.7

Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for1.identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping andEquipment."


During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before1.inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities havingjurisdiction.

Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing ora.closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction tob.observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or2.inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having3.jurisdiction.




Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having4.jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have beena.altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separatereport for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage andb.vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered orconcealed before it was tested.Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping exceptc.outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system andfill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level mustnot drop. Inspect joints for leaks.Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set andd.traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight.Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building.Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube ormanometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressuremust remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period ofinspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,e.until satisfactory results are obtained.Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.f.

Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in5.absence of published procedures, as follows:

Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-maina.piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered orconcealed before it was tested.Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,b.without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test sourceand allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defectsthat must be repaired.Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,c.until satisfactory results are obtained.Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.d.


Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.1.Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and2.debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.3.Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two4.




coats of water-based latex paint.

PIPING SCHEDULE3.10

Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be[ any of] the following:1.

Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.a.Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.b.

Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:2.

Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.a.

Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:3.

Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.a.Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.b.





SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:A.

Faucets for lavatories, bathtub/showers, and sinks.1.Toilet seats.2.Fixture supports.3.Water closets.4.Lavatories.5.Bathtubs.6.Kitchen sinks.7.


Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories."1.Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor2.drains, and specialty fixtures not included in this Section.Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters.3.Division 22 Section "Healthcare Plumbing Fixtures."4.Division 22 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures."5.Division 22 Section "Security Plumbing Fixtures."6.Division 22 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers."7.Division 31 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for exterior plumbing fixtures8.and hydrants.

DEFINITIONS1.3

ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.A.

Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people withB.disabilities.

Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marbleC.and solid-surface materials.

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1



Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.D.

Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. FittingsE.specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tubspouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves areincluded where indicated.

FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.F.

PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.G.

PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.H.

Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-,I.scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,A.fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materialsand finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

LEED Submittal:B.

Product Data for Credit WE [2] [3.1] [3.2] [2 and 3.1] [2, 3.1, and 3.2]: Documentation1.indicating flow and water consumption requirements.

Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.C.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,D.and maintenance manuals.

Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.E.


Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each categoryA.through one source from a single manufacturer.

Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single1.manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for thatcategory.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,B.Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for




intended use.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and UsableC.Buildings and Facilities"[; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and PublicLaw 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act";] for plumbing fixtures for people withdisabilities.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy PolicyD.Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"E.for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that areF.compatible.

Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbingG.fixtures:

Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.1.Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.2.Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.3.Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.4.Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.5.Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.6.

Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatoryH.sink faucets:

Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.1.Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.2.Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.3.Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.4.NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.5.Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.6.Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.7.Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.8.

Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified forI.bathtub/shower faucets:

Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M.1.Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASSE2.1016.Deck-Mounted Bath/Shower Transfer Valves: ASME 18.7.3.Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.4.Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.5.High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F6.




445.Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.7.Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.8.Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.9.Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.10.

Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified forJ.miscellaneous fittings:

Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.1.Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.2.Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.3.Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.4.Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.5.Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.6.

Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified forK.miscellaneous components:

Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.1.Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.2.Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.3.Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.4.Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.5.Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.6.Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.7.

WARRANTY1.6

Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orA.replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within specifiedwarranty period.


Structural failures of unit shell.a.Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.b.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.c.

Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: [One] [Three] <Insert number> year(s)2.from date of Substantial Completion.Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Shells: [Five] [20] [30] <Insert3.number> years from date of Substantial Completion.Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Pumps and Blowers: [Five] [20]4.<Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Electronic Controls: [Five] <Insert5.number> years from date of Substantial Completion.




EXTRA MATERIALS1.7


Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to [10] <Insert number> percent of amount of each1.type and size installed.Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to [5] <Insert number> percent of amount of2.each type and size installed.Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to [10] <Insert number> percent of amount of3.each type installed, but no fewer than [12] <Insert number> of each type.Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate4.compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.Flushometer Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to [5] <Insert number> percent of amount of5.each type installed, but no fewer than [2] <Insert number> of each type.Water-Closet Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to [5] <Insert number> percent of amount of6.each type installed.Toilet Seats: Equal to [5] <Insert number> percent of amount of each type installed.7.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

LAVATORY FAUCETS2.1

Lavatory Faucets, :A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the1.following:

American Standard Companies, Inc.a.Bradley Corporation.b.Chicago Faucets.c.Delta Faucet Company.d.Kohler Co.e.Moen, Inc.f.Speakman Company.g.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.h.Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC.i.Phoenix Products, Inc.j.Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc.k.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Operation.l.<Insert manufacturer's name.>m.

Description: [Single-control mixing] [Single-control nonmixing] [Two-handle2.mixing] <Insert type> valve. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucetinlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.




Body Material: Residential, nonmetallic underbody with brass cover plate .a.Finish: [Polished chrome plate] [Polished brass] [Nonmetallic].b.Maximum Flow Rate: [0.5 gpm] [2.2 gpm] [2.5 gpm] <Insert value>.c.Maximum Flow: [0.25 gal.] <Insert amount>.d.Centers: [3-3/8 inches] [4 inches] [6 inches] [8 inches] [Single hole] [Adjustable].e.Mounting: [Deck, exposed] [Deck, concealed] [Back/wall, exposed] [Back/wall,f.concealed].Valve Handle(s): [Lever] [Knob] [Knob, nonmetallic] [Cross, four arm] [Wristg.blade, 4 inches] [Elbow, 6 inches] [Push button] [Not applicable].Inlet(s): [NPS 3/8 tubing, plain end] [NPS 3/8 tubing, with NPS 1/2 maleh.adaptor] [NPS 1/2 male shank] [NPS 1/2 female shank].Spout: [Rigid] [Swing] [Rigid, gooseneck] [Swivel, gooseneck] type.i.Spout Outlet: [Aerator] [Spray] [Laminar flow] [Plain end] [Spray, 0.5 gpm].j.Operation: Compression, manual .k.Drain: [Not required] [Pop up] [Stopper with chain] [Grid] [Lift and turn].l.Tempering Device: [Mechanical] [Thermostatic] [Pressure balance] [Notm.required].

BATHTUB/SHOWER FAUCETS2.2

Bathtub/Shower Faucets, :A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the1.following:

American Standard Companies, Inc.a.Brasstech Inc.; Newport Brass Div.b.Broadway Collection.c.Central Brass Manufacturing Company.d.Chicago Faucets.e.Delta Faucet Company.f.Eljer.g.Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC.h.Hansgrohe Inc.i.Kohler Co.j.Leonard Valve Company.k.Moen, Inc.l.Paul Decorative Products.m.Pegler, Ltd.n.Powers; a Watts Industries Co.o.Price Pfister, Inc.p.Rohl LLC.q.Royal Brass Mfg. Co.r.Sayco; a Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Company.s.Speakman Company.t.Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc.u.




St. Thomas Creations.v.Symmons Industries, Inc.w.T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.x.Wolverine Brass, Inc.y.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Faucet Operation.z.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Operation.aa.<Insert manufacturer's name.>bb.Broadway Collection.cc.Hansgrohe Inc.dd.Leonard Valve Company.ee.Powers; a Watts Industries Co.ff.T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.gg.<Insert manufacturer's name.>hh.Chicago Faucets.ii.Grohe America, Inc.jj.Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc.kk.T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.ll.<Insert manufacturer's name.>mm.

Description: Single-handle thermostatic valve for bathtub and for shower. Include hot-2.and cold-water indicators; check stops; tub spout; and shower head, arm, and flange.Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies; coordinate outlet with diverter valve.

Body Material: [Solid brass] <Insert material>[ with nonmetallic trim].a.Finish: [Polished chrome plate] [Polished brass] <Insert finish>.b.Maximum Flow Rate: [2.5 gpm] <Insert value>, unless otherwise indicated.c.Diverter Valve: [Integral] [Not integral] with mixing valve.d.Mounting: [Wall] <Insert mounting>.e.Bathtub Spout: [Chrome-plated brass] <Insert material>[ with diverter].f.Operation: Compression, manual .g.Antiscald Device: [Integral with mixing valve] [Separate unit].h.Check Stops: Check-valve type, integral with or attached to body; on hot- andi.cold-water supply connections.Supply Connections: [NPS 1/2] [NPS 1/2, union] [Sweat].j.Backflow Protection Device for Hand-Held Shower: [Required] [Not required].k.Shower Head Type: [Ball joint] [Without ball joint] [Ball joint and headl.integral with mounting flange] [Integral with mounting flange] [Hand held,slide-bar mounted] [Hand held, hook mounted].Shower Head Material: [Metallic] [Nonmetallic] [Combined, metallic andm.nonmetallic] with chrome-plated finish.Spray Pattern: [Fixed] [Adjustable].n.Integral Volume Control: [Required] [Not required].o.Shower-Arm Flow-Control Fitting: [Not required] [1.5 gpm] [2.0 gpm].p.

SINK FAUCETS2.3




Sink Faucets, :A.

American Standard Companies, Inc.a.Bradley Corporation.b.Broadway Collection.c.Chicago Faucets.d.Delta Faucet Company.e.Dormont Manufacturing Company.f.Eljer.g.Elkay Manufacturing Co.h.Fisher Manufacturing Co.i.Grohe America, Inc.j.Just Manufacturing Company.k.Kohler Co.l.Moen, Inc.m.Royal Brass Mfg. Co.n.Sayco; a Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Company.o.Speakman Company.p.T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.q.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.r.<Insert manufacturer's name.>s.

Description: Kitchen faucet with spray, three-hole fixture . Include hot- and cold-water2.indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet withspout and fixture receptor.

Body Material: Residential, nonmetallic underbody with brass cover plate .a.Finish: [Polished chrome plate] [Polished brass] [Nonmetallic] [Polished orb.rough brass] [Rough brass] <Insert finish>.Maximum Flow Rate: [2.5 gpm] <Insert value>, unless otherwise indicated.c.Mixing Valve: [Single control] [Two-lever handle].d.Backflow Protection Device for Hose Outlet: [Required] [Not required].e.Backflow Protection Device for Side Spray: [Required] [Not required].f.Centers: [3-3/8 inches] [4 inches] [6 inches] [8 inches] [Single hole] [Adjustable].g.Mounting: [Deck] [Back/wall], [exposed] [concealed].h.Handle(s): [Lever] [Knob] [Knob, nonmetallic] [Cross, four arm] [Wrist blade,i.4 inches] [Elbow, 6 inches] [Not applicable].Inlet(s): [NPS 3/8 plain-end tubing] [NPS 3/8 tubing with NPS 1/2 malej.adapter] [NPS 1/2 male shank] [NPS 1/2 female shank].Spout Type: [Rigid, solid brass] [Rigid, solid brass with wall brace] [Swing,k.round tubular] [Swing, shaped tube] [Swing, solid brass] [Rigid gooseneck][Swivel gooseneck].Spout Outlet: [Aerator] [Swivel aerator/spray] [Spray] [Laminar flow] [Hosel.thread] [Plain end].Vacuum Breaker: [Required] [Not required].m.Operation: Compression, manual .n.




Drain: [Not required] [Pop up] [Stopper with chain] [Grid] [Lift and turn].o.

TOILET SEATS2.4

Toilet Seats, :A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the1.following:

American Standard Companies, Inc.a.Bemis Manufacturing Company.b.Centoco Manufacturing Corp.c.Church Seats.d.Eljer.e.Kohler Co.f.Olsonite Corp.g.Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc.; Beneke Div.h.Sperzel.i.<Insert manufacturer's name.>j.

Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture.2.

Material: Molded, solid plastic[ with antimicrobial agent].a.Configuration: [Closed] [Open] front [with] [without] cover.b.Size: [Elongated] [Regular].c.Hinge Type: [CK, check] [SS, self-sustaining] [SC, self-sustaining, check] [SR,d.self-raising] <Insert type>.Class: [Residential] [Standard commercial] [Heavy-duty commercial].e.Color: [White] [Black] <Insert color>.f.

FIXTURE SUPPORTS2.5


Josam Company.1.MIFAB Manufacturing Inc.2.Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.3.Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.4.Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.5.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.6.<Insert manufacturer's name.>7.

Lavatory Supports, <Insert drawing designation>:B.

Description: Type [I, lavatory carrier with exposed arms and tie rods] [II, lavatory1.carrier with concealed arms and tie rod] [III, lavatory carrier with hanger plate and




tie rod] for wall-mounting, lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.2.

Sink Supports, <Insert drawing designation>:C.

Description: Type [I, sink carrier with exposed arms and tie rods] [II, sink carrier1.with hanger plate, bearing studs, and tie rod] [III, sink carrier with hanger plateand exposed arms] for sink-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

WATER CLOSETS2.6

Water Closets, WC-1:A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the1.following:

American Standard Companies, Inc.a.Barclay Products, Ltd.b.Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc.c.Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.d.Duravit USA, Inc.e.Eljer.f.Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC.g.Kohler Co.h.Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc.i.Peerless Pottery, Inc.j.Sanitarios Azteca, S.A. de C.V.k.Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc.l.St. Thomas Creations.m.TOTO USA, Inc.n.Water Management, Inc.o.<Insert manufacturer's name.>p.

Description: Floor-mounting, floor-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for gravity-2.type tank operation.

Style: [Close coupled] [One piece].a.

Bowl Type: [Elongated] [Round front] with [siphon-jet] <Insert type>1)design. Include bolt caps matching fixture.Height: [Standard] [Accessible] [Juvenile] [Child].2)Design Consumption: [1 gal./flush] [1.6 gal./flush] [3.5 gal./flush] <Insert3)rate>.Tank: [Gravity type with trim] [Flushometer-tank type with trim and4)pressurized tank]. Include cover.Trip Mechanism: [Lever-handle] [Push-button] <Insert type> actuator.5)Color: [White] <Insert color>.6)




Supply: [NPS 3/8] [NPS 1/2] chrome-plated brass or copper with [wheel-handle]b.[screwdriver] [loose-key] <Insert type> stop.Toilet Seat: <Insert designation.>c.

LAVATORIES2.7

Lavatories, L-1:A.


Commercial Enameling Company.a.Eljer.b.Kohler Co.c.Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.d.American Standard Companies, Inc.e.

Description: Counter-mounting, vitreous-china fixture.2.

Type: Self-rimming.a.Round Lavatory Size: [18 inches] [19 inches] <Insert dimensions> in diameter.b.Faucet Hole Punching: [One hole] [Three holes, 2-inch centers] [Three holes, 4-c.inch centers].Faucet Hole Location: [Top] [Front wall] [Inclined panel].d.Color: White.e.Faucet: Lavatory <Insert designation> [with pop-up waste] [for separate drain].f.Supplies: NPS 3/8 chrome-plated copper with stops.g.Drain: [See faucet] [Grid] [Grid with offset waste] <Insert drain>.h.Drain Piping: [NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32)] [NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 1-1/2 (DN 32 by DN 40)]i.chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; [NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32)] [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)],[0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-)] [0.045-inch- (1.1-mm-)] thick tubular brass waste to wall;and wall escutcheon.Hair Interceptor: [Not required] <Insert designation>.j.

BATHTUBS2.8

Bathtubs, T-1:A.


Eljer.a.Jacuzzi, Inc.b.Kohler Co.c.American Standard Companies, Inc.d.




Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.e.<Insert manufacturer's name.>f.

Description: Porcelain-enameled, formed-steel fixture.2.

Bathing Surface: Slip resistant.a.Size: [48 by 30 inches] [60 by 30 inches] [66 by 30 inches] <Insert dimensions>b.[with front apron] [drop-in type].Color: White.c.Drain Location: [Left] [Right] end.d.Accessibility Options: Include grab bar and bench.e.Faucet: Bathtub/shower.f.Supplies: NPS 1/2 copper tubing with ball, gate, or globe valves.g.Drain: NPS 1-1/2; chrome-plated exposed parts; brass pop-up waste and overflow.h.Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 cast-brass P-trap and waste.i.Drain Piping: Schedule 40 [ABS] [or] [PVC], NPS 1-1/2 P-trap and waste.j.

KITCHEN SINKS2.9

Kitchen Sinks, KS-1:A.


Commercial Enameling Company.a.Eljer.b.Jacuzzi, Inc.c.Kohler Co.d.American Standard Companies, Inc.e.<Insert manufacturer's name.>f.

Description: Two -bowl, residential, counter-mounting, stainless-steel kitchen sink.2.

Overall Dimensions: <Insert dimensions.>a.Metal Thickness: [0.038 inch] [0.050 inch] <Insert dimension>.b.Bowl:c.

Dimensions: <Insert dimensions.>1)Drain: 3-1/2-inch [crumb cup] [grid] [grid with offset waste] [outlet for2)disposer].Location: [Centered in bowl] [Near back of bowl] <Insert location>.3)

Left Bowl:d.

Dimensions: <Insert dimensions.>1)Drain: 3-1/2-inch [crumb cup] [grid] [grid with offset waste] [outlet for2)disposer].




Location: [Centered in bowl] [Near back of bowl] <Insert location>.3)

Right Bowl:e.

Dimensions: <Insert dimensions.>1)Drain: 3-1/2-inch [crumb cup] [grid] [grid with offset waste] [outlet for2)disposer].Location: [Centered in bowl] [Near back of bowl] <Insert location>.3)

Supplies: NPS 1/2 chrome-plated copper with stops.f.Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; 0.045-inch- thickg.tubular brass waste to wall; [continuous waste; ]and wall escutcheon(s).Drain Piping: Schedule 40 [ABS] [or] [PVC], NPS 1-1/2 P-trap; tubular waste toh.wall; [continuous waste; ]and wall escutcheon(s).

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verifyA.actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will beB.installed.


INSTALLATION3.2

Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'A.written instructions.

Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or buildingB.substrate.

Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.C.

Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to waterD.distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.1.Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected toE.




sanitary drainage system.

Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainageF.system.

Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side ofG.compartment.

Install toilet seats on water closets.H.

Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets areI.not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stopJ.valves.

Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts ifK.faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

Install traps on fixture outlets.L.

Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.1.Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.2.

Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and withinM.cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part,N.mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified inDivision 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

CONNECTIONS3.3


Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and ventB.piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for ElectricalC.Systems."

Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power ConductorsD.and Cables."





Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations whereA.installed.

Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specifiedB.components.

Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.C.

Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. ReplaceD.malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operateproperly.

ADJUSTING3.5

Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,A.fittings, and controls.

Operate and adjust . Replace damaged and malfunctioning units[ and controls].B.

Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow and stream.C.

Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.D.

CLEANING3.6

Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methodsA.and materials. Do the following:

Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers1.and spouts.Remove sediment and debris from drains.2.

After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspectB.exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

PROTECTION3.7

Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.A.

Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing byB.Owner.





SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Sleeves.1.

SUBMITTALS1.3


PRODUCTSPART 2 -

SLEEVES2.1

Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-ironA.pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and weldedB.steel collar; zinc coated.

Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zincC.coated, with plain ends.

GROUT2.2




SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - 1




EXECUTIONPART 3 -



For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough toB.provide [1-inch] <Insert dimension> annular clear space between piping and concrete slabsand walls.


Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floorsC.at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirementsfor firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - 2



SECTION 230518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Escutcheons.1.

SUBMITTALS1.3


PRODUCTSPART 2 -

ESCUTCHEONS2.1

One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.A.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1


Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and withB.OD that completely covers opening.


Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.a.


ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518 - 1





ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518 - 2



SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Liquid-in-glass thermometers.1.Dial-type pressure gages.2.Test plugs.3.

SUBMITTALS1.3


Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.B.

Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.C.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation andD.maintenance manuals.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS2.1

Plastic-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:A.


Flo Fab Inc.a.Miljoco Corporation.b.Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.c.Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.d.

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 1



Standard: ASME B40.200.2.Case: Plastic; 6-inch nominal size.3.Case Form: Back angle unless otherwise indicated.4.Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue[ or red] organic liquid.5.Tube Background: Nonreflective with permanently etched scale markings graduated in6.deg F and deg C.Window: Glass or plastic.7.Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.8.

Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud.a.Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.b.

Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.9.Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of10.1.5 percent of scale range.

PRESSURE GAGES2.2

Direct-Mounted, Plastic-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:A.


AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.a.Ashcroft Inc.b.Flo Fab Inc.c.

Standard: ASME B40.100.2.Case: Sealed type; plastic; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.3.Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.4.Pressure Connection: Brass, with [NPS 1/4] [NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2] [NPS 1/2], ASME5.B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.6.Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi7.and kPa.Pointer: Dark-colored metal.8.Window: Glass.9.Accuracy: [Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of] [Grade B, plus or10.minus 2 percent of middle half of] [Grade C, plus or minus 3 percent of middle halfof] [Grade D, plus or minus 5 percent of whole] scale range.

TEST PLUGS2.3





Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.1.

Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.B.

Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. IncludeC.extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

Thread Size: [NPS 1/4] [or] [NPS 1/2], ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.D.

Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.E.

Core Inserts: [Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic] [and] [EPDM] self-sealing rubber.F.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.A.

Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at theB.most readable position.

Install test plugs in piping tees.C.

Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elementsD.and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths ofE.pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.F.

Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.G.

Install pressure gages in the following locations:H.

Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.1.Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection.2.Suction and discharge of each pump.3.<Insert location>.4.

CONNECTIONS3.2

Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenanceA.




of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

ADJUSTING3.3

After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.A.

Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.B.

THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE3.4

Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: Minus 40 to plus 160 deg F .A.

Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F .B.

PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE3.5

Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi .A.

Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi .B.





SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Brass ball valves.1.Iron, single-flange butterfly valves.2.Bronze swing check valves.3.Iron swing check valves.4.

Related Sections:B.

Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.1.Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and2.schedules.

DEFINITIONS1.3

CWP: Cold working pressure.A.

EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.B.

NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.C.

NRS: Nonrising stem.D.

OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.E.

RS: Rising stem.F.

SWP: Steam working pressure.G.

SUBMITTALS1.4

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 1



Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.A.


Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from singleA.manufacturer.

ASME Compliance:B.

ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.1.ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.2.ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.3.


Prepare valves for shipping as follows:A.

Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.1.Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.2.Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.3.Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.4.Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.5.Block check valves in either closed or open position.6.

Use the following precautions during storage:B.

Maintain valve end protection.1.Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If2.outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not useC.handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES2.1

Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.A.

Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for systemB.pressures and temperatures.

Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.C.




Valve Actuator Types:D.

Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.1.Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.2.

Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:E.

Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and1.protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal ordisturbing insulation.Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.2.

Valve-End Connections:F.

Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.1.Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.2.Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.3.

Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.G.

BRASS BALL VALVES2.2

Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:A.


Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.a.Flow-Tek, Inc.; a subsidiary of Bray International, Inc.b.NIBCO INC.c.

Description:2.

Standard: MSS SP-110.a.SWP Rating: 150 psig.b.CWP Rating: 600 psig.c.Body Design: Two piece.d.Body Material: Forged brass.e.Ends: Threaded.f.Seats: PTFE or TFE.g.Stem: Brass.h.Ball: Chrome-plated brass.i.Port: Full.j.

IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES2.3




150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:A.


ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc.a.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.b.NIBCO INC.c.

Description:2.

Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.a.CWP Rating: 150 psig.b.Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at ratedc.pressure without use of downstream flange.Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.d.Seat: EPDM.e.Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.f.Disc: Aluminum bronze.g.

BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES2.4

Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:A.


American Valve, Inc.a.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.b.NIBCO INC.c.

Description:2.

Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.a.CWP Rating: 200 psig.b.Body Design: Horizontal flow.c.Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.d.Ends: Threaded.e.Disc: Bronze.f.

IRON SWING CHECK VALVES2.5

Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the1.




following:

Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.a.Hammond Valve.b.NIBCO INC.c.

Description:2.

Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.a.NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.b.NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig.c.Body Design: Clear or full waterway.d.Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.e.Ends: Flanged.f.Trim: Bronze.g.Gasket: Asbestos free.h.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. RemoveA.special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping andhandling.

Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats madeB.accessible by such operations.

Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.C.

Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for properD.size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition issuitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.E.


Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,A.maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.B.

Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.C.




Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.D.

Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:E.

Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.1.

ADJUSTING3.3

Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service butA.before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS3.4

If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:A.

Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly valves.1.Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type.2.Throttling Service except Steam: Globe or angle , ball, or butterfly valves.3.Pump-Discharge Check Valves:4.

NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with [bronze] [or] [nonmetallic]a.disc.NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or withb.spring or iron, center-guided, [metal] [or] [resilient]-seat check valves.

If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valvesB.with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:C.

For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-1.end option is indicated in valve schedules below.For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end2.option is indicated in valve schedules below.For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.3.For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.4.For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end5.option is indicated in valve schedules below.For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.6.For Grooved-End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.7.

CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE3.5

Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:A.




Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded1.ends.Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass with brass trim.2.Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125 , bronze disc.3.

Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:B.

Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of1.flanged ends.Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 14 to NPS 24: 150 CWP, EPDM seat,2.aluminum-bronze disc.Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125 , metal seats.3.

HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE3.6

Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:A.

Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded1.ends.Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass with brass trim.2.Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125 , bronze disc.3.

Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:B.

Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of1.flanged ends.Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 14 to NPS 24: 150 CWP, EPDM seat,2.aluminum-bronze disc.Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125 , metal seats.3.





SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Metal pipe hangers and supports.1.Trapeze pipe hangers.2.Thermal-hanger shield inserts.3.Pipe stands.4.

DEFINITIONS1.3

MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.A.

SUBMITTALS1.4


Shop Drawings:Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for theB.following; include Product Data for components:

Trapeze pipe hangers.1.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performanceC.requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualifiedprofessional engineer responsible for their preparation.

Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.1.Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.2.

Welding certificates.D.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING ANDEQUIPMENT

230529 - 1




Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWSA.D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler andB.Pressure Vessel Code.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS2.1

Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:A.

Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.1.Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.2.Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.3.Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to4.support bearing surface of piping.Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of [carbon steel] [stainless5.steel] <Insert material>.

TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS2.2

Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made fromA.structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS2.3


Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicatedB.on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparableproduct by one of the following:

Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: [Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type IC.calcium silicate with 100-psig] [ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig] [or][ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig] minimum compressive


230529 - 2



strength.

For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.D.

For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.E.

Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambientF.air temperature.

PIPE STANDS2.4

General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made ofA.manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.


Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black andA.galvanized.

Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink andB.nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.1.Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.2.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -


Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,A.supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the buildingstructure.

Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. ArrangeB.for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricatedtrapeze pipe hangers.

Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or1.install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipehangers.Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being2.supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.


230529 - 3



Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.C.

Pipe Stand Installation:D.

Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on1.smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and2.mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories"for curbs.

Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,E.washers, and other accessories.

Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of pipingF.systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action ofexpansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.G.

Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additionalH.attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, [NPS 2-1/2] <Insertsize> and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete isplaced; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stressesI.from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceedJ.maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

Insulated Piping:K.

Attach clamps and spacers to piping.1.

Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project througha.insulation.Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shieldb.insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building servicesc.piping.

Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:2.

NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.a.NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.b.NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.c.


230529 - 4



NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.d.NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.e.

Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts3.of length at least as long as protective shield.Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.4.

METAL FABRICATIONS3.2

Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers .A.

Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot beB.shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;C.appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with thefollowing:

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion1.resistance of base metals.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.2.Remove welding flux immediately.3.Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so4.contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

ADJUSTING3.3

Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieveA.indicated slope of pipe.

Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to [1-1/2 inches] <InsertB.dimension>.

HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE3.4

Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems andA.equipment.

Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified inB.piping system Sections.

Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that willC.not have field-applied finish.


230529 - 5



Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are inD.direct contact with copper tubing.

Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments forE.general service applications.

Use and [stainless-steel] [or] [corrosion-resistant] attachments for hostile environmentF.applications.

Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.G.

Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping systemH.Sections, install the following types:

Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.1.

Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are notI.specified in piping system Sections.



230529 - 6



SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING ANDEQUIPMENT

GENERALPART 1 -



DEFINITIONS1.2

IBC: International Building Code.A.

ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.B.

OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.C.


Wind-Restraint Loading:A.

Basic Wind Speed: <Insert value>.1.Building Classification Category: [I] [II] [III] [IV].2.Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component3.projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees eitherside of normal.


Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section areA.more stringent.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "StructuralB.Welding Code - Steel."

Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shallC.bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, orpreapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximumseismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based oncalculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING ANDEQUIPMENT

230548 - 1



are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

VIBRATION ISOLATORS2.1




AIR-MOUNTING SYSTEMS2.2




VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES2.3




EXECUTIONPART 3 -


230548 - 2



EXAMINATION3.1

Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic[- and wind]-controlA.devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditionsaffecting performance.

Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locationsB.before installation.


APPLICATIONS3.2

Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for applicationA.by [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction].

Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes ofB.components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loadswithin specified loading limits.

VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION3.3

Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roofA.curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

Equipment Restraints:B.

Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance1.between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

Piping Restraints:C.

Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.1.Space lateral supports a maximum of [40 feet] <Insert dimension> o.c., and longitudinal2.supports a maximum of [80 feet] <Insert dimension> o.c.Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.3.

Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure atD.flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION3.4


230548 - 3



Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections orA.branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminatewith connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the onesupporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division22 Section "Hydronic Piping" for piping flexible connections.

ADJUSTING3.5

Adjust air-spring leveling mechanism.A.

Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.B.



230548 - 4



SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Pipe labels.1.Valve tags.2.

SUBMITTALS1.3


Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identificationB.material and device.

Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposedC.content for each label.

Valve numbering scheme.D.

Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.E.

COORDINATION1.4

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting ofA.surfaces where devices are to be applied.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.B.

Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.C.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1



PIPE LABELS2.1

General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with letteringA.indicating service, and showing flow direction.

Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference ofB.pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations orC.abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate1.both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.2.

VALVE TAGS2.2

Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-A.inch numbers.

Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or1.stamped holes for attachment hardware.Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook .2.

Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valveB.number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room orspace), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations foridentification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.1.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1

Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identificationA.devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, andencapsulants.

PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION3.2

Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;A.




machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; andexterior exposed locations as follows:

Near each valve and control device.1.Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.2.Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.3.At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed4.piping.Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.5.Spaced at maximum intervals of [50 feet] <Insert dimension> along each run. Reduce6.intervals to [25 feet] <Insert dimension> in areas of congested piping and equipment.On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.7.

Pipe Label Color Schedule:B.

Chilled-Water Piping:1.


Heating Water Piping:2.


VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION3.3

Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves withinA.factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-wateringhose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-usefixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme andB.with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

Valve-Tag Size and Shape:1.

Chilled Water: [1-1/2 inches] [2 inches], [round] [square] <Insert shape>.a.Hot Water: [1-1/2 inches] [2 inches], [round] [square] <Insert shape>.b.

Valve-Tag Color:2.

Chilled Water: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.a.Condenser Water: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.b.Refrigerant: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.c.Hot Water: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.d.




Gas: [Natural] [Yellow] <Insert color>.e.Low-Pressure Steam: [Natural] [Yellow] <Insert color>.f.High-Pressure Steam: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.g.Steam Condensate: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.h.

Letter Color:3.

Chilled Water: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.a.Condenser Water: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.b.Refrigerant: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.c.Hot Water: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.d.Gas: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.e.Low-Pressure Steam: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.f.High-Pressure Steam: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.g.Steam Condensate: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.h.





SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Balancing Air Systems:1.

Constant-volume air systems.a.Variable-air-volume systems.b.

Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:2.

Primary-secondary hydronic systems.a.

DEFINITIONS1.3

AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.A.

NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.B.

TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.C.

TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.D.

TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.E.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentationA.that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specifiedin "Quality Assurance" Article.

Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,B.submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1



Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TABC.strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

Certified TAB reports.D.

Sample report forms.E.

Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:F.

Instrument type and make.1.Serial number.2.Application.3.Dates of use.4.Dates of calibration.5.


TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC NEBB or TABB.A.

TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABCNEBB1.TABB.TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC NEBB2.or TABB as a TAB technician.

TAB Conference: Meet with Owner Construction Manager Commissioning Authority onB.approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of thedetails. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide sevendays' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

Agenda Items:1.

The Contract Documents examination report.a.The TAB plan.b.Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.c.Coordination of documentation and communication flow.d.

Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:C.

Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB1.reports.Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures2.specified and referenced in this Specification.

TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect Owner.D.

Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,E.




Section 5, "Instrumentation."


Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TABA.period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner'soperations.

Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before SubstantialB.Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner'soperations.

COORDINATION1.7

Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates andA.times.

Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have beenB.satisfactorily completed.

PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)PART 2 -

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

TAB SPECIALISTS3.1

Subject to compliance with requirements, [engage one of the following] [available TABA.contractors that may be engaged include, but are not limited to, the following]:

<Insert the TAB contractor's name>.1.

EXAMINATION3.2

Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discoverA.conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometerB.wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verifythat locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.C.




Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptionsD.for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies andassumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air toE.verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23 Section"Metal Ducts " and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations inplenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.F.

Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects1.that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all orpart of a system.Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when2.installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipmentperformance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found inAMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,G.cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.H.

Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are alignedI.and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessibleJ.and their controls are connected and functioning.

Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicatedK.perforations.

Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting orL.mixing fluid flows.

Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.M.

Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.N.

Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.O.

Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. ObserveP.and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if differentfrom indicated values.




PREPARATION3.3

Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.A.

Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:B.

Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.1.Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.2.Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.3.Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.4.Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.5.Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.6.Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and7.access to balancing devices is provided.Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be8.met.

GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING3.4

Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the proceduresA.contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and in this Section.

Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."1.

Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to theB.minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness1.as used to construct ducts.After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with2.requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,3.coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."

Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve positionC.indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or othersuitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

Take and report testing and balancing measurements in [inch-pound (IP)] [and] [metric (SI)]D.units.

GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS3.5

Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors andA.




recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes withrequired fan volumes.

Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.B.

For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.C.

Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.D.

Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-E.air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.F.

Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.G.

Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.H.

Check for airflow blockages.I.

Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.J.

Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.K.

Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."L.

PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS3.6

Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listedA.by fan manufacturer.

Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:1.

Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical anda.upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.b.Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan asc.possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from ductrestrictions.Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenumd.that houses the fan.

Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,2.rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.a.




Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, and3.heat-recovery equipment under final balanced conditions.Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus4.actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustmentsto accommodate actual conditions.Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than5.indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handlingunits for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unitperformance.Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment6.manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motoramperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum requiredbrake horsepower.

Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicatedB.airflows within specified tolerances.

Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.1.

Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tubea.traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculatethe total airflow for that zone.

Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust2.volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to3.adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.C.

Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written1.instructions and calculating factors.

Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances ofD.indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors andthe dampers at air terminals.

Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated1.quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by theContract Documents.Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.2.

PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS3.7

Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have beenA.




adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a1.position that simulates full-cooling load.Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.2.Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure forthe critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer'srecommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcometerminal-unit discharge system losses.Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.3.Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the4.designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions tomake this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstreamfrom terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the5.designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow thesame as described for constant-volume air systems.

If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leavea.outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and6.minimum outdoor airflow.

Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described fora.constant-volume air systems.

Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure7.controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure ismaintained at the most critical unit.Record final fan-performance data.8.

Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systemsB.have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume air1.systems.Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.2.Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the3.static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outletsdownstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.4.Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is5.installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static6.pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the7.




designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow thesame as described for constant-volume air systems.

If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leavea.the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and8.minimum outdoor airflow.

Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described fora.constant-volume air systems.

Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems haveC.been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal units1.at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributedevenly among the branch ducts.Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set2.at maximum airflow.Set terminal units at full-airflow condition.3.Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing4.progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit toindicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream fromterminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.5.Measure static pressure at the sensor.6.Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and7.minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets thesame as described for constant-volume air systems.

GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS3.8

Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to endA.of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate.Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.B.

Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition toC.the general preparation procedures specified above:

Open all manual valves for maximum flow.1.Check liquid level in expansion tank.2.Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.3.Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.4.Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at5.




fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminalvalves are kept open.Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.6.Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so7.motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.8.

PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY HYDRONIC SYSTEMS3.9

Balance the primary circuit flow first and then balance the secondary circuits.A.

PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS3.10

Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:A.

Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.1.Motor horsepower rating.2.Motor rpm.3.Efficiency rating.4.Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.5.Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.6.Starter thermal-protection-element rating.7.

Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varyingB.from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove properoperation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number,serial number, and nameplate data.

PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS3.11

Balance water flow through each evaporator[ and condenser] to within specified tolerances ofA.indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chillerinstallation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chillermanufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at designconditions:

Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.1.For water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure2.drop, and water flow.Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments3.furnished by chiller manufacturer.Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.4.Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.5.Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.6.For air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data7.




including number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS3.12

Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures and waterA.flow.

Steam Boilers: Measure and record entering-water temperature and flow and leaving-steamB.pressure, temperature, and flow.

TOLERANCES3.13

Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:A.

Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.1.Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.2.Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.3.Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.4.

REPORTING3.14

Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents asA.specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices tofacilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions toHVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring andbalancing devices.

Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures,B.procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problemsfound in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and eachbuilding floor for systems serving multiple floors.

FINAL REPORT3.15

General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sectionsA.for tested systems and balanced systems.

Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the1.certified testing and balancing engineer.Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.2.

Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:B.




Pump curves.1.Fan curves.2.Manufacturers' test data.3.Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.4.Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and5.product data.

General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:C.

Title page.1.Name and address of the TAB contractor.2.Project name.3.Project location.4.Architect's name and address.5.Engineer's name and address.6.Contractor's name and address.7.Report date.8.Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.9.Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.10.Number each page in the report.Summary of contents including the following:11.

Indicated versus final performance.a.Notable characteristics of systems.b.Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.c.

Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.12.Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.13.Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.14.Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:15.

Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.a.Conditions of filters.b.Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.c.Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.d.Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.e.Other system operating conditions that affect performance.f.

System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. PresentD.each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.1.Waterflow rates.2.Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.3.Pipe and valve sizes and locations.4.Terminal units.5.Balancing stations.6.




Position of balancing devices.7.

Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:E.

Unit Data:1.

Unit identification.a.Location.b.Make and type.c.Model number and unit size.d.Manufacturer's serial number.e.Unit arrangement and class.f.Discharge arrangement.g.Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.h.Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.i.Number, make, and size of belts.j.Number, type, and size of filters.k.

Motor Data:2.

Motor make, and frame type and size.a.Horsepower and rpm.b.Volts, phase, and hertz.c.Full-load amperage and service factor.d.Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.e.Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.f.

Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):3.

Total air flow rate in cfm.a.Total system static pressure in inches wg.b.Fan rpm.c.Discharge static pressure in inches wg.d.Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.e.Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.f.Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.g.Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.h.Outdoor airflow in cfm.i.Return airflow in cfm.j.Outdoor-air damper position.k.Return-air damper position.l.

Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:F.

Fan Data:1.

System identification.a.Location.b.




Make and type.c.Model number and size.d.Manufacturer's serial number.e.Arrangement and class.f.Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.g.Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.h.

Motor Data:2.

Motor make, and frame type and size.a.Horsepower and rpm.b.Volts, phase, and hertz.c.Full-load amperage and service factor.d.Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.e.Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.f.Number, make, and size of belts.g.


Total airflow rate in cfm.a.Total system static pressure in inches wg.b.Fan rpm.c.Discharge static pressure in inches wg.d.Suction static pressure in inches wg.e.

Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a gridG.representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

Report Data:1.

System and air-handling-unit number.a.Location and zone.b.Traverse air temperature in deg F.c.Duct static pressure in inches wg.d.Duct size in inches.e.Duct area in sq. ft..f.Indicated air flow rate in cfm.g.Indicated velocity in fpm.h.Actual air flow rate in cfm.i.Actual average velocity in fpm.j.Barometric pressure in psig.k.

Air-Terminal-Device Reports:H.

Unit Data:1.

System and air-handling unit identification.a.Location and zone.b.




Apparatus used for test.c.Area served.d.Make.e.Number from system diagram.f.Type and model number.g.Size.h.Effective area in sq. ft..i.


Air flow rate in cfm.a.Air velocity in fpm.b.Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm.c.Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.d.Final air flow rate in cfm.e.Final velocity in fpm.f.Space temperature in deg F.g.

System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:I.

Unit Data:1.

System and air-handling-unit identification.a.Location and zone.b.Room or riser served.c.Coil make and size.d.Flowmeter type.e.


Air flow rate in cfm.a.Entering-water temperature in deg F.b.Leaving-water temperature in deg F.c.Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.d.Entering-air temperature in deg F.e.Leaving-air temperature in deg F.f.

Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves andJ.include the following:

Unit Data:1.

Unit identification.a.Location.b.Service.c.Make and size.d.Model number and serial number.e.Water flow rate in gpm.f.




Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.g.Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.h.Pump rpm.i.Impeller diameter in inches.j.Motor make and frame size.k.Motor horsepower and rpm.l.Voltage at each connection.m.Amperage for each phase.n.Full-load amperage and service factor.o.Seal type.p.


Static head in feet of head or psig.a.Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.b.Actual impeller size in inches.c.Full-open flow rate in gpm.d.Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.e.Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.f.Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.g.Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.h.Final water flow rate in gpm.i.Voltage at each connection.j.Amperage for each phase.k.

Instrument Calibration Reports:K.

Report Data:1.

Instrument type and make.a.Serial number.b.Application.c.Dates of use.d.Dates of calibration.e.

INSPECTIONS3.16

Initial Inspection:A.

After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check1.measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balancereadings documented in the final report.Check the following for each system:2.

Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.a.Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.b.Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare thec.




reading to the set point.Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.d.Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.e.

Final Inspection:B.

After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that1.testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, requestthat a final inspection be made by Owner Construction ManagerCommissioningAuthority.The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the2.presence of Owner Construction Manager Commissioning Authority.Commissioning Authority shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final3.report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the totalmeasurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in anormal 8-hour business day.If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the4.final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as"FAILED."If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total5.measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall beconsidered incomplete and shall be rejected.

TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB WorkC.fails, proceed as follows:

Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing1.device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second finalinspection.If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB2.contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct thecost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.

Prepare test and inspection reports.D.

ADDITIONAL TESTS3.17

Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditionsA.are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer andB.winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.





SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Insulation Materials:1.

Calcium silicate.a.Cellular glass.b.Mineral fiber.c.

Fire-rated insulation systems.2.Adhesives.3.Mastics.4.Sealants.5.Tapes.6.

Related Sections:B.

Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation."1.Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation."2.Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.3.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, andA.jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

LEED Submittal:B.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement1.of VOC content.

Shop Drawings:C.

HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 1



Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of1.insulation and hanger.Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.2.Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.3.Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each4.type of insulation.Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access5.panels.Detail application at linkages of control devices.6.

Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describingD.product and intended use.

Sample Sizes:1.

Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2.a.Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square.b.Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches long by NPS 2.c.Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches square.d.Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the fulle.range of colors available for each type of finish material.

Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.E.

Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities havingF.jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulationmaterials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Includedates of tests and test methods employed.

Field quality-control reports.G.


Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeshipA.program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau ofApprenticeship and Training.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-B.response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory labelinsulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers,with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed1.index of 50 or less.Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed2.




index of 150 or less.


Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriateA.ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

COORDINATION1.6

Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified inA.Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, ductB.Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulationapplication. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintainclearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes andfor space required for maintenance.

Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.C.

SCHEDULING1.7

Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, afterA.installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that havesatisfactory test results.

Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area ofB.construction.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

INSULATION MATERIALS2.1

Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall beA.applied.

Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.B.

Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of lessC.than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptableD.according to ASTM C 795.




Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturingE.process.

Calcium Silicate:F.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.

Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo-12 Gold.a.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>b.

Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible,2.inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Complywith ASTM C 533, Type I.Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous3.calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533,Type I.Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for4.dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,G.hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.a.Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.b.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>c.

Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.2.Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.3.Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.4.Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.5.Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552,6.Type II, Class 2.Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.7.

Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.H.Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSKjacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


Johns Manville; Microlite.a.Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.b.Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.c.




Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:I.


Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.a.Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.b.Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.c.

Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.2.Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-appliedjacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

INSULATING CEMENTS2.2

Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.A.


Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.a.P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.b.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>c.

ADHESIVES2.3

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bondingA.insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperatureB.range of 50 to 800 deg F.


Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-97.a.Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-27/81-93.b.Marathon Industries, Inc.; 290.c.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-30.d.Vimasco Corporation; 760.e.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>f.

For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when2.calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range ofC.minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.





Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96.a.Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.b.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>c.

For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when2.calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

MASTICS2.4

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply withA.MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of <Insert value> g/L or1.less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambientB.services.


Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.a.Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.b.ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.c.Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.d.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.e.Vimasco Corporation; 749.f.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>g.

Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film2.thickness.Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.3.Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.4.Color: White.5.

LAGGING ADHESIVES2.5

Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible withA.insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of <Insert value>1.g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:2.




Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52.a.Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42.b.Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130.c.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30.d.Vimasco Corporation; 136.e.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>f.

Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-3.resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.4.Color: White.5.

SEALANTS2.6

Joint Sealants:A.

Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, and Polyisocyanurate Products: Subject to1.compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.a.Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45.b.Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.c.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.d.Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.e.Vimasco Corporation; 750.f.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>g.

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2.Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.3.Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.4.Color: White or gray.5.For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when6.calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS2.7

Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. WhenA.factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;1.complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;2.complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.




FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS2.8

PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,A.Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


Johns Manville; Zeston.a.P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.b.Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.c.Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.d.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>e.

Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.2.Color: White.3.Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.4.

Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,a.unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap andsupply covers for lavatories.

Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.5.

TAPES2.9

ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,A.complying with ASTM C 1136.


Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.a.Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.b.Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.c.Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.d.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>e.

Width: 3 inches.2.Thickness: 11.5 mils.3.Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4.Elongation: 2 percent.5.Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.6.ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.7.

FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylicB.




adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.


Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.a.Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.b.Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.c.Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.d.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>e.

Width: 3 inches.2.Thickness: 6.5 mils.3.Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4.Elongation: 2 percent.5.Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.6.FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.7.

PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.C.Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555.a.Compac Corp.; 130.b.Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape.c.Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.d.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>e.

Width: 2 inches.2.Thickness: 6 mils.3.Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.4.Elongation: 500 percent.5.Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.6.

Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.D.


Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.a.Compac Corp.; 120.b.Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.c.Venture Tape; 3520 CW.d.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>e.

Width: 2 inches.2.Thickness: 3.7 mils.3.Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.4.Elongation: 5 percent.5.




Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.6.

SECUREMENTS2.10

Bands:A.


Childers Products; Bands.a.PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.b.RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.c.<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>d.

Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch thick, 1/22.inch wide with wing seal .

Insulation Pins and Hangers:B.

Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for1.capacitor-discharge welding, [0.106-inch-] [0.135-inch-] diameter shank, length to suitdepth of insulation indicated.


AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.1)GEMCO; CD.2)Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.3)Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.4)<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>5)

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and otherA.conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of1.defects.Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.2.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.3.




PREPARATION3.2

Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that willA.adversely affect insulation application.

Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply aB.corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an1.epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F.Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methodsfor operating temperature range.Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 3002.deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coatingmaterials and application methods for operating temperature range.

Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply withC.requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact withD.stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS3.3

Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;A.free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping includingfittings, valves, and specialties.

Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses requiredB.for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation systemschedules.

Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. InstallC.accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet ordry state.

Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.D.

Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.E.

Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.F.

Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.G.

Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints withH.




adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

Install insulation with least number of joints practical.I.

Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,J.supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.1.For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor2.legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taperand seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to3.insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulationmaterial manufacturer.Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over4.jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wetK.and dry film thicknesses.

Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:L.

Draw jacket tight and smooth.1.Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation2.jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges ofstrip, spaced 4 inches o.c.Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with3.longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at [2 inches] [4 inches] o.c.

For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.a.

Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to4.maintain vapor seal.Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at5.ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominalM.thickness.

Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and crackingN.due to thermal movement.

Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.O.Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patchessimilar to butt joints.

For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:P.




Vibration-control devices.1.Testing agency labels and stamps.2.Nameplates and data plates.3.Manholes.4.Handholes.5.Cleanouts.6.

PENETRATIONS3.4

Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flushA.with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulationB.continuously through wall penetrations.

Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.1.For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface2.and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Sealjoint with joint sealant.Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at3.least 2 inches.Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.4.

Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):C.Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulationD.continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation atfire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate dampersleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping1.and fire-resistive joint sealers.

Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:E.

Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated.1.For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleevesand externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation.Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.2.Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in3.Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."




GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION3.5

Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where moreA.specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:B.

Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties1.with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from2.same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightlyagainst adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregularsurfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that isuniform with adjoining pipe insulation.Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same3.material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butteach section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces withadhesive.Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same4.material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipeinsulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipediameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces withinsulating cement.Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same5.material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipeinsulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipediameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulatingcement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed andreplaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusableinsulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vaporbarrier.Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.6.Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipeinsulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a7.mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic forabove ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel themastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric8.and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, andunions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulationfacing using PVC tape.Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION."9.Match size and color of pipe labels.




Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,C.test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around theconnection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashingsealant.

Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to theD.following:

Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same1.thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipeinsulation.When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation2.from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipeinsulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide3.the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of4.mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attachedinsulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipeinsulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipeinsulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement appliedin two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed5.surfaces with a metal jacket.

CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION3.6


Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten1.bands without deforming insulation materials.Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure2.inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steelbands at 12-inch intervals.Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to insulation surface. When3.cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass clothor tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glasscloth or tape. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish.


Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.1.Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the2.thickness of pipe insulation.




Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of3.adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material andthickness as pipe insulation.Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation.4.


Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when1.available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered2.sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation.3.


Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation1.to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.2.Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation.3.

CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION3.7


Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without1.deforming insulation materials.Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions2.with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with3.outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple4.longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulationmaterial manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.1.Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the2.thickness of pipe insulation.Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of3.adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation ofsame thickness as pipe insulation.Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least4.1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.





Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when1.available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of2.cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.


Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.1.Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without2.disturbing insulation.Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.3.

MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION3.8

Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulationA.pins.

Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,1.for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and2.transitions.Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-3.discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts asfollows:

On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinala.centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16inches o.c.On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. eachb.way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to holdinsulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.c.Do not overcompress insulation during installation.d.Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.e.Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel withf.insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulationfacing.

For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous4.unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints withinsulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Securelaps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barriermastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-a.




barrier seal.Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-footb.intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shapedpattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times theinsulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.5.At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section6.for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individuallymitered gores cut to fit the elbow.Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with7.6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides ofstiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.B.

Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,1.for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and2.transitions.Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-3.discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts asfollows:

On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinala.centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16inches o.c.On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. eachb.way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to holdinsulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.c.Do not overcompress insulation during installation.d.Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel withe.insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulationfacing.

For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous4.unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints withinsulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Securelaps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barriermastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-a.barrier seal.




Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-footb.intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shapedpattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times theinsulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section5.for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside andinside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows withindividually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with6.6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides ofstiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION3.9

Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and endA.joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanksand vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the1.finish bead along seam and joint edge.

Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and endB.joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproofsealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12inches o.c. and at end joints.

FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION3.10

Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers andA.supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.

Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.B.

Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems areC.specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

FINISHES3.11

Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable JacketA.Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09painting Sections.

Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket1.




material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.a.

Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visualB.inspection of the completed Work.

Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.C.


Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests andA.inspections.

Tests and Inspections:B.

Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and1.insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall belimited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule,General" Article.Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-2.applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent ofinspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the"Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portionadequate to determine compliance.Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing3.field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extentof inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations ofthreaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers,two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locationsof flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule,General" Article.

All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection revealsC.noncompliance with requirements.

DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL3.13

Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:A.

Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.1.Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.2.Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.3.Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.4.

Items Not Insulated:B.




Fibrous-glass ducts.1.Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and2.ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.Factory-insulated flexible ducts.3.Factory-insulated plenums and casings.4.Flexible connectors.5.Vibration-control devices.6.Factory-insulated access panels and doors.7.

INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE3.14

Concealed, round supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:A.

Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.1.

Concealed, round return-air duct insulation shall be the following:B.


Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:C.


Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:D.


Concealed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:E.


Concealed, return-air plenum insulation shall be the following:F.

Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.1.

PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL3.15

Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified forA.each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:B.

Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.1.Underground piping.2.




Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.3.

INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE3.16

Chilled Water, above 40 Deg F:A.

NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:1.

Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick.a.Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I : 2 inches thick.b.

Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below:B.

NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:1.

Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick.a.Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches thick.b.

OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE3.17

Chilled Water:A.

0.024-inch (0.61-mm) or heavier aluminum is recommended for outdoor applications.

0.016-inch (0.41-mm) or heavier stainless steel is recommended for outdoor applications.

Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install theB.field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.





SECTION 230800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

GENERALPART 1 -


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryA.Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY1.2

Section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, andA.equipment.

Related Sections:B.

Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning1.process requirements.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation ofA.resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.

CxA: Commissioning Authority.B.

HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.C.

Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together orD.separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

PRODUCTS (Not Used)PART 2 -

EXECUTIONPART 3 -


COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800 - 1



SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including controlA.components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.

DEFINITIONS1.3

I/O: Input/output.A.

PC: Personal computer.B.

PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.C.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE1.4

Comply with the following performance requirements:A.

Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data1.within 10 seconds.Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data2.within 8 seconds.Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of3.a binary object and device reaction.Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or4.workstation within six seconds.Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple5.workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds,6.but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan7.and update process values and outputs at least once per second.Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured8.variables within tolerances as follows:

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 1



Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.a.Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.b.Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale.c.Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.d.Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.e.Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F.f.Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F.g.Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F.h.Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent.i.Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale.j.Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.k.Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale.l.Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg.m.Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg.n.Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.o.

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION1.5


Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representativeA.who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,B.Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.


Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated toA.be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipmentmanufacturer.

System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.B.

COORDINATION1.8

Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plansA.and room details before installation.

Coordinate equipment with Division 28 Section "Intrusion Detection" to achieve compatibilityB.with equipment that interfaces with that system and with building master clock.




Coordinate equipment with Division 28 Section "Access Control" to achieve compatibility withC.equipment that interfaces with that system.

Coordinate equipment with Division 27 Section "Clock Systems" to achieve compatibility withD.equipment that interfaces with that system.

Coordinate equipment with Division 28 Section "PLC Electronic Detention Monitoring andE.Control Systems" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.

Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls" to achieveF.compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.

Coordinate equipment with Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" to achieveG.compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.

Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operatorH.workstation.

Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" toI.achieve compatibility of communication interfaces.

Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility withJ.starter coils and annunciation devices.

Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Motor-Control Centers" to achieveK.compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.

Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,L.reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-PlaceConcrete."

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1


Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers1.offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,manufacturers specified.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the2.manufacturers specified.




CONTROL SYSTEM2.2

Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interfaceA.equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.

Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interfaceB.equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllersoperating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed tocontrol mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network viadynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control devicedepicted by point-and-click graphics.

Control system shall include the following:C.

Building intrusion detection system specified in Division 28 Section "Intrusion1.Detection."Building clock control system specified in Division 27 Section "Clock Systems."2.Building lighting control system specified in Division 26 Section "Network Lighting3.Controls."Fire alarm system specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."4.

THERMOSTATS2.3

Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor.A.

Automatic switching from heating to cooling.1.Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point.2.Set up for four separate temperatures per day.3.Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days.4.Short-cycle protection.5.Programming based on [weekday, Saturday, and Sunday] [every day of week].6.Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard7.disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto.Battery replacement without program loss.8.Thermostat display features include the following:9.

Time of day.a.Actual room temperature.b.Programmed temperature.c.Programmed time.d.Duration of timed override.e.Day of week.f.System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."g.




CONTROL CABLE2.4

Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in Division 27 SectionA."Communications Horizontal Cabling."

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Verify that [conditioned ]power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.A.

INSTALLATION3.2

Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features ofA.programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.B.

Mount compressor and tank unit on [elastomeric mounts] [spring isolators with 1-inch staticC.deflection] [restrained spring isolators with 1-inch static deflection]. Vibration isolators arespecified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping andEquipment." Isolate air supply with wire-braid-reinforced rubber hose. Secure and anchoraccording to manufacturer's written instructions and seismic-control requirements.

Pipe manual and automatic drains to nearest floor drain.1.Supply instrument air from compressor units through filter, pressure-reducing valve, and2.pressure relief valve, with pressure gages and shutoff and bypass valves.

Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with DrawingsD.and room details before installation. Install devices [48 inches] [60 inches] <Insertdimension> above the floor.

Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.1.

Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:E.

Entrances.1.Public areas.2.Where indicated.3.

Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."F.

Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoorG.




temperatures.

Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 SectionH."Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23I.Section "Hydronic Piping."

Install steam and condensate instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according toJ.Division 23 Section "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping."

Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23K.Section "Refrigerant Piping."

Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts.L.

Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 27 Section "CommunicationsM.Horizontal Cabling."

ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION3.3

Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes forA.Electrical Systems."

Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage ElectricalB.Power Conductors and Cables."

Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27 Section "CommunicationsC.Horizontal Cabling."

Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are1.exposed.Install exposed cable in raceway.2.Install concealed cable in raceway.3.Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where4.several cables follow a common path.Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against5.abrasion. Tie and support conductors.Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control6.system, except local individual room control cables.Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration7.of piping and equipment.

Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions.D.Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch isE.




in hand position.

ADJUSTING3.4

Calibrating and Adjusting:A.

Calibrate instruments.1.Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog2.instrument.Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and3.instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrumentbeing calibrated.Control System Inputs and Outputs:4.

Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.a.Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output.b.Check digital inputs using jumper wire.c.Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.d.Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using ae.precision-resistant source.

Flow:5.

Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-pointa.calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.b.

Pressure:6.

Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.a.Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differentialb.set at minimum.

Temperature:7.

Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span usinga.a precision-resistance source.Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.b.

Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the8.manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open andclosed.Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's9.recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.10.Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of11.instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.




Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.B.

Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,C.provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to[three] <Insert number> visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for thispurpose.





SECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.A.

DEFINITIONS1.3

DDC: Direct digital control.A.

VAV: Variable air volume.B.

PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)PART 2 -

EXECUTION (Not Applicable)PART 3 -


SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 1



SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, andA.specialties for the following:

Hot-water heating piping.1.Chilled-water piping.2.Condensate-drain piping.3.Air-vent piping.4.


Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic1.piping.


Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the followingA.minimum working pressure and temperature:

Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 psig at 200 deg F.1.Chilled-Water Piping: 150 psig at 200 deg F.2.Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.3.Air-Vent Piping: [200 deg F] <Insert temperature>.4.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: For each type of the following:A.

Pressure-seal fittings.1.Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for2.calibrated-orifice balancing valves.Air control devices.3.

HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 1



Chemical treatment.4.Hydronic specialties.5.

LEED Submittal:B.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including1.printed statement of VOC content.

Welding certificates.C.

Qualification Data: For Installer.D.

Field quality-control test reports.E.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-F.duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available atG.Project site.


Installer Qualifications:A.

Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure-seal joint1.manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipecouplings and fittings.

Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,B."Structural Welding Code - Steel."

Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure VesselC.Code: Section IX.

Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."1.Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes2.involved and that certification is current.

ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,D.products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASMElabel. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boilerand Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01.

EXTRA MATERIALS1.6

Water-Treatment Chemicals: Furnish enough chemicals for initial system startup and forA.




preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.

Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow controlB.valve, include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -


Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.A.

Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.B.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the1.following:

Anvil International, Inc.a.S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products.b.Victaulic Company of America.c.<Insert manufacturer's name.>d.

Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze2.casting.Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed3.fitting. Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves,[ prelubricated]EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts andnuts.

Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings:C.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the1.following:

Stadler-Viega.a.<Insert manufacturer's name.>b.

Housing: Copper.2.O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM.3.Tools: Manufacturer's special tools.4.Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F.5.

Copper, Mechanically Formed Tee Option: For forming T-branch on copper water tube.D.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the1.following:

T-DRILL Industries Inc.a.<Insert manufacturer's name.>b.




Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.E.

STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS2.2

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness asA.indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "PipingB.Applications" Article.

Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3C."Piping Applications" Article.

Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3D."Piping Applications" Article.

Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raisedE.ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.F.

Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,G.nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

Material Group: 1.1.1.End Connections: Butt welding.2.Facings: Raised face.3.

Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:H.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the1.following:

Anvil International, Inc.a.Central Sprinkler Company; a division of Tyco Fire & Building Products.b.Victaulic Company of America.c.

Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade2.32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; orASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to acceptgrooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to securegrooved pipe and fittings.Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central3.cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs tosecure grooved pipe and fittings.

Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings:I.





Victaulic Company of America.a.<Insert manufacturer's name.>b.

Housing: Steel.2.O-Rings and Pipe Stop: EPDM.3.Tools: Manufacturer's special tool.4.Minimum 300-psig working-pressure rating at 230 deg F.5.

Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe inJ.which they are installed.

JOINING MATERIALS2.3

Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping systemA.contents.

ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless1.thickness or specific material is indicated.

Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.a.Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.b.

Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.B.

Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copperC.with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriateD.for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and workingE.temperatures and pressures.

DIELECTRIC FITTINGS2.4

Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-A.joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.B.

Dielectric Unions:C.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the1.following:




Capitol Manufacturing Company.a.Hart Industries International, Inc.b.Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.c.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division.d.

Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg2.F.

VALVES2.5

Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified inA.Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirementsB.specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:C.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the1.following:

Armstrong Pumps, Inc.a.Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.b.Flow Design Inc.c.Gerand Engineering Co.d.Griswold Controls.e.Taco.f.

Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.2.Ball: Brass or stainless steel.3.Plug: Resin.4.Seat: PTFE.5.End Connections: Threaded or socket.6.Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.7.Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.8.CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.9.Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.10.

Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:D.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the1.following:

Armstrong Pumps, Inc.a.Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.b.Flow Design Inc.c.Gerand Engineering Co.d.Griswold Controls.e.




Taco.f.

Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or2.venturi.Ball: Brass or stainless steel.3.Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.4.Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.5.Seat: PTFE.6.End Connections: Flanged or grooved.7.Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.8.Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.9.CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.10.Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.11.

AIR CONTROL DEVICES2.6


Amtrol, Inc.1.Armstrong Pumps, Inc.2.Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.3.Taco.4.<Insert manufacturer's name.>5.

Manual Air Vents:B.

Body: Bronze.1.Internal Parts: Nonferrous.2.Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.3.Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.4.Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.5.CWP Rating: 150 psig.6.Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.7.

Automatic Air Vents:C.

Body: Bronze or cast iron.1.Internal Parts: Nonferrous.2.Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.3.Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.4.Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4.5.CWP Rating: 150 psig.6.Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.7.

Expansion Tanks:D.




Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum1.operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tankfor gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according toASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and2.stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter.Provide tank fittings for 125-psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operatingtemperature.Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure and3.240 deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank,drain water, and close off system.Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, [3/4-inch-] <Insert dimension>4.diameter gage glass, and slotted-metal glass guard.

Bladder-Type Expansion Tanks:E.

Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum1.operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed andlabeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain2.required expansion capacity.Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.3.

In-Line Air Separators:F.

Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to1.maximize air separation.Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig.2.Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F.3.

CHEMICAL TREATMENT2.7

Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal.A.capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.

Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent1.accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.

HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES2.8

Y-Pattern Strainers:A.

Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.1.End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and2.larger.




Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 503.percent free area.CWP Rating: 125 psig.4.

Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:B.

Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body.1.End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges.2.Performance: Capable of misalignment.3.CWP Rating: 150 psig.4.Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.5.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PIPING APPLICATIONS3.1

Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:A.

Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and pressure-seal joints.1.Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange2.fittings; and threaded joints.Schedule 5 steel pipe; steel, pressure-seal couplings and fittings; and pressure-seal joints.3.

Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:B.

Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges1.and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,2.mechanical joints.

Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:C.

Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and [soldered] [brazed]1.[pressure-seal] joints.Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange2.fittings; and threaded joints.Schedule 5 steel pipe; steel, pressure-seal couplings and fittings; and pressure-seal joints.3.

Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:D.

Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges1.and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,2.mechanical joints.

Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, andE.




soldered joints.

Air-Vent Piping:F.

Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic1.piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.2.

Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joiningG.methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer'swritten instructions.

VALVE APPLICATIONS3.2

Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connectionA.to each piece of equipment.

Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.B.

Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or coolingC.terminal.

Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.D.

Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.E.

PIPING INSTALLATIONS3.3

Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of pipingA.systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe andcalculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install pipingas indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment roomsB.and service areas.

Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at rightC.angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicatedotherwise.

Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.D.

Install piping to permit valve servicing.E.

Install piping at indicated slopes.F.




Install piping free of sags and bends.G.

Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.H.

Install piping to allow application of insulation.I.

Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operatingJ.pressure.

Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicingK.of valves.

Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nippleL.with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.M.

Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.N.

Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, withO.the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch tothe top of the main pipe.

Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."P.

Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections ofQ.equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhereR.as indicated.

Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-S.line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdownconnection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection forstrainers smaller than NPS 2.

Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified inT.Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping."

Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping andU.Equipment."

Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirementsV.for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply withW.requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for




HVAC Piping."

Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withX.requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons for HVACPiping."

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS3.4

Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers andA.Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements formaximum spacing of supports.

Install the following pipe attachments:B.

Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.1.Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or2.longer.Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,3.supported on a trapeze.Spring hangers to support vertical runs.4.Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with5.copper pipe.On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from6.scratching pipe.

Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:C.

NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.1.NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.2.NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.3.NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.4.NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.5.NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.6.NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.7.NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.8.NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.9.NPS 10: Maximum span, 20 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch.10.NPS 12: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch.11.NPS 14: Maximum span, 25 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch.12.NPS 16: Maximum span, 27 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch.13.NPS 18: Maximum span, 28 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches.14.NPS 20: Maximum span, 30 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches.15.

Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.D.

PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION3.5




Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 SectionsA.specifying piping systems.

Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.B.

Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings beforeC.assembly.

Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tubeD.end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," usinglead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"E.Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. CutF.threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restorefull ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal1.threading is specified.Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or2.damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualifiedG.processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for serviceH.application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or rollI.grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipewall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.

Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool andJ.procedure, and brazed joints.

Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertionK.marks on pipe after assembly.

HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION3.6

Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as requiredA.for system air venting.

Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only.B.




Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2C.percent upward slope toward tank.

Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 andD.larger.

Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full-portE.ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain.

Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright positionF.with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypassconnections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain andinclude a full-size, full-port, ball valve.

Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and chargeG.tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank.

Install tank fittings that are shipped loose.1.Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of2.tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload buildingcomponents and structural members.

Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tankH.is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.

TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS3.7

Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipmentA.connections.

Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.B.

Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves areC.installed, only one bypass is required.

Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections accordingD.to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."


Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:A.

Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.1.




Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test2.pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace3.strainer screens.Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be4.capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flangedjoints to isolate equipment.Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to5.protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:B.

Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to1.freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may beused.While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use2.drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.3.Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the4.system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for anyvessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due topressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimumyield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "BuildingServices Piping."After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,5.joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacingcomponents, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.Prepare written report of testing.6.

Perform the following before operating the system:C.

Open manual valves fully.1.Inspect pumps for proper rotation.2.Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.3.Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating4.freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.5.Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,6.cooling towers, to specified values.Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.7.





SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2


Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.1.Pump Specialty Fittings.2.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.A.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operatingA.characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type ofproduct indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templatesB.for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.

Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.1.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, andC.maintenance manuals.


Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.A.

Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronicB.pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "ProductRequirements."

HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - 1



Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,C.Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.

UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.D.


Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfacesA.and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipeopenings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

Store pumps in dry location.B.

Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.C.

Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.D.

Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.E.

COORDINATION1.7

Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,A.reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

EXTRA MATERIALS1.8


Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.1.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1


Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the1.manufacturers specified.




SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS2.2


Armstrong Pumps Inc.1.Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group.2.Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries.3.PACO Pumps.4.Taco, Inc.5.

Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separatelyB.coupled, end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting,with pump and motor shafts horizontal. Rate pump for 250-psig minimum working pressureand a continuous water temperature of 200 deg F .

Pump Construction:C.

Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage1.tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flangedconnections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and attached pipingto allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping or requiringthe realignment of pump and motor shaft.Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft,2.and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance.Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.3.Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel4.spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket.Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings contained in cast-iron housing with5.grease fittings.

Shaft Coupling: Molded rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration.D.Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pumpshaft or motor.

Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel;E.removable; attached to mounting frame.

Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated fromF.ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard,and motor.

Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated;G.secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment. Comply with requirements inDivision 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."




PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS2.3

Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast -iron body and end cap, pump-A.inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze orstainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory-fabricated support.

Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast -iron body, pump-B.discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.Brass gage ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirementsA.for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections beforeB.pump installation.

Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.C.


CONCRETE BASES3.2

Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to Division 23A.Section "Common Work Results for HVAC."

Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,1.install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete2.base and anchor into structural concrete floor.Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,3.instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.4.

Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 03.B.

PUMP INSTALLATION3.3

Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,A.




couplings, and accessories.

Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps andB.weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling before setting. Do notC.reconnect couplings until alignment procedure is complete.

Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with1.small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inchesbetween pump base and foundation for grouting.Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling2.faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb.

ALIGNMENT3.4

Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has beenA.set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made.

Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.B.

After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fillC.baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are inplace. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

CONNECTIONS3.5


Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.B.

Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.C.

Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.D.

Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.E.

Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.F.

Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps betweenG.pump casing and valves.

Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure-gage tapping, orH.install single gage with multiple input selector valve.




Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for ElectricalI.Systems."

Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power ConductorsJ.and Cables."

STARTUP SERVICE3.6

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.A.

Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.1.Check piping connections for tightness.2.Clean strainers on suction piping.3.Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:4.

Verify bearing lubrication.a.Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid isb.free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operateuntil cause of trouble is determined and corrected.Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.c.

Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for5.operation.Start motor.6.Open discharge valve slowly.7.

DEMONSTRATION3.7

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toA.adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstrationand Training."

END OF SECTION 23 2123




SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.1.Single-wall roundducts and fittings.2.Sheet metal materials.3.Sealants and gaskets.4.Hangers and supports.5.

Related Sections:B.

Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting,1.and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: For each type of the following products:A.

Liners and adhesives.1.Sealants and gaskets.2.

LEED Submittals:B.

Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply1.with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply2.with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction andInsulation."Leakage Test Report for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation of work performed for3.compliance with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4.2.2 - "Duct Leakage Tests."Duct-Cleaning Test Report for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for4.compliance with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.4 - "Ventilation System Start-Up."Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement5.

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1



of VOC content.

Field quality-control reports.C.


ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "SystemsA.and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."

ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004,B.Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS2.1

General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionA.Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwiseindicated.

Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC DuctB.Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," forstatic-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-supportintervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible."

Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC DuctC.Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - RectangularDucts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible."

Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select typesD.and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicablesealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions inSMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS2.2

General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionA.Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based onindicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.




Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers1.offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:

McGill AirFlow LLC.a.SEMCO Incorporated.b.Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.c.

Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC DuctB.Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct,"for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-supportintervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible."

Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC DuctC.Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings,"for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-supportintervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible."

Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC DuctD.Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," andFigure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materialsinvolved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC DuctConstruction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

SHEET METAL MATERIALS2.3

General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionA.Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and ductconstruction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.B.

Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.1.

Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; blackC.and galvanized.

Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum1.ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inchD.minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.




DUCT LINER2.4

Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and withA.NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."


CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.a.Johns Manville.b.Knauf Insulation.c.Owens Corning.d.<Insert manufacturer's name>.e.Maximum Thermal Conductivity:f.

Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean1)temperature.Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean2)temperature.

Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form2.the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating.Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by theEPA for use in HVAC systems.Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C3.916.

For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or lessa.when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Insulation Pins and Washers:B.

Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully1.annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suitdepth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick2.stainless steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place butnot less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

SEALANT AND GASKETS2.5

General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants andA.gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed indexof 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.





Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.A.

Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - MetalB.and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.C.

Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, andD.bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatibleE.with duct materials.

Trapeze and Riser Supports:F.

Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.1.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

DUCT INSTALLATION3.1

Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of ductA.system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts andcalculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawingsand Coordination Drawings.

Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andB.Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

Install roundducts in maximum practical lengths.C.

Install ducts with fewest possible joints.D.

Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and forE.branch connections.

Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel andF.perpendicular to building lines.

Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanentG.




enclosure elements of building.

Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.H.

Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms andI.enclosures.

Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposedJ.to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metalflanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2inches.

Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.K.Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smokedampers.

Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.L.Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

DUCT SEALING3.2

Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "DuctA.Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible."

Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionB.Standards - Metal and Flexible":

Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."1.Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.2.Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.3.Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.4.Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal5.Class B.Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg:6.Seal Class A.Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.7.Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.8.Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal9.Class C.Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal10.Class B.Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.11.Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.12.





Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," ChapterA.4, "Hangers and Supports."

Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fastenersB.appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.1.Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.2.Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for3.slabs more than 4 inches thick.Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for4.slabs less than 4 inches thick.Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.5.

Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andC.Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "MinimumHanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supportswithin 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.D.

Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,E.bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of16 feet.

Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,F.tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

CONNECTIONS3.4

Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 SectionA."Air Duct Accessories."

Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" forB.branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

PAINTING3.5

Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not haveA.duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.






Leakage Tests:B.

Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report1.for each test.Test the following systems:2.

Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg: Test representative ducta.sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than 25percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representativeb.duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than[50] [100] <Insert value> percent of total installed duct area for each designatedpressure class.Return Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representativec.duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than[50] [100] <Insert value> percent of total installed duct area for each designatedpressure class.Exhaust Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representatived.duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than[50] [100] <Insert value> percent of total installed duct area for each designatedpressure class.Outdoor Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Teste.representative duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totalingno less than [50] [100] <Insert value> percent of total installed duct area for eachdesignated pressure class.

Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing3.and for compliance with test requirements.Test for leaks before applying external insulation.4.Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section5.being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum systemdesign pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.Give seven days' advance notice for testing.6.

Duct System Cleanliness Tests:C.

Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.1.Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according2.to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVACSystems."

Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter mediaa.shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.D.





DUCT CLEANING3.7

Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.A.

Use service openings for entry and inspection.B.

Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if1.required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patchinsulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.2.Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.3.

Particulate Collection and Odor Control:C.

When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.971.percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from2.HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other pointsof entry into building.

Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:D.

Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).1.Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply2.and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and driveassemblies.Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section,3.air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers anddehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.Coils and related components.4.Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and5.mechanical equipment rooms.Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.6.Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.7.

Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:E.

Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants1.from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect2.vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are undernegative pressure.Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without3.




damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner4.to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminatedor that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.5.Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb andstraighten fins.Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.6.

START UP3.8

Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, andA.Balancing for HVAC."

DUCT SCHEDULE3.9

Supply Ducts:A.

Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, and Terminal Units <Insert equipment>:1.

Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.a.Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.b.SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.c.SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 12.d.

Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units <Insert equipment>:2.

Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg.a.Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.b.SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.c.SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 6.d.

Return Ducts:B.

Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units :1.

Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg.a.Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.b.SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.c.SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 12.d.

Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units :2.

Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.a.Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.b.SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.c.




SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 12.d.

Exhaust Ducts:C.

Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:1.

Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg.a.Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.b.SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.c.SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 12.d.

Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:2.

Pressure Class: Positive or negative [2-inch wg] [3-inch wg] [4-inch wg] <Inserta.value>.Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: [A] [B] if negative pressure, and A if positiveb.pressure.SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: [6] [12] [24] <Insert value>.c.SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: [3] [6] [12] [24] <Insertd.value>.

Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:D.

Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units:1.


Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units :2.


Liner:E.

Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1-1/2 inches thick.1.

Elbow Configuration:F.

Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -1.Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:a.




Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.1)Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.2)

Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:b.

Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.1)Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two2)vanes.Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct3)Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and VaneRunners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:c.

Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.1)Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two2)vanes.Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct3)Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and VaneRunners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -2.Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.a.Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.b.Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Ductc.Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and VaneRunners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal3.and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."

Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply witha.SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1,"Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction haveproportionately fewer segments.

Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three1)segments for 90-degree elbow.Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments2)for 90-degree elbow.Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five3)segments for 90-degree elbow.Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.4)

Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.b.




Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.c.

Branch Configuration:G.

Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -1.Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."

Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.a.Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.b.

Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and2.Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees."Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.a.Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.b.Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.c.





SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Manual volume dampers.1.Control dampers.2.Fire dampers.3.Combination fire and smoke dampers.4.Duct accessory hardware.5.

SUBMITTALS1.3


LEED Submittal:B.

Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with1.ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."

Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details andC.attachments to other work.

Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.1.Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of fieldassembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

Special fittings.a.Manual volume damper installations.b.Control damper installations.c.Fire-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and corridor damperd.installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors and remote damperoperators.Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.e.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1



Source quality-control reports.D.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation andE.maintenance manuals.


Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and withA.NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.B.

EXTRA MATERIALS1.5

Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protectiveA.covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS2.1

Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" forA.acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwiseindicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,discolorations, and other imperfections.

Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.B.

Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.1.Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.2.

Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2C.finish for concealed ducts.

Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish forD.concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.E.

Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed onF.galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inchG.




minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS2.2

Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:A.


McGill AirFlow LLC.a.METALAIRE, Inc.b.Nailor Industries Inc.c.Ruskin Company.d.

Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.2.Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.3.Frames:4.

Hat-shaped, galvanized -steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness.a.Mitered and welded corners.b.Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.c.

Blades:5.

Multiple or single blade.a.Parallel- or opposed-blade design.b.Stiffen damper blades for stability.c.Galvanized -steel, 0.064 inch thick.d.

Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.6.Bearings:7.

[Oil-impregnated bronze] [Molded synthetic] [Stainless-steel sleeve].a.Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles fullb.length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.8.

Jackshaft:B.

Size: 1-inch diameter.1.Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on2.supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in3.multiple-damper assembly.

Damper Hardware:C.




Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel,1.and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.2.Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.3.

CONTROL DAMPERS2.3


Greenheck Fan Corporation.1.McGill AirFlow LLC.2.METALAIRE, Inc.3.Nailor Industries Inc.4.Ruskin Company.5.<Insert manufacturer's name>.6.

Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings SealB.for both air performance and air leakage.

Frames:C.

Hat shaped.1.Galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.2.Mitered and welded corners.3.

Blades:D.

Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches.1.Parallel -blade design.2.Galvanized steel.3.0.064 inch thick.4.Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene edging.5.Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.6.

Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steelE.and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.1.

Bearings:F.

[Oil-impregnated bronze] [Molded synthetic] [Stainless-steel sleeve].1.Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of2.damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.3.




FIRE DAMPERS2.4


Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.1.Greenheck Fan Corporation.2.McGill AirFlow LLC.3.Ruskin Company.4.<Insert manufacturer's name>.5.

Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.B.

Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity.C.

Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.D.

Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch-E.thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.F.

Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit1.application.Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of2.perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame mustcomply with sleeve requirements.

Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.G.

Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place ofH.interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.I.

Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 212 deg F rated, fusible links.J.

Heat-Responsive Device: Electric resettable link and switch package, factory installed, 212 degK.F rated.

COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS2.5





Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.1.Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.2.Greenheck Fan Corporation.3.Nailor Industries Inc.4.Ruskin Company.5.<Insert manufacturer's name>.6.

Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL.B.

Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity.C.

Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.D.

Frame: [Curtain type with blades inside airstream] [Curtain type with blades outside airstream]E.[Multiple-blade type] [Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behindgrille where blades may be inside airstream]; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thickgalvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 212 deg F rated, fusible links.F.

Heat-Responsive Device: Electric resettable link and switch package, factory installed, rated.G.

Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.H.

Frame: [Curtain type with blades inside airstream] [Curtain type with blades outside airstream]I.[Multiple-blade type] [Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behindgrille where blades may be inside airstream]; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thickgalvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. InJ.place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel bladeconnectors.

Leakage: Class I.K.

Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.L.

Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suitM.wall or floor application[ with factory-furnished silicone calking].

Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.N.

Damper Motors: two-position action.O.

DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS2.6





American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.1.Ductmate Industries, Inc.2.Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.3.Greenheck Fan Corporation.4.McGill AirFlow LLC.5.Nailor Industries Inc.6.<Insert manufacturer's name>.7.

Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC DuctB.Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."

Door:1.

Double wall, rectangular.a.Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for ductb.pressure class.Vision panel.c.Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.d.Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.e.

Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.2.Number of Hinges and Locks:3.

Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.a.Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.b.Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches[c.with outside and inside handles].Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compressiond.latches with outside and inside handles.

FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS2.7


Ductmate Industries, Inc.1.Duro Dyne Inc.2.Ventfabrics, Inc.3.Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.4.<Insert manufacturer's name>.5.

Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.B.




Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.C.

Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip [3-1/2 inches] [5-3/4 inches]D.wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.E.

Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..1.Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.2.Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.3.

Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert inF.compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fandischarge and duct.

Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of1.30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.2.Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.3.Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without4.deformation or failure.Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.5.Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at6.start and stop.

FLEXIBLE DUCTS2.8


Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.1.McGill AirFlow LLC.2.Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.3.<Insert manufacturer's name>.4.

Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,B.spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film.

Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.1.Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.2.Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.3.Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.4.

Flexible Duct Connectors:C.




Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a1.worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE2.9

Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw capA.and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length tosuit duct-insulation thickness.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC DuctA.Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "FibrousGlass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories inB.galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, andaluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extendC.from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers withhat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.1.

Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.D.

Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.E.

Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintainingF.accessories and equipment at the following locations:

Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.1.Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressurerelief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstreamfrom dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.Elsewhere as indicated.2.

Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.G.

Access Door Sizes:H.




Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.1.

Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping andI.Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.J.

Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum Insert value lengths ofK.flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. There shall be a minimum of 3duct diameters of hard, straight duct entering terminal unit.

Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible ductL.clamped or strapped in place.

Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.M.

Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.N.

Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. AttachO.thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during startand stop of fans.


Tests and Inspections:A.

Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.1.Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be2.performed.Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of3.movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.4.





SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Single-duct air terminal units.1.


Structural Performance: Hangers and supportsshall withstand the effects of gravityloads andA.stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards - Metal and Flexible" .

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: For each type of the following products, including rated capacities, furnishedA.specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories.

Air terminal units.1.Liners and adhesives.2.Sealants and gaskets.3.

Shop Drawings: For air terminal units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, andB.attachments to other work.

Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required1.clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each fieldconnection.Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic2.restraints, and vibration isolation.

Field quality-control reports.C.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation,D.

AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - 1



and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation andMaintenance Data," include the following:

Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes.1.Instructions for adjusting software set points.2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS2.1


Titus.1.Nailor.2.Price.3.

Configuration: Diverting-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside aB.protective metal shroud.

Casing: 0.034-inch steel, single wall.C.

Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 1/2-inch- thick, polyurethane foam insulation1.complying with UL 181 erosion requirements, and having a maximum flame-spreadindex of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation andadhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84.Air Inlet: Round stub connection for duct attachment.2.Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.3.Access: Removable panels for access to diverting damper and other parts requiring4.service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket.


Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.A.

Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.B.

Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, andC.bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;D.compatible with duct materials.

Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum forE.units with aluminum casings.




SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL2.3

Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.A.

Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum1.factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of AirA.Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service andB.maintenance.

Install wall-mounted thermostats.C.


Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," ChapterA.4, "Hangers and Supports."

Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fastenersB.appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.1.Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.2.Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for3.slabs more than 4 inches thick.Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and4.for slabs less than 4 inches thick.Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.5.

Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.C.

Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,D.tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

CONNECTIONS3.3




Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."A.

Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements inB.Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

IDENTIFICATION3.4

Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimumA.factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification forHVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.





SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.A.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:A.

Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and1.performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location,2.quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following itemsB.are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the itemsinvolved:

Ceiling suspension assembly members.1.Method of attaching hangers to building structure.2.Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.3.Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,4.access panels, and special moldings.Duct access panels.5.

Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied colorC.finishes.

Samples for Verification: For diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizesD.to verify color selected.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1



MANUFACTURERS2.1


Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be1.incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products2.specified.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers3.offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,manufacturers specified.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the4.manufacturers specified.

RESIDENTIAL RETURN GRILLES2.2

Fixed Face Grille:A.

Available Products:1.

Airmate; 170.a.

Available Manufacturers:2.

Airmate.a.

Material: Steel.3.Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.4.Face Arrangement: Fixed 35 degree Blades.5.Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.6.

RESIDENTIAL CEILING DIFFUSER OUTLETS2.3

Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers :A.

Available Products:1.

Airmate; 140.a.

Manufacturers:2.

Airmate.a.




Material: Steel.3.Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.4.Mounting: Surface.5.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance withA.requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance ofequipment.


INSTALLATION3.2

Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.A.

Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,B.and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve designrequirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Makefinal locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceilingpanels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflictwith installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service andC.maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

ADJUSTING3.3

After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,A.before starting air balancing.





SECTION 235239 - FIRE-TUBE BOILERS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled boilers, trim, andA.accessories for generating hot water with the following configurations and burners:

Vertical, fire-tube boiler.1.Gas burner.2.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, andA.accessories.

Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,B.details, and attachments to other work.

Design calculations and vibration isolation base details, signed and sealed by a qualified1.professional engineer.

Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators anda.seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages andb.attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motorslides and rails and equipment mounting frames.


Source quality-control test reports.C.

Field quality-control test reports.D.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers, components, and accessories to include inE.emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

FIRE-TUBE BOILERS 235239 - 1



Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.F.

Other Informational Submittals:G.

ASME Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A," "S," or "PP" stamp certificate of1.authorization, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and document hydrostatictesting of piping external to boiler.Startup service reports.2.


Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,A.Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.

ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and PressureB.Vessel Code.

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "GasC.and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."

UL Compliance: Test Boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-Industrial GasD.Heating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.

COORDINATION1.5

Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,A.reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

WARRANTY1.6

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orA.replace front- and rear-door refractories and heat exchangers of boilers that fail in materials orworkmanship within specified warranty period.

Vertical, Fire-Tube Boilers and Heat Exchanger: [Five] <Insert number> years from1.date of Substantial Completion, if following water-treatment program recommended bymanufacturer.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -




MANUFACTURERS2.1




PVI Industries, LLC.1.<Insert manufacturer's name.>2.

MANUFACTURED UNITS2.2

Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, vertical, fire-tube boilers with heatA.exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base; including insulated jacket, flue-gas vent,water supply and return connections, and controls.

Pressure Vessel Design: Straight, steel pipe welded in a concentric pattern to separate flue-gasB.and heating media to form [two] [four] passes with welded fins to improve heat transfer insecondary flue-gas passages. Include the following accessories:

Handholes for water-side inspections.1.Lifting lugs on top of boiler.2.Minimum NPS 1 hose-end drain valves at water passage low point.3.Tappings or flanges for supply- and return-water piping.4.Built-in air separator.5.

Combustion Chamber: Equipped with flame retainer to lengthen flame-residence time.C.

Casing:D.

Insulation: Minimum 4-inch- thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the heat1.exchanger and combustion chamber.Flue Connection: Top connection, constructed of [aluminized] [stainless] steel.2.Jacket: Mirror-finish stainless steel with screw-fastened closures.3.Mounting base to secure boiler to concrete base.4.

Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment toa.boiler, accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to withstandseismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls forHVAC Piping and Equipment" when mounting base is anchored to building




structure.

Control Compartment Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type [1] [4] [4X] [12] <Insert type>.5.

BURNER2.3

Burner: Welded construction with multivane, stainless-steel, flame-retention diffuser forA.[natural] [propane] gas.[ Mount burner on hinged access door to permit access tocombustion chamber.]

Blower: Forward-curved centrifugal fan integral to burner, directly driven by motor; withB.adjustable, dual-blade damper assembly and locking quadrant to set air-fuel ratio.

Motors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor1.Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so drivena.load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

Gas Train: Control devices and [modulating] [on-off] [low-high-low] control sequence shallC.comply with requirements in [ASME CSD-1] [FMG] [IRI] [UL].

Pilot: [Intermittent] [Interrupted]-electric-spark pilot ignition with 100 percent main-valveD.and pilot-safety shutoff with electronic supervision of burner flame.

Flue-Gas Recirculation: Burner connections shall be equipped for recirculating flue gas.E.

Maximum Oxides of Nitrogen Emissions: [20] [30] <Insert value> ppm.1.

TRIM2.4

Include devices sized to comply with [ANSI B31.1, "Power Piping] [ANSI B31.9, "BuildingA.Services Piping]."

Aquastat Controllers: Operating[, firing rate,] and high limit.B.

Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch- diameter, combination water-pressureC.and -temperature gage. Gages shall have operating-pressure and -temperature ranges so normaloperating range is about 50 percent of full range.

Boiler Air Vent: [Automatic] [Manual].D.

Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose-end gate valve.E.

CONTROLS2.5




Refer to Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."A.

Building Automation System Interface: Factory-install hardware and software to enableB.building automation system to monitor, control, and display boiler status and alarms.

Hardwired Points:1.

Monitoring: On/off status, common trouble alarm low water level alarm.a.Control: On/off operation, hot water supply temperature set-point adjustment .b.

ELECTRICAL POWER2.6

Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers,A.transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field powerconnection to boiler.

House in NEMA 250, Type [1] [4] [4X] [12] <Insert type> enclosure.1.Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram.2.Install wiring outside of an enclosure in a [metal ]raceway.3.Field power interface shall be to [wire lugs] [fused disconnect switch] [nonfused4.disconnect switch] [circuit breaker].Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls[ with a disconnect switch or5.circuit breaker].Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.6.


Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler andA.Pressure Vessel Code.

Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbonB.dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achievecombustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.

Allow Owner access to source quality-control testing of boilers. Notify Architect 14 days inC.advance of testing.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizesA.and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other




conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance, and operations.

Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations1.before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed.B.


BOILER INSTALLATION3.2

Install boilers level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 23 SectionA."Common Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation requirements arespecified in Division 03.

Vibration Isolation: Elastomeric [isolator pads] [mounts] with a minimum static deflection ofB.[0.25 inch] <Insert deflection>. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements arespecified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping andEquipment."

Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.C.

Assemble and install boiler trim.D.

Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.E.

Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.F.

CONNECTIONS3.3


Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.B.

Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gasC.train connection. Provide a reducer if required.

Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union orD.flange at each connection.

Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at leastE.full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.

Connect breeching full size to boiler outlet. Comply with requirements in Division 23 SectionF."Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for venting materials.




Install flue-gas recirculation duct from vent to burner. Comply with requirements in DivisionG.23 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for recirculation duct materials.

Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for ElectricalH.Systems."

Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power ConductorsI.and Cables."


Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.A.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to1.inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, andto assist in testing.


Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.1.Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.2.Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust3.air-fuel ratio and combustion.Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and4.equipment.

Burner Test: Adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides ofa.nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustionefficiency.Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety setb.points of fuel supply, water level, and water temperature .Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.c.

Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.C.

Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within [12 months of date of SubstantialD.Completion] <Insert time period>, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suitactual occupied conditions. Provide up to [two] <Insert number> visits to Project duringother than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

Performance Tests:E.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to1.inspect component assemblies and equipment installations, including connections, and toconduct performance testing.Boilers shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as determined by field2.




performance tests. Adjust, modify, or replace equipment in order to comply.Perform field performance tests to determine the capacity and efficiency of boilers.3.

Test for full capacity.a.Test for boiler efficiency at [low fire, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 80, 60, 40 and 20]b.<Insert range> percent of full capacity. Determine efficiency at each test point.

Repeat tests until results comply with requirements indicated.4.Provide analysis equipment required to determine performance.5.Provide temporary equipment and system modifications necessary to dissipate the heat6.produced during tests if building systems are not adequate.Notify Architect in advance of test dates.7.Document test results in a report and submit to Architect.8.

DEMONSTRATION3.5

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toA.adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Video training sessions. Refer to Division 01 Section"Demonstration and Training."





SECTION 236426 - ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Packaged, air-cooled chillers.1.

DEFINITIONS1.3

BAS: Building automation system.A.

COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energyB.input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.

EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h to theC.total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions.

IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of meritD.calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and referenced to ARI standard ratingconditions.

kW/Ton: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigeratingE.capacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions.

NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of meritF.calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions otherthan ARI standard rating conditions.


Site Altitude: Chiller shall be suitable for altitude in which installed without affectingA.performance indicated. Make adjustments to affected chiller components to account for sitealtitude.

ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS 236426 - 1



Performance Tolerance: Comply with the following in lieu of ARI 550/590:B.

Allowable Capacity Tolerance: [Zero] <Insert number> percent.1.Allowable IPLV/NPLV Performance Tolerance: [Zero] <Insert number> percent.2.

SUBMITTALS1.5

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include refrigerant, rated capacities,A.operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

Performance at ARI standard conditions and at conditions indicated.1.Performance at ARI standard unloading conditions.2.Minimum evaporator flow rate.3.Refrigerant capacity of chiller.4.Oil capacity of chiller.5.Fluid capacity of evaporator.6.Characteristics of safety relief valves.7.Fluid capacity of condenser.8.Minimum entering condenser-fluid temperature.9.Performance at varying capacities with constant-design entering condenser-fluid10.temperature. Repeat performance at varying capacities for different condenser-fluidtemperatures from design to minimum in [5 deg F] <Insert temperature> increments.Minimum entering condenser-air temperature.11.Maximum entering condenser-air temperature.12.Performance at varying capacities with constant-design entering condenser-air13.temperature. Repeat performance at varying capacities for different entering condenser-air temperatures from design to minimum in [10 deg F] <Insert temperature>increments.

LEED Submittal:B.

Product Data for Credit EA 4: Documentation required by Credit EA 4 indicating that1.equipment and refrigerants comply.


Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, load distribution, required1.clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each fieldconnection.Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.2.

Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.D.

Source quality-control reports.E.

Startup service reports.F.




Operation and Maintenance Data: For each chiller to include in emergency, operation, andG.maintenance manuals.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.H.


ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to [ARI 550] [and] [ARI 590] certificationA.program(s).

ARI Rating: Rate chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590.B.

ASHRAE Compliance:C.

ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.1.ASHRAE 147 for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage requirements.2.

ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.D.

ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label chiller to comply with ASME Boiler and PressureE.Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, and include an ASME U-stamp and nameplatecertifying compliance.

Comply with NFPA 70.F.

Comply with requirements of UL and UL Canada and include label by a qualified testingG.agency showing compliance.


Ship chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant.A.

Ship each chiller with a full charge of refrigerant. Charge each chiller with nitrogen ifB.refrigerant is shipped in containers separate from chiller.

Ship each oil-lubricated chiller with a full charge of oil.C.

Ship oil [factory installed in chiller] [in containers separate from chiller].1.

Package chiller for export shipping in totally enclosed [crate] [and] [bagging].D.

COORDINATION1.8

Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-A.




bolt inserts into bases.

Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support structures.B.

Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations withC.actual equipment provided.

WARRANTY1.9

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orA.replace components of chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warrantyperiod.

Extended warranties include, but are not limited to, the following:1.

Complete chiller including refrigerant and oil charge.a.Complete compressor and drive assembly including refrigerant and oil charge.b.Refrigerant [and oil ]charge.c.Parts [only] [and labor].d.Loss of refrigerant charge for any reason.e.

Warranty Period: [Two] [Three] [Four] [Five] <Insert number> years from date of2.Substantial Completion.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PACKAGED, AIR-COOLED CHILLERS2.1

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicatedA.on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparableproduct by one of the following:

McQuay International.1.Trane; a division of American Standard.2.YORK International Corporation.3.

Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested chiller complete with base and frame,B.condenser casing, compressors, compressor motors and motor controllers, evaporator,condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, electrical power, controls, and accessories.

Cabinet:C.

Base: Galvanized-steel base extending the perimeter of chiller. Secure frame,1.compressors, and evaporator to base to provide a single-piece unit.Frame: Rigid galvanized-steel frame secured to base and designed to support cabinet,2.




condenser, control panel, and other chiller components not directly supported by base.Casing: Galvanized steel.3.Finish: Coat base, frame, and casing with a corrosion-resistant coating capable of4.withstanding a [500] [1000] <Insert number>-hour salt-spray test according to ASTM B117.Sound-reduction package designed to reduce sound level without affecting performance5.and consisting of the following:

Acoustic enclosure around compressors.a.Reduced-speed fans with acoustic treatment.b.

Security Package: Provide removable [grilles] [louvered panels] with fasteners for6.additional protection of compressors, evaporator, and condenser coils without inhibitingservice access. Finish to match cabinet.

Compressors:D.

Description: Positive displacement, hermetically sealed.1.Casing: Cast iron, precision machined for minimum clearance about periphery of rotors.2.Rotors: Manufacturer's standard one- or two-rotor design.3.Each compressor provided with[ suction and] discharge shutoff valves, crankcase oil4.heater, and suction strainer.

Service: Easily accessible for inspection and service.E.

Capacity Control: On-off compressor cycling and modulating slide-valve assembly or portF.unloaders combined with hot-gas bypass, if necessary, to achieve performance indicated.

Maintain stable operation throughout range of operation. Configure to achieve most1.energy-efficient operation possible.Operating Range: From 100 to [20] [15] [10] [5] [zero] <Insert number> percent of2.design capacity.Condenser-Air Unloading Requirements over Operating Range: [Constant-design3.entering condenser-air temperature] [Drop-in entering condenser-air temperatureof 5 deg F drop for each 10 percent in capacity reduction] <Insert conditions>.For units equipped with a variable frequency controller, capacity control shall be both4."valveless" and "stepless," requiring no slide valve or capacity-control valve(s) to operateat reduced capacity.

Oil Lubrication System: Consisting of pump if required, filtration, heater, cooler, factory-wiredG.power connection, and controls.

Provide lubrication to bearings, gears, and other rotating surfaces at all operating, startup,1.shutdown, and standby conditions including power failure.Thermostatically controlled oil heater properly sized to remove refrigerant from oil.2.Factory-installed and pressure-tested piping with isolation valves and accessories.3.Oil compatible with refrigerant and chiller components.4.Positive visual indication of oil level.5.




Vibration Control:H.

Vibration Balance: Balance chiller compressors and drive assemblies to provide a1.precision balance that is free of noticeable vibration over the entire operating range.

Overspeed Test: 25 percent above design operating speed.a.

Isolation: Mount individual compressors on vibration isolators.2.

Compressor Motors:I.

Hermetically sealed and cooled by refrigerant suction gas.1.High-torque, induction type with inherent thermal-overload protection on each phase.2.

Compressor Motor Controllers:J.

Across the Line: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing[, or solid state].1.

Refrigerant Circuits:K.

Refrigerant: Type as indicated on Drawings.1.Refrigerant Type: HFC . Classified as Safety Group A1 according to ASHRAE 34.2.Refrigerant Compatibility: Chiller parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible3.with refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures.Refrigerant Circuit: Each shall include a thermal- or electronic-expansion valve,4.refrigerant charging connections, a hot-gas muffler, compressor[ suction] and dischargeshutoff valves, a liquid-line shutoff valve, a [replaceable-core]filter-dryer, a sight glasswith moisture indicator, a liquid-line solenoid valve, and an insulated suction line.Pressure Relief Device:5.

Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and in applicable portions of ASMEa.Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.ASME-rated, spring-loaded pressure relief valve; single- or multiple-reseating type.b.

Evaporator:L.

Description: Shell-and-tube design.1.

Direct-expansion (DX) type with fluid flowing through the shell, and refrigeranta.flowing through the tubes within the shell.Flooded type with fluid flowing through tubes and refrigerant flowing around tubesb.within the shell.

Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel2.Code: Section VIII, Division 1.Shell Material: Carbon steel.3.Shell Heads: Removable carbon-steel heads located at each end of the tube bundle.4.




Fluid Nozzles: Terminated with flanged end connections for connection to field piping.5.Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin design,6.expanded into tube sheets.Heater: Factory-installed and -wired electric heater with integral controls designed to7.protect the evaporator to minus 20 deg F.Remote Mounting: Designed for remote field mounting where indicated. Provide kit for8.field installation.

Air-Cooled Condenser:M.

Plate-fin coil with integral subcooling on each circuit, rated at 450 psig.1.

Construct coil casing of stainless steel.a.Construct coils of copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum with precoatedb.epoxy-phenolic fins.Coat coils with a baked-epoxy, corrosion-resistant coating after fabrication.c.Hail Protection: Provide condenser coils with louvers, baffles, or hoods to protectd.against hail damage.

Fans: Direct-drive propeller type with statically and dynamically balanced fan blades,2.arranged for vertical air discharge.Fan Motors: Totally enclosed nonventilating (TENV) or totally enclosed air over3.(TEAO) enclosure, with permanently lubricated bearings. Equip each motor withoverload protection integral to either the motor or chiller controls.Fan Guards: Steel safety guards with corrosion-resistant coating.4.

Electrical Power:N.

Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other1.electrical devices necessary shall provide a multipoint, field-power connection to chiller.House in a unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure with hinged access door with2.lock and key or padlock and key.Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram.3.Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a raceway.4.Field-power interface shall be to [wire lugs] [NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfused5.disconnect switch] [NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker with lockablehandle].

Disconnect means shall be interlocked with door operation.a.Minimum withstand rating shall be as required by electrical power distributionb.system, but not less than [42,000] [65,000] [100,000] <Insert value> A.

Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with one of the following6.disconnecting means:

NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated fora.fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 60947-4-1.




NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector (circuit breaker) with field-adjustable, short-b.circuit-trip set point.

Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.7.Overload relay sized according to UL 1995 or an integral component of chiller control8.microprocessor.Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing with adjustable settings.9.Provide power factor correction capacitors to correct power factor to [0.90] [0.95]10.<Insert value> at full load.Control Transformer: Unit-mounted transformer with primary and secondary fuses and11.sized with enough capacity to operate electrical load plus spare capacity.

Power unit-mounted controls where indicated.a.Power unit-mounted, ground fault interrupt (GFI) duplex receptacle.b.

Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.12.For chiller electrical power supply, indicate the following:13.

Current and phase to phase for all three phases.a.Voltage, phase to phase, and phase to neutral for all three phases.b.Three-phase real power (kilowatts).c.Three-phase reactive power (kilovolt amperes reactive).d.Power factor.e.Running log of total power versus time (kilowatt-hours).f.Fault log, with time and date of each.g.<Insert features>.h.

Controls:O.

Standalone and microprocessor based.1.Enclosure: Share enclosure with electrical power devices or provide a separate2.enclosure[ for remote mounting in the field].Trending: Capability to trend analog data of up to [five] <Insert number> parameters3.simultaneously over an adjustable period and frequency of polling.Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and4.password with at least three levels of access: view only; view and operate; and view,operate, and service.Control Authority: At least four conditions: Off, local manual control at chiller, local5.automatic control at chiller, and automatic control through a remote source.BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor,6.control, and display chiller status and alarms.

Insulation:P.

Material: Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric, thermal insulation complying with ASTM C1.534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.Thickness: [3/4 inch] [1-1/2 inches] <Insert thickness>.2.Factory-applied insulation over cold surfaces of chiller components.3.




Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and applied to 100 percenta.of insulation contact surface. Seal seams and joints.

Apply protective coating to exposed surfaces of insulation to protect insulation from4.weather.

Accessories:Q.

Factory-furnished, chilled-water flow switches for field installation.1.Individual compressor suction and discharge pressure gages with shutoff valves for each2.refrigerant circuit.Factory-furnished neoprene isolators for field installation.3.Tool Kit: Chiller manufacturer shall assemble a tool kit specially designed for use in4.serving the chiller(s) furnished. Include special tools required to service chillercomponents not readily available to Owner service personnel in performing routinemaintenance. Place tools in a lockable case with hinged cover. Provide a list of each toolfurnished and attach the list to underside of case cover.


Perform functional tests of chillers before shipping.A.

Factory run test each air-cooled chiller with water flowing through evaporator.B.

Factory performance test water-cooled chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 550/590.C.

Test the following conditions:1.

Design conditions indicated.a.Reduction in capacity from design to minimum load in steps of [10] [25] [33]b.<Insert number> with condenser fluid at design conditions.Reduction in capacity from design to minimum load in steps of [10] [25] [33]c.<Insert number> with varying entering condenser-fluid temperature from designto minimum conditions in [5 deg F] <Insert temperature> increments.At [one] [two] [three] [four] [five] [10] <Insert number> point(s) of varying part-d.load performance to be selected by Owner at time of test.

Allow [Owner] <Insert entity> access to place where chillers are being tested. Notify2.Architect [14] <Insert number> days in advance of testing.Prepare test report indicating test procedures, instrumentation, test conditions, and results.3.Submit copy of results within one week of test date.

Factory performance test air-cooled chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 550/590.D.





Design conditions indicated.a.Reduction in capacity from design to minimum load in steps of [10] [25] [33]b.<Insert number> with condenser air at design conditions.At [one] [two] [three] [four] [five] <Insert number> point(s) of varying part-loadc.performance to be selected by Owner at time of test.


Factory sound test [water-cooled chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 575] [air-E.cooled chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 370].


Design conditions indicated.a.Chiller operating at calculated worst-case sound condition.b.At [one] [two] [three] [four] [five] <Insert number> point(s) of varying part-loadc.performance to be selected by Owner at time of test.


Factory test and inspect evaporatoraccording to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:F.Section VIII, Division 1.

For chillers located indoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 575.G.

For chillers located outdoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 370.H.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine chillers before installation. Reject chillers that are damaged.A.

Examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, andB.electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting chillerperformance, maintenance, and operations before equipment installation.

Final chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations1.before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.





CHILLER INSTALLATION3.2

Install chillers on support structure indicated.A.

Equipment Mounting: Install chiller on concrete bases using elastomeric pads. Comply withB.requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete][Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete]." Comply with requirements for vibration isolationdevices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping andEquipment."

Minimum Deflection: [1/4 inch] [1/2 inch] [1 inch] [2 inches] <Insert dimension>.1.Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,2.install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete3.base and anchor into structural concrete floor.Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,4.instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.5.

Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.C.

Charge chiller with refrigerant and fill with oil if not factory installed.D.

Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.E.

CONNECTIONS3.3

Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping".A.Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.B.

Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, flexibleC.connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet withshutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee withshutoff valve and pressure gage,[ flow meter,] and drain connection with valve. Makeconnections to chiller with a flange.

Condenser Fluid Connections: Connect to condenser inlet with shutoff valve, [strainer,]D.[flexible connector,] thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to condenseroutlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve,[ flexible connector,] flow switch, thermometer,plugged tee with shutoff valve and pressure gage,[ flow meter,] and drain connection withvalve. Make connections to chiller with a [flange] [or] [mechanical coupling].




Refrigerant Pressure Relief Device Connections: For chillers installed indoors, extend [ventE.piping] [separate vent piping for each chiller] to the outdoors without valves or restrictions.Comply with ASHRAE 15. Connect vent to chiller pressure relief device with flexibleconnector and dirt leg with drain valve.

Connect each chiller drain connection with a union and drain pipe, and extend pipe, full size ofF.connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection.

STARTUP SERVICE3.4

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.A.

Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.1.Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak tested.2.Verify that pumps are installed and functional.3.Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.4.Operate chiller for run-in period.5.Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.6.For chillers installed indoors, verify that refrigerant pressure relief device is vented7.outdoors.Verify proper motor rotation.8.Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller startup9.and shutdown.Verify and record performance of fluid flow and low-temperature interlocks for10.evaporator.Verify and record performance of chiller protection devices.11.Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and12.equipment.

Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electricalB.connections for proper assembly, installation, and connection.

Prepare test and inspection startup reports.C.

DEMONSTRATION3.5

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toA.adjust, operate, and maintain chillers. Video record the training sessions.





SECTION 238219 - FAN COIL UNITS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.A.

DEFINITIONS1.3

BAS: Building automation system.A.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, andA.accessories.

LEED Submittals:B.

Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with1.ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."

Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, requiredC.clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each fieldconnection.


Field quality-control test reports.D.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in emergency, operation, andE.maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation andMaintenance Data," include the following:

Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.1.

Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.F.

FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 1





ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "SystemsB.and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-C.2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

WARRANTY1.6

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orA.replace components of condensing units that fail in materials or workmanship within specifiedwarranty period.


Compressor failure.a.Condenser coil leak.b.

Warranty Period: [Four] [Five] [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial2.Completion.Warranty Period (Compressor Only): [Five] [10] <Insert number> years from date of3.Substantial Completion.Warranty Period (Condenser Coil Only): [Five] <Insert number> years from date of4.Substantial Completion.

EXTRA MATERIALS1.7


Fan-Coil-Unit Filters: Furnish 1 spare filters for each filter installed.1.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply toA.




product selection:

In the Fan-Coil-Unit Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduceB.lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers1.offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,manufacturers specified.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the2.manufacturers specified.Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each fan-coil unit is based on the product3.named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or acomparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

FAN-COIL UNITS2.2

Basis-of-Design Product: Trane; UNT-PRC001-EN or a comparable product by one of theA.following:

Available Manufacturers:B.

Carrier Corporation.1.McQuay International.2.Trane.3.YORK International Corporation.4.

Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, andC.UL 1995.

Coil Section Insulation: [1/2-inch] [1-inch] <Insert thickness> thick, [coated glass fiber]D.[foil-covered, closed-cell foam] [matte-finish, closed-cell foam] complying with ASTM C1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.

Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum1.flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according toASTM E 84.Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with2.requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

Main and Auxiliary Drain Pans: Stainless steel. Fabricate pans and drain connections toE.comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.[ Drain pans shall be removable].

Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture. Floor-mounting units shall haveF.leveling screws.

Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color as selected byG.Architect.




Vertical Unit Front Panels: Removable, steel, with [integral stamped] [polyethylene]1.[steel] discharge grille and channel-formed edges, cam fasteners, and insulation on backof panel.Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan-coil units into ceiling or wall.2.

Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reportingH.value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

Pleated Cotton-Polyester Media: 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV.1.

Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer thanI.0.1 inch, rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-watertemperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain valve.

Fan and Motor Board: Removable.J.

Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor.1.Thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels, and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-steelfan scrolls.Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board.2.Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements forHVAC Equipment."Wiring Termination: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.3.

Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type L copper tube with wrought-copperK.fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service, inlet, and outlet.

[Two] [Three]-way, [two-position] [modulating] control valve for chilled-water coil.1.[Two] [Three]-way, [two-position] [modulating] control valve for heating coil.2.Hose Kits: Minimum 400-psig working pressure, and operating temperatures from 33 to3.211 deg F. Tag hose kits to equipment designations.

Length: [24 inches] [36 inches] <Insert dimension>.a.Minimum Diameter: Equal to fan-coil-unit connection size.b.

Two-Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or4.TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.Calibrated-Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball type; 125-psig working5.pressure, 250-deg F maximum operating temperature; with calibrated orifice or venturi,connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, threaded ends,and equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.Automatic Flow-Control Valve: Brass or ferrous-metal body; 300-psig working pressure6.at 250 deg F, with removable, corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning pistonspring; factory set to maintain constant indicated flow with plus or minus 10 percent overdifferential pressure range of 2 to 80 psig.Y-Pattern Hydronic Strainers: Cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B); 125-psig7.working pressure; with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel




basket, and bottom drain connection. Include minimum NPS 1/2 hose-end, full-port,ball-type blowdown valve in drain connection.Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.8.Risers: ASTM B 88, Type L copper pipe with hose and ball valve for system flushing.9.

Control devices and operational sequences are specified in Division 23 SectionsL."Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."

BAS Interface Requirements:M.

Interface relay for scheduled operation.1.Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation.2.Provide [BACnet] [or] [LonWorks] interface for central BAS workstation for the3.following functions:

Adjust set points.a.Fan-coil-unit start, stop, and operating status.b.Data inquiry, including room-air temperature.c.

Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection.N.

DUCTED FAN-COIL UNITS2.3

Basis-of-Design Product: Trane; TEC3F36 or a comparable product by one of the following:A.

Available Manufacturers:B.

Carrier Corporation.1.McQuay International.2.Trane.3.YORK International Corporation.4.

Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, andC.UL 1995.

Coil Section Insulation: [1/2-inch] [1-inch] <Insert thickness> thick [coated] [foil-faced]D.glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C916.

Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum1.flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according toASTM E 84.Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with2.requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

Drain Pans: Stainless steel. Fabricate pans and drain connections to comply with ASHRAEE.62.1-2004.




Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture, with baked-enamel finish and removableF.access panels.

Cabinets: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color.G.

Supply-Air Plenum: Sheet metal plenum finished and insulated to match the chassis[1.with mill-finish, aluminum, double-deflection grille].Return-Air Plenum: Sheet metal plenum finished to match the chassis.2.Dampers: Galvanized steel with extruded-vinyl blade seals, flexible-metal jamb seals,3.and interlocking linkage.

Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reportingH.value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

Pleated Cotton-Polyester Media: 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV.1.

Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer thanI.0.1 inch, rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-watertemperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain.

Direct-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated,J.multispeed motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, andpainted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls.

Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: [ASTM B 88, Type L] [ASTM B 88, Type M] copper tubeK.with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service, inlet, andoutlet.

[Two] [Three]-way, [two-position] [modulating] control valve for chilled-water coil.1.[Two] [Three]-way, [two-position] [modulating] control valve for heating coil.2.Hose Kits: Minimum 400-psig working pressure, and operating temperatures from 33 to3.211 deg F. Tag hose kits to equipment designations.

Length: [24 inches] [36 inches] <Insert dimension>.a.Minimum Diameter: Equal to fan-coil-unit connection size.b.

Two-Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or4.TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.Calibrated-Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball type; 125-psig working5.pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature; with calibrated orifice or venturi,connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, threaded ends,and equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.Automatic Flow-Control Valve: Brass or ferrous-metal body; 300-psig working pressure6.at 250 deg F; with removable, corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning pistonspring; factory set to maintain constant indicated flow with plus or minus 10 percent overdifferential pressure range of 2 to 80 psig.Y-Pattern Hydronic Strainers: Cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B); 125-psig7.




working pressure, with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steelbasket, and bottom drain connection. Include minimum NPS 1/2 hose-end, full-port,ball-type blowdown valve in drain connection.Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.8.

Control devices and operational sequence are specified in Division 23 Section "InstrumentationL.and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."

[DDC ]Terminal Controller:M.

Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on seven-day clock with a1.minimum of four programmable periods per day.Unoccupied Period Override Operation: [Two] <Insert number> hours.2.Unit Supply-Air Fan Operation:3.

Occupied Periods: Fan runs continuously.a.Unoccupied Periods: Fan cycles to maintain room setback temperature.b.

Hydronic-Cooling-Coil Operation:4.

Occupied Periods: [Open] [Modulate] control valve to maintain rooma.temperature.

[Supplemental] Heating-Coil Operation:5.

Occupied Periods: [Open control valve] [Modulate control valve] [Energizea.electric-resistance coil] to provide heating if room temperature falls belowthermostat set point.

Controller shall have volatile-memory backup.6.

BAS Interface Requirements:N.

Interface relay for scheduled operation.1.Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation.2.Provide [BACnet] [or] [LonWorks] interface for central BAS workstation for the3.following functions:

Adjust set points.a.Fan-coil-unit start, stop, and operating status.b.Data inquiry including [outdoor-air damper position, ]supply- and room-airc.temperature[ and humidity].Occupied and unoccupied schedules.d.

Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection.O.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -




EXAMINATION3.1

Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installationA.tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan-B.coil-unit installation.


INSTALLATION3.2

Install fan-coil units level and plumb.A.

Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.B.

Verify locations of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with DrawingsC.and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above finished floor.

Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.D.

CONNECTIONS3.3

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicateA.general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are asfollows:

Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.1.Connect piping to fan-coil-unit factory hydronic piping package. Install piping package2.if shipped loose.Connect condensate drain to indirect waste.3.

Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Installa.cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.

Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors specified inB.Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 forduct connections.

Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for ElectricalC.Systems."

Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power ConductorsD.and Cables."





Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect[,A.test, and adjust] field-assembled components and equipment installation, includingconnections[, and to assist in field testing]. Report results in writing.

Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:B.

Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm1.proper motor rotation and unit operation.Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and2.electrical connections.Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning3.controls and equipment.

Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.C.

DEMONSTRATION3.5

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toA.adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration andTraining."





SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2


Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.1.Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.2.


Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice1.and data circuits.

DEFINITIONS1.3

EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.A.

NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.B.

SUBMITTALS1.4


Qualification Data: For testing agency.B.



Comply with NFPA 70.B.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS ANDCABLES

260519 - 1



PRODUCTSPART 2 -

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES2.1



Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.1.American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.2.General Cable Corporation.3.Senator Wire & Cable Company.4.Southwire Company.5.

Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.C.

Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.D.

Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for [armored cable, Type AC] [metal-E.clad cable, Type MC] [mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI] [nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM] [Type SO] [and] [Type USE] with ground wire.

CONNECTORS AND SPLICES2.2



AFC Cable Systems, Inc.1.Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.2.O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.3.3M; Electrical Products Division.4.Tyco Electronics Corp.5.

Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,C.and class for application and service indicated.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -


260519 - 2



CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS3.1

Feeders: Copper . Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.A.

Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG andB.larger.

CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND3.2WIRING METHODS

Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: [Type THHN-THWN, singleA.conductors in raceway] [Armored cable, Type AC] [Metal-clad cable, Type MC][Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI] [Nonmetallic-sheathed cable, TypeNM].

Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.B.

Class 2 Control Circuits: [Type THHN-THWN, in raceway] [Power-limited cable,C.concealed in building finishes] [Power-limited tray cable, in cable tray].

INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES3.3

Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.A.

Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound usedB.must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommendedmaximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that willC.not damage cables or raceway.

Install conduits parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, andD.follow surface contours where possible.

Support cables and conduits according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports forE.Electrical Systems."

Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "IdentificationF.for Electrical Systems."

CONNECTIONS3.4


260519 - 3



Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-A.tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL486A and UL 486B.

Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalentB.or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.C.




After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,1.test[ service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the followingcritical equipment and services] for compliance with requirements.

<Insert, in separate subparagraphs, critical equipment and services to bea.tested.>

Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA2.Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final3.Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWGand larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portablescanner.

Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan ofa.each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or tob.detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record fordevice.Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splicesc.checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficienciesdetected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:C.

Test procedures used.1.Test results that comply with requirements.2.Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve3.compliance with requirements.


260519 - 4



Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.D.



260519 - 5



SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.A.

SUBMITTALS1.3



Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,A.by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.B.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

CONDUCTORS2.1

Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required byA.applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

Bare Copper Conductors:B.

Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.1.Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.2.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1



APPLICATIONS3.1

Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller .A.

EQUIPMENT GROUNDING3.2

Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.A.

Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to thoseB.required by NFPA 70:

Feeders and branch circuits.1.Lighting circuits.2.Receptacle circuits.3.Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.4.

INSTALLATION3.3

Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwiseA.indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they maybe subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

LABELING3.4

Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems"A.Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.

Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer[ and at theB.grounding electrode conductor where exposed].

Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason,1.notify the facility manager."



Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to1.inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and




to assist in testing.


After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been1.energized, test for compliance with requirements.Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, electrical2.connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's writteninstructions.

Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.C.

Prepare test and inspection reports.D.

Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:E.

Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: [10]1.<Insert value> ohms.Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: [5]2.<Insert value> ohms.Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: [3]3.<Insert value> ohms.<Insert application and maximum ground-resistance value> ohms.4.

Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify EngineerF.promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.





SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.A.

DEFINITIONS1.3

EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.A.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-coverA.enclosures, and cabinets.

Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections,B.details, and attachments to other work.

Custom enclosures and cabinets.1.



Comply with NFPA 70.B.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING2.1

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1





AFC Cable Systems, Inc.1.Alflex Inc.2.Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.3.Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.4.Electri-Flex Co.5.Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.6.Maverick Tube Corporation.7.O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.8.Wheatland Tube Company.9.

EMT: ANSI C80.3.C.

Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:D.NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application andenvironment in which installed.

Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw type.1.

OPTICAL FIBER/COMMUNICATIONS CABLE RACEWAY AND FITTINGS2.2



Arnco Corporation.1.Endot Industries Inc.2.IPEX Inc.3.Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.4.<Insert manufacturer's name>.5.

Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible type, approved for general-use installation.C.

BOXES2.3






Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.1.EGS/Appleton Electric.2.Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.3.Hoffman.4.Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.5.O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.6.RACO; a Hubbell Company.7.Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.8.Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.9.Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.10.Thomas & Betts Corporation.11.Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).12.Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.13.<Insert manufacturer's name.>14.

Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.C.

Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, [ferrous alloy] [aluminum], Type FD, withD.gasketed cover.

Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.E.

Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, [cast aluminum] [galvanized, castF.iron] with gasketed cover.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

RACEWAY APPLICATION3.1

Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:A.

Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT .1.Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,2.Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wetlocations.Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or3.Communications Cable: [General-use, optical fiber/communications cable raceway][Riser-type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway] [Plenum-type, opticalfiber/communications cable raceway] [EMT] <Insert raceway type>.Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, [stainless4.steel] [nonmetallic] in damp or wet locations.




Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.B.

Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.C.

INSTALLATION3.2

Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2A.except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.B.Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.C.

Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for ElectricalD.Systems."

Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.E.

Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends in any conduit run except forF.communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwiseG.indicated.

Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: ApplyH.listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compoundmanufacturer's written instructions.

Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushingsI.to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with notJ.less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic andK.nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:

3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.1.1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.2.Install with a maximum of four 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway3.unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxesor terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with theserequirements.

Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them withL.




listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with ablank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install racewaysealing fittings at the following points:

Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated1.spaces.Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.2.

Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed andM.semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, ormovement; and for transformers and motors.

Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.1.Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.2.

Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonryN.block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

PROTECTION3.3

Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets areA.without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by1.manufacturer.Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by2.manufacturer.





SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.1.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,A.transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensionsand manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,and finishes.

Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.B.

Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of1.installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.2.Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.3.Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.4.Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.5.Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent6.protective devices and auxiliary components.Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.7.

Field Quality-Control Reports:C.

Test procedures used.1.Test results that comply with requirements.2.Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with3.requirements.

Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.D.

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1



Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,E.operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

Manufacturer's written instructions for testing overcurrent protective devices.1.


Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.A.

Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site1.testing.

Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, andB.accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions forC.panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,D.by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

Comply with NEMA PB 1.E.

Comply with NFPA 70.F.


Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporaryA.electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to [NECA 407] [NEMA PB 1].B.


Environmental Limitations:A.

Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work1.in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporaryHVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditionsat occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise2.indicated:




Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding [minus 22 deg F] [23 deg F] to plus 104 dega.F.Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.b.

Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:B.

Ambient temperatures within limits specified.1.Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.2.

Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupiedC.by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only afterarranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

Notify [Architect] [Construction Manager] [Owner] no fewer than [two] <Insert1.number> days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without [Architect's] [Construction2.Manager's] [Owner's] written permission.Comply with NFPA 70E.3.

COORDINATION1.7

Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction thatA.penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doorsand panels.

Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-B.bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified inDivision 03.

WARRANTY1.8

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orA.replace devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


EXTRA MATERIALS1.9


Keys: [Two] <Insert number> spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.1.




PRODUCTSPART 2 -

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS2.1

Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.A.

Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.1.

Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, [Type 1] <Insert type>.a.Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, [Type 3R] <Insert type>.b.

Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match2.box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within3.hinged trim cover.Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with4.flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.Finishes:5.

Panels and Trim: [Steel] [and] [galvanized steel], factory finished immediatelya.after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-onfinish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.Back Boxes: [Galvanized steel] [Same finish as panels and trim].b.

Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in [transparent card holder] [metal6.frame with transparent protective cover].

Incoming Mains Location: [Top] [Bottom] [Top and bottom].B.

Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:C.

Material: [Tin-plated aluminum] [Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity].1.Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding2.conductors; bonded to box.

Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.D.

Material: [Tin-plated aluminum] [Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity].1.Main and Neutral Lugs: [Compression] [Mechanical] type.2.Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: [Compression] [Mechanical] type.3.

Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or loadE.centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral orF.




remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and typeof allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuitrating by an NRTL.

Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuitG.current available at terminals.

LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS2.2

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offeringA.products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.1.General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.2.Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.3.Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.4.

Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.C.

Mains: [Circuit breaker] [or] [lugs only].D.

Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable withoutE.disturbing adjacent units.

Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.F.

DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES2.3

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offeringA.products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide InsertB.manufacturer's name; product name or designation or comparable product by one of thefollowing:

Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.1.General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.2.Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.3.Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.4.

Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with [series-connected rating]C.[interrupting capacity] to meet available fault currents.




Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level1.overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustablemagnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-2.V, single-pole configuration, combination type.Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:3.

Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.a.Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductorb.materials.Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switchingc.fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensitydischarge (HID) lighting circuits.Ground-Fault Protection: [Integrally mounted] [Remote-mounted] relay and tripd.unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, andground-fault indicator.Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as ae.single unit.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to [NECA 407] [NEMA PB 1.1].A.

Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted orB.have been subjected to water saturation.

Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installationC.tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


INSTALLATION3.2

Install panelboards and accessories according to [NECA 407] [NEMA PB 1.1].A.

Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets andB.temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "VibrationC.and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

Mount top of trim [90 inches] <Insert height> above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.D.




Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessedE.panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.F.

Install filler plates in unused spaces.G.

Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or spaceH.designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floorspace or below slab not on grade.

Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.I.

Comply with NECA 1.J.

IDENTIFICATION3.3

Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warningA.signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final roomB.designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to createdirectory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirementsC.for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with aD.nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systems."




Acceptance Testing Preparation:B.

Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,1.and control circuit.Test continuity of each circuit.2.





Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA1.Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate2.compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:3.

Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 daysa.after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove frontpanels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan ofb.each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.Instruments and Equipment:c.

Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to1)detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration recordfor device.

Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.D.

Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboardsE.included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

ADJUSTING3.5

Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate asA.recommended by manufacturer.

PROTECTION3.6

Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according toA.manufacturer's written instructions.





SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2


Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.1.Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.2.Communications outlets.3.


Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets.1.

DEFINITIONS1.3

EMI: Electromagnetic interference.A.

GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.B.

Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.C.

UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.D.

SUBMITTALS1.4


Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarkingB.wall plates.


Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through oneA.

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1



source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices andassociated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,B.Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.

Comply with NFPA 70.C.

COORDINATION1.6

Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. Coordinate withA.Owner for configuration of actual equipment furnished.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1

Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the followingA.manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).1.Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).2.Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).3.Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).4.<Insert manufacturer's name.>5.

STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES2.2

Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6A.configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.


Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).a.Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).b.Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).c.Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).d.<Insert manufacturer's name; catalog numbers.>e.

GFCI RECEPTACLES2.3




General Description: Straight blade, [feed] [non-feed]-through type. Comply with NEMA WDA.1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted whendevice is tripped.

Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:B.


Cooper; GF20.a.Pass & Seymour; 2084.b.<Insert manufacturer's name; catalog number.>c.

SNAP SWITCHES2.4

Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.A.

Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:B.


Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).a.Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224b.(four way).Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (fourc.way).Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),d.20AC4 (four way).<Insert manufacturer's name; catalog numbers.>e.

COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS2.5

Telephone Outlet:A.


Cooper; 3560-6.a.Leviton; 40649.b.<Insert manufacturer's name; catalog number.>c.




Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP;3.TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.

Combination TV and Telephone Outlet:B.


Cooper; 3562.a.Leviton; 40595.b.<Insert manufacturer's name; catalog number.>c.

Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-3.B.1; complying with Category 5e; and one Type F coaxial cable connector.

WALL PLATES2.6

Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.A.

Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.1.Material for Finished Spaces: [Steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field painting]2.[Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic] [0.035-inch- thick, satin-finished stainless steel][0.04-inch- thick, brushed brass with factory polymer finish] [0.05-inch- thick anodizedaluminum] [0.04-inch- thick steel with chrome-plated finish].

FINISHES2.7

Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.A.

Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless1.otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwiseA.noted.

Coordination with Other Trades:B.

Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish1.




materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided byriding against outside of the boxes.Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,2.paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, andcables.Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint3.unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.4.

Conductors:C.

Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on1.devices.Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid2.scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,3.Article 300, without pigtails.Existing Conductors:4.

Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.a.Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.b.Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.c.

Device Installation:D.

Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show1.signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect2.conductors.Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last3.possible moment.Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.4.When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid5.conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.6.When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice7.No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.8.When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device9.mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

Receptacle Orientation:E.

Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles [up] [down], and on horizontally1.mounted receptacles to the [right] [left].

Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remountF.outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.




Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimensionG.vertical. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

IDENTIFICATION3.2

Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."A.



Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.1.

Tests for Convenience Receptacles:B.

Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.1.Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.2.Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.3.GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.4.Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.5.The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit6.breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similarproblems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with newones, and retest as specified above.





SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.1.Emergency lighting units.2.Lighting fixture supports.3.

Related Sections:B.

Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent1.lamps.

DEFINITIONS1.3

BF: Ballast factor.A.

CCT: Correlated color temperature.B.

CRI: Color-rendering index.C.

LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.D.

Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.E.

Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.F.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.A.Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.1.

INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1



Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.2.Ballast, including BF.3.Energy-efficiency data.4.Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.5.Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with6.IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixturetype. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical tothose indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall bea.certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remainingfixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by ab.manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National VoluntaryLaboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations,B.sections, details, and attachments to other work.

Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required1.clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each fieldconnection.Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.2.

Installation instructions.C.

Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on whichD.the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers ofthe items involved:

Lighting fixtures.1.Suspended ceiling components.2.Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the3.plane of the luminaires.Ceiling-mounted projectors.4.Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached.5.Other items in finished ceiling including the following:6.

Air outlets and inlets.a.Speakers.b.Sprinklers.c.Smoke and fire detectors.d.Occupancy sensors.e.Access panels.f.<Insert item>.g.

Perimeter moldings.7.




Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency,E.operation, and maintenance manuals.

Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.1.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.F.

COORDINATION1.5

Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with otherA.construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

WARRANTY1.6

Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in whichA.manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replacecomponents of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specifiedwarranty period.

Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: [10] <Insert number> years1.from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, andprorated warranty for the remaining nine years.Warranty Period for [Emergency Fluorescent Ballast] [and] [Self-Powered Exit Sign]2.Batteries: [Seven] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. Fullwarranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

EXTRA MATERIALS1.7


Lamps: [10 for every 100] <Insert quantity> of each type and rating installed. Furnish1.at least one of each type.Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: [One for every 100] <Insert quantity> of each type and2.rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.Fluorescent-fixture-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every [20] [50] <Insert3.number> emergency lighting unit.Ballasts: [One for every 100] <Insert quantity> of each type and rating installed.4.Furnish at least one of each type.Globes and Guards: [One for every 20] <Insert quantity> of each type and rating5.installed. Furnish at least one of each type.




PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide product indicated onA.Drawings] [provide one of the products indicated on Drawings] [available products thatmay be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicatedon Drawings].

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS2.2

Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.A.

Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according toB.NEMA LE 5A.

Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according toC.NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.D.

Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to preventE.warping and sagging.

Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage underF.operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed toprevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally duringrelamping and when secured in operating position.

Diffusers and Globes:G.

Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to1.yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

Lens Thickness: At least [0.125 inch] <Insert dimension> minimum unlessa.otherwise indicated.UV stabilized.b.

Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.2.

Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts.H.Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seenfrom normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.




Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:1.

"USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.a.Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,b.triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compactfluorescent luminaires.Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compactc.fluorescent luminaires.CCT and CRI for all luminaires.d.

BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS2.3

Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and withA.ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed forfull light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.1.Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.2.Sound Rating: Class A.3.Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.4.Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.5.Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.6.Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.7.BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.8.Power Factor: [0.95] [0.98][, except fixtures designated as "Residential" may use9.low-power-factor electronic ballasts] or higher.Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on10.electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.

EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT2.4

Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lightingA.fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.

Emergency Connection: Operate [one] <Insert number> fluorescent lamp(s)1.continuously at an output of [1100] <Insert value> lumens each. Connect unswitchedcircuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or2.entering ceiling space.

Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal powera.and demonstrates unit operability.Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickleb.charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.




Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.3.Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer4.relay.

EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS2.5

General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying withA.UL 924.

Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type.1.Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.2.Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops3.to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from batterywhen voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relaydisconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated oncharger.Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and4.demonstrates unit operability.LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;5.bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of [15] <Insert period>6.minutes when power is restored after an outage.

FLUORESCENT LAMPS2.6

T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumensA.(minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature [3500] <Insert value> K, and average ratedlife 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumensB.(minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature [3500] <Insert value> K, and average ratedlife of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature [3500] <InsertC.value> K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start[, and suitable foruse with dimming ballasts] unless otherwise indicated.

13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).1.18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).2.26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).3.32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).4.42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).5.57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).6.70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).7.




LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS2.7

Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel-A.and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Lighting fixtures:A.

Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.1.Install lamps in each luminaire.2.

Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.B.

Install ceiling support system rods or wires[, independent of the ceiling suspension1.devices,] for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each2.fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans3.or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting4.fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safetyfactor of 3.

Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power ConductorsC.and Cables."

IDENTIFICATION3.2

Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. ComplyA.with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification forElectrical Systems."


Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. VerifyA.transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating andB.




interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstratecompliance with standards.

STARTUP SERVICE3.4

Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy byA.Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least100 hours at full voltage.





SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts.1.Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.2.

DEFINITIONS1.3

CCT: Correlated color temperature.A.

CRI: Color-rendering index.B.

HID: High-intensity discharge.C.

LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.D.

Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.E.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Product Data: For each luminaire, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include dataA.on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, and verification of1.indicated parameters.Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.2.Details of installation and construction.3.Luminaire materials.4.Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with5.indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall bea.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 1



certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remainingluminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer'sb.laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary LaboratoryAccreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

Photoelectric relays.6.Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data.7.Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data.8.Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.9.Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for10.components involved.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in emergency, operation, andB.maintenance manuals.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.C.


Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers'A.laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Programfor Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independentB.agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL asdefined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.


Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."D.

Comply with NFPA 70.E.

WARRANTY1.6

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orA.replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain,perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warrantyperiod. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, orunauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.

Warranty Period for Luminaires: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial1.Completion.Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of2.




Substantial Completion.Warranty Period for Color Retention: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of3.Substantial Completion.Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in4.finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, butnot less than [three] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.

EXTRA MATERIALS1.7


Lamps: [One for every 100] <Insert quantity> of each type and rating installed. Furnish1.at least one of each type.Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: [One for every 100] <Insert2.quantity> of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.Ballasts: [One for every 100] <Insert quantity> of each type and rating installed. Furnish3.at least one of each type.Globes and Guards: [One for every 20] <Insert quantity> of each type and rating4.installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide product indicated onA.Drawings] [provide one of the products indicated on Drawings] [available products thatmay be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicatedon Drawings].

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES2.2

Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wetA.locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

LER Tests Incandescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE1.5A.LER Tests Fluorescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 52.and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral lightB.distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.C.




Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form andD.support to prevent warping and sagging.

Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, orE.deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage underF.operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed toprevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally duringrelamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning orreplacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.G.

Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat,H.and UV radiation.

Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block lightI.distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:J.

White Surfaces: 85 percent.1.Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.2.Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.3.

Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal andK.cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -testedL.luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or supportmaterials.

Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts.M.Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seenfrom normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:1.

"USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type.a.Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple),b.base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescentc.luminaires.CCT and CRI for all luminaires.d.




LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS2.3

Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.A.

Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the 1-minute on position,B.and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 1-minute minimumtime delay.[ Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial lightsources from causing false turnoff.]

Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with ANSI C136.10.1.Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.2.

FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS2.4

Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:A.

Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and1.operating temperature with indicated lamp types.Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with2.indicated lamp types.

Ballast Characteristics:B.

Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.1.Sound Rating: [Class A] [Class A except Class B for T12/HO ballasts].2.Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.3.Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor,4.Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection.Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum.5.Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2,6.Category A or better.

Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballastC.provided at temperatures [0 deg F] [minus 20 deg F] and higher.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION3.1

Install lamps in each luminaire.A.

Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.B.




Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the1.application and approved by manufacturer.

Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.[ Include adjustment ofC.photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoringa north orientation.]

CORROSION PREVENTION3.2

Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with aA.dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for ElectricalB.Systems."


Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.A.

Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminairesB.and energizing circuits with normal power source.

Verify operation of photoelectric controls.1.

Illumination Tests:C.

Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST1.standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):

IESNA LM-5, "Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lightinga.Installations."IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."b.

Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating andD.interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstratecompliance with standards.





SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

UTP cabling.1.Coaxial cable.2.Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies.3.Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.4.Telecommunications outlet/connectors.5.Cabling system identification products.6.Cable management system.7.

DEFINITIONS1.3

BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.A.

Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnectionB.or cross-connection.

EMI: Electromagnetic interference.C.

IDC: Insulation displacement connector.D.

LAN: Local area network.E.

MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of severalF.telecommunications outlet/connectors.

Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outletG.cable terminates.

RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.H.

UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.I.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 1



HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION1.4

Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signalsA.between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located inthe communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called"permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.

TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors1.be installed for each work area.Horizontal cabling shall contain no more that one transition point or consolidation point2.between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector.Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.3.Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.4.

A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from theB.telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment.

The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable lengthC.does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment. Themaximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet in thehorizontal cross-connect.


General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards inA.TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

SUBMITTALS1.6


For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:1.

Nominal OD.a.Minimum bending radius.b.Maximum pulling tension.c.

Shop Drawings:B.

System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and1.format selected by Owner.System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the2.cabling and asset identification system of the software.Cabling administration drawings and printouts.3.




Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:4.

Cross-connects.a.Patch panels.b.Patch cords.c.

Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and5.physical relationship between the installed components.

Qualification Data: For [Installer, ]qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and fieldC.inspector.

Source quality-control reports.D.

Field quality-control reports.E.


Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.A.

Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings[ and Cabling Administration1.Drawings][, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing programdevelopment] by an RCDD.Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of [Registered2.Technician] [Level 2 Installer], who shall be present at all times when Work of thisSection is performed at Project site.Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site3.testing.

Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according toB.ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings ofapplicable testing agency.

Flame-Spread Index: [25] <Insert value> or less.1.Smoke-Developed Index: [50] [450] <Insert value> or less.2.


Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.D.

Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.E.


Test cables upon receipt at Project site.A.




Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.1.


Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wetA.work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintainingambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of theconstruction period.

COORDINATION1.10

Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner'sA.telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles atB.each work area.

EXTRA MATERIALS1.11


Patch-Panel Units: [One] <Insert number> of each type.1.Connecting Blocks: [One] <Insert number> of each type.2.Device Plates: [One] <Insert number> of each type.3.Multiuser Telecommunications Outlet Assemblies: [One] <Insert number> of each type.4.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PATHWAYS2.1

General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.A.

Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to preventB.degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.

Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.1.Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.2.Straps and other devices.3.

Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and BoxesC.for Electrical Systems."[ Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.]




Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.1.

UTP CABLE2.2

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of theA.following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into theWork include, but are not limited to, the following]:

Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division.1.Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.2.CommScope, Inc.3.Draka USA.4.Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.5.KRONE Incorporated.6.Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT.7.Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.8.Superior Essex Inc.9.SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.10.3M.11.Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.12.<Insert manufacturer's name>.13.

Description: 100-ohm, 4-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair, binder groups covered with a blueB.thermoplastic jacket.

Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.1.Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.2.Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6.3.Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as4.complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG[; or MPP, CMP, MPR,a.CMR, MP, or MPG].Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP[ or MPP], complying withb.NFPA 262.Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG[; or MPP or MPR].c.Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262.d.

UTP CABLE HARDWARE2.3


American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.1.




Dynacom Corporation.2.Hubbell Premise Wiring.3.KRONE Incorporated.4.Leviton Voice & Data Division.5.Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.6.Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.7.Panduit Corp.8.Siemon Co. (The).9.Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.10.<Insert manufacturer's name>.11.

General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDCB.type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated withconnecting hardware of same category or higher.

Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units withC.integral IDC-type terminals.

Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in [36-inch] [48-inch] <Insert length> lengths;D.terminated with eight-position modular plug at each end.

Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure1.Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.2.

COAXIAL CABLE2.4


Alpha Wire Company.1.Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division.2.Coleman Cable, Inc.3.CommScope, Inc.4.Draka USA.5.<Insert manufacturer's name>.6.

Cable Characteristics: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically forB.broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohmnominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.

RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.C.

No. [14] <Insert size> AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor.1.Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.2.Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent aluminum3.




braid.Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE.4.Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus5.85 deg C.

RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATVR.D.

No. [20] <Insert size> AWG, solid, silver-plated, copper-covered steel conductor.1.Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.2.Triple shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 95 percent aluminum3.braid; covered by aluminum foil with grounding strip.Color-coded PVC jacket.4.

RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.E.

No. [16] <Insert size> AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-1.PE insulation.Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid.2.Jacketed with black PVC or PE.3.Suitable for indoor installations.4.

RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.F.

No. [20] <Insert size> AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-1.PE insulation.Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 40 percent aluminum2.braid.PVC jacket.3.

RG59/U (Plenum Rated): NFPA 70, Type CMP.G.

No. [20] <Insert size> AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; foam fluorinated1.ethylene propylene insulation.Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 65 percent aluminum braid.2.Copolymer jacket.3.

NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities havingH.jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70 "Radio and Television Equipment"and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows:

CATV Cable: Type CATV[, or CATVP or CATVR].1.CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262.2.CATV Riser Rated: Type CATVR[; or CATVP, CATVR, or CATV], complying with3.UL 1666.CATV Limited Rating: Type CATVX.4.

COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE2.5





Aim Electronics; a brand of Emerson Electric Co.1.Leviton Voice & Data Division.2.Siemon Co. (The).3.<Insert manufacturer's name>.4.

Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.B.

MULTIUSER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY (MUTOA)2.6


Chatsworth Products, Inc.1.Hubbell Premise Wiring.2.Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.3.Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.4.Ortronics, Inc.5.Panduit Corp.6.Siemon Co. (The).7.<Insert manufacturer's name>.8.

Description: MUTOAs shall meet the requirements for cable connecting hardware.B.

Number of Terminals per Field: [One] <Insert number> for each conductor in assigned1.cables.Number of Connectors per Field:2.

[One] <Insert number> for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.a.[One] <Insert number> for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables,b.plus [25] <Insert number> percent spare positions.

Mounting: Wall.3.NRTL listed as complying with UL 50 and UL 1863.4.Label shall include maximum length of work area cords, based on TIA/EIA-568-B.1.5.When installed in plenums used for environmental air, NRTL listed as complying with6.UL 2043.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS2.7

Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. ComplyA.




with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

Workstation Outlets: Two -port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate.B.

Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Division 26 Section1."Wiring Devices."For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and2.coaxial work area cords.

Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.a.

Legend: Factory labeled by silk-screening or engraving for plastic faceplates .3.Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.4.

GROUNDING2.8

Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for ElectricalA.Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.B.

IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS2.9

Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks,A.laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."B.


Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.A.

Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.B.

Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall testC.the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whosefrequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.D.


EXECUTIONPART 3 -




WIRING METHODS3.1

Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets,A.desks, and counters[ and except in accessible ceiling spaces, in attics, and in gypsum boardpartitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used]. Conceal raceway and cablesexcept in unfinished spaces.

Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.1.Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section2."Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors whereB.possible.

Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess andC.without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars anddistribution spools.

INSTALLATION OF CABLES3.2

Comply with NECA 1.A.

General Requirements for Cabling:B.

Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.1.Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."2.Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.3.MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point.4.Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations5.only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 306.inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames,and terminals.Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent7.bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's8.limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "CablingTermination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable9.between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damagedduring installation and replace it with new cable.Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat10.lamps shall not be used for heating.In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- long service loop on each end11.of cable.




Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull12.tensions.

UTP Cable Installation:C.

Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.1.Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain2.cable geometry.

Open-Cable Installation:D.

Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces1.with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings2.by cable supports not more than [60 inches] <Insert dimension> apart.Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other3.potentially damaging items.

Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.E.

Separation from EMI Sources:F.

Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice1.and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical powerlines and equipment.Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and2.unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.a.Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.b.Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.c.

Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and3.unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.a.Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.b.Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.c.

Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power4.lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shallbe as follows:

Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.a.Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.b.Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.c.

Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 55.




kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 56.inches.

GROUNDING3.3

Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection"A.Chapter.

Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.B.

Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wallC.allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus barwith a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitableelectrical building ground.

Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWGD.equipment grounding conductor.

IDENTIFICATION3.4

Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. ComplyA.with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification forElectrical Systems."

Administration Class: [1] [2] [3] [4].1.Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards,2.connections, covers, and labels.

Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling AdministrationB.Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumericdesignation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connectswith same designation. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A forC.[Class 2] [Class 3] [Class 4] level of administration[, including optional identificationrequirements of this standard].

Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. ListD.incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect withrigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensiveschedules for Project.

Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-E.point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for horizontal cables, work areas




and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment groundingconductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings,in software and format selected by Owner.

Cable and Wire Identification:F.

Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a1.cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at2.device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered withinpanel or cabinet.Exposed Cables : Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet.3.

Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color thatG.contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A.

Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.1.




Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification1.markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms forcompliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections forcompliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.Visually confirm [Category 5e,] [Category 6,] marking of outlets, cover plates,2.outlet/connectors, and patch panels.Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment3.and patch cords, and labeling of all components.UTP Performance Tests:4.

Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according toa.TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2:

Wire map.1)Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).2)Insertion loss.3)Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.4)Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.5)Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).6)Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).7)Return loss.8)Propagation delay.9)Delay skew.10)




Coaxial Cable Tests: Conduct tests according to Division 27 Section "Master Antenna5.Television System."Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTPsystems after the complete6.communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.

Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connecta.to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listenand receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, longdistance, and digital subscription line telephone call.Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a networkb.installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interfacedevice at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connectionto the network.

Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary reportC.that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument tothe computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.D.






SECTION 274133 - MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

MATV equipment using cable television service as the signal source.1.

Related Sections:B.

Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for coaxial, UTP, and fiber-1.optic cables and connectors.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Agile Receiver: A broadband receiver that can be tuned to any desired channel.A.

A/V: Audio/Visual.B.

Broadband: For the purposes of this Section, wide bandwidth equipment or systems that canC.carry signals occupying in the frequency range of 54 to 1002 MHz. A broadbandcommunication system can simultaneously accommodate television, voice, data, and manyother services.

Carrier: A pure-frequency signal that is modulated to carry information. In the process ofD.modulation, the signal is spread out over a wider band. The carrier frequency is the centerfrequency on any television channel.

CATV: Community antenna television. A communication system that simultaneouslyE.distributes several different channels of broadcast programs and other information to customersvia a coaxial cable.

CCTV: Closed-circuit television.F.

CEA: Consumer Electronics Association.G.

MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM 274133 - 1



dBmV: Decibels relative to 1 mV across 75 ohms. Zero dBmV is defined as 1 mV across 75H.ohms. dBmV = 20 log 10(V1/V2) where V1 is the measurement of voltage at a point havingidentical impedance to V2 (0.001 V across 75 ohms).

Headend: The control center of the MATV system, where incoming signals are amplified,I.converted, processed, and combined into a common cable along with any locally originatedtelevision signals, for transmission to user-interface points. It is also called the "centralretransmission facility."

I/O: Input/Output.J.

MATV: Master antenna television. A small television antenna distribution system usuallyK.restricted to one or two buildings.

RF: Radio frequency.L.

User Interface: End point of Contractor's responsibility for Work of this Section. UserM.interfaces are the [terminal blocks to which the end user may connect coaxial cabling] [75-ohm terminals on device plates] <Define user-interface points>.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION1.4

System shall consist of cable television service and a coaxial cable distribution system.A.

Distribution of cable television service signals, which includes coordinating with Owner's1.selected service provider for installation of cable to the service point ready for connectioninto the distribution system. Obtain signal levels and noise and distortion characteristicsfrom service provider as the point of departure for system layout and final equipmentselection.Cable distribution system consisting of coaxial cables, user interfaces, signal taps and2.splitters, RF amplifiers, signal equalizers, power supplies, and required hardware,complying with CEA-310-E and CEA-2032 and resulting in performance parametersspecified in this Section. System shall be capable of distributing television channelsaccording to CEA-542-B.


Minimum acceptable performance of distribution system at all user-interface points shall be asA.follows:

RF Video-Carrier Level: Between 3 and 12 dBmV.1.Relative Video-Carrier Level: Within 3 dB to adjacent channel.2.Carrier Level Stability, Short Term: Level shall not change more than 0.5 dB during a3.60-minute period.Carrier Level Stability, Long Term: Level shall not change more than 2 dB during a 24-4.




hour period.Channel Frequency Response: Across any 6-MHz channel in the 54- to 220-MHz5.frequency range, referenced to video; signal amplitude shall be plus or minus 1 dB,maximum.Carrier-to-Noise Ratio: 45 dB or more.6.RF Visual Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 43 dB or more.7.Antenna Combiner Insertion Loss: 40 dB maximum.8.Signal Power Splitter and Isolation Tap Return Loss: 17 dB maximum.9.Cable Connectors Attenuation: Less than 0.1 dB.10.Cross Modulation: Less than minus 50 dB.11.Carrier-to-Echo Ratio: More than 40 dB.12.Composite Triple Beat: Less than minus 53 dB.13.Second Order Beat: Less than minus 60 dB.14.Terminal Isolation from Television to Television: 25 dB, minimum.15.Terminal Isolation between Television and FM: 35 dB, minimum.16.Hum Modulation: 2 percent, maximum.17.

SUBMITTALS1.6


Shop Drawings: For distribution system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, andB.attachments to other work.

Show fabrication and installation details for television equipment.1.Functional Block Diagram: Show single-line interconnections between components for2.distribution system to user-interface points. Show cable types and sizes.Dimensioned Plan and Elevations of Headend Equipment: Show access and workspace3.requirements.Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. For UTP or fiber-optic cable,4.include cross connects, patch panels, and patch cords.

Design Calculations: Calculate signal attenuation budget and show calculated line andC.equipment losses for the system based on the functional block diagram, to show that proposedsystem layout can be expected to perform up to specification. Calculate signal strength fromsources to headend input points for each antenna, satellite dish, and CATV grouping.Allowable losses between components and user interface shall be used to determine size andtype of coaxial cable.

Coordination Drawings: Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components andD.enclosures. Show access and workspace requirements.

Equipment List: Include each piece of equipment and include model number, manufacturer,E.serial number, location, and date of original installation. Insert testing record of each piece ofadjustable equipment, listing name of person testing, date of test, and description of as-left setpoints.




Operation and Maintenance Data: For distribution system to include in emergency, operation,F.and maintenance manuals.


Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,A.by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


Environmental Limitations: System components shall be equipped and rated for theA.environments in which they are installed.

Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditionsB.without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except central-station control1.unit, installed in [air-conditioned] [temperature-controlled] interior environments shallbe rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of [36 to 122 deg F] <Inserttemperature range> dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non-[air-2.conditioned] [temperature-controlled] interior environments shall be rated forcontinuous operation in ambient conditions of [0 to 122 deg F] <Insert temperaturerange> dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

COORDINATION1.9

Coordinate size and location of raceway system and provisions for electrical power toA.equipment specified in this Section.

Coordinate Work of this Section with requirements of cable television service provider.B.

EXTRA MATERIALS1.10

Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protectiveA.covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Provide no fewer than oneof each item listed below. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

Splitters: One for every [10] <Insert number> installed.1.Cable: 100 feet of each type used.2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -




DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS2.1

User-Interface Device: Flush, female-type outlets, designed to mimic power duplex outlet; forA.mounting in standard outlet box; with metallic parts of anodized brass, beryllium copper, orphosphor bronze. Cable connector mounting shall be semirecessed so its protrusion is flushwith the plane of device plate.[ Feed-through-type cable connection shall not be used] [exceptin area housing a single tenant] [except within a single-dwelling unit].


Canare Corp.a.Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Leviton Voice & Data Division.b.Motorola, Inc.; Connected Home Solutions.c.Quality RF Services, Inc.; a member company of ATX Networks.d.Scientific-Atlanta, Inc.; a subsidiary of Cisco Systems, Inc.e.<Insert manufacturer's name>.f.

Cable Connector: Female, Type F.3.Wall Plates: Match materials and finish of power outlets in same space.4.Attenuation: Less than 0.1 dB.5.Voltage Standing-Wave Ratio: Less than 1.15 to 1.6.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine roughing-in to verify actual locations of cable connections before installation.A.


IDENTIFICATION3.2

Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements forA.identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."






Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, andB.that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.


Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that they1.comply with specified requirements.Replace malfunctioning or damaged items.2.Retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved.3.Prepare television equipment for acceptance and operational testing.4.Use an agile receiver and signal strength meter or spectrum analyzer for testing.5.CCTV Sources: Connect receiver to the output of each CCTV signal source or the6.distribution amplifier associated with it.Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has successfully been completed and7.system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimumof 10 days' notice of test schedule.Operational Tests: Perform tests of operational system to verify that system complies8.with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for properoperation in all functional modes.Distribution System Acceptance Tests:9.

Field-Strength Instrument: Rated for minus 40-dBmV measuring sensitivity and aa.frequency range of 54 to 812 MHz, minimum. Provide documentation of recentcalibration against recognized standards.Signal Level and Picture Quality: Use a field-strength meter or spectrum analyzer,b.and a standard television receiver to measure signal levels and check picture qualityat [all] [25 percent of] <Insert number or percentage> user-interface outlets.

Test the signal strength in dBmV at 55[, 151, 547,] and 750 MHz.1)Minimum acceptable signal level is 0 dBmV (1000 mV).2)Maximum acceptable signal level over the entire bandwidth is 15 dBmV.3)Television receiver shall show no evidence of cross-channel4)intermodulation, ghost images, or beat interference.

Signal-to-Noise-Ratio Test: Use a field-strength meter to make a sequence of10.measurements at the output of the last distribution amplifier or of another agreed-onlocation in system. With system operating at normal levels, tune meter to the picturecarrier frequency of each of the designated channels in turn and record the level. Withsignal removed and input to corresponding headend amplifier terminated at 75 ohms,measure the level of noise at same tuning settings. With meter correction factor added tolast readings, differences from first set must not be less than 45 dB.Qualitative and Quantitative Performance Tests: Demonstrate reception quality of color-11.television program transmissions at each user interface from each designated channel andsource. Quality shall be equal to or superior than that obtained with performance checks




specified below, using a standard, commercial, cable-ready, color-television receiver.Level and quality of signal at each outlet and from each service and source shall complywith the following Specifications when tested according to 47 CFR 76:

RF video-carrier level.a.Relative video-carrier level.b.Carrier level stability, during 60-minute and 24-hour periods.c.Broadband frequency response.d.Channel frequency response.e.Carrier-to-noise ratio.f.RF visual signal-to-noise ratio.g.Antenna combiner insertion loss.h.Signal power splitter loss.i.Cable connector attenuation.j.Cross modulation.k.Carrier-to-echo ratio.l.Composite triple beat.m.Second order beat.n.Terminal isolation.o.Terminal isolation between television and FM.p.Hum modulation.q.

Distribution system will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.D.


Cap all unused connectors and seal weathertight.F.





SECTION 275116 - PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Loudspeakers.1.Conductors and cables.2.

DEFINITIONS1.3

VU: Volume unit.A.


Delegated Design: Design supports and seismic restraints for control consoles, equipmentA.cabinets and racks, and components, including comprehensive engineering analysis by aqualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

SUBMITTALS1.5


Shop Drawings: For supports and seismic restraints for control consoles, equipment cabinetsB.and racks, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments toother work.

Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances,1.method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.Control panels.2.Calculations: For sizing backup battery.3.Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.4.

Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.a.

PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 - 1



Single-line diagram showing interconnection of components.b.Cabling diagram showing cable routing.c.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For supports and seismic restraints for control consoles,C.equipment cabinets and racks, and components indicated to comply with performancerequirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualifiedprofessional engineer responsible for their preparation.

Detail fabrication and assembly of supports and seismic restraints for control consoles,1.equipment cabinets and racks, and components.

Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mountedD.items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, andspecial moldings are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of theitems involved.


Operation and Maintenance Data: For public address and mass notification systems to includeF.in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


Source Limitations: Obtain public address and mass notification systems from single sourceA.from single manufacturer.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,B.by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

Comply with NFPA 70.C.

COORDINATION1.7

Coordinate layout and installation of system components and suspension system with otherA.construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVACequipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1





Altec Lansing Technologies, Inc.1.Federal Signal Corporation; Electrical Products Division.2.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM2.2

System Functions:A.

Selectively connect any zone to any available signal channel.1.Selectively control sound from microphone outlets and other inputs.2."All-call" feature shall connect the all-call sound signal simultaneously to all zones3.regardless of zone or channel switch settings.Produce a program-signal tone that is amplified and sounded over all speakers, overriding4.signals currently being distributed.Reproduce high-quality sound that is free of noise and distortion at all loudspeakers at all5.times during equipment operation including standby mode with inputs off; output free ofnonuniform coverage of amplified sound.

GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS2.3

Compatibility of Components: Coordinate component features to form an integrated system.A.Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

Equipment: Comply with UL 813. Equipment shall be modular, using solid-state components,B.and fully rated for continuous duty unless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normaloperation on input power usually supplied at 110 to 130 V, 60 Hz.

Weather-Resistant Equipment: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for dutyC.outdoors or in damp locations.

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES2.4

Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multipair, untinned solid copper.A.

Insulation for Wire in Conduit: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch thick.1.Microphone Cables: Neoprene jacketed, not less than 2/64 inch thick, over shield with2.filled interstices. Shield No. 34 AWG, tinned, soft-copper strands formed into a braid orapproved equivalent foil. Shielding coverage on conductors is not less than 60 percent.Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.3.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

WIRING METHODS3.1




Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors whereA.possible.

Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess andB.without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars anddistribution spools.

INSTALLATION OF CABLES3.2

Comply with NECA 1.A.

General Cable Installation Requirements:B.

Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations1.only at outlets and terminals.Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull,2.and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Cables may not bespliced.Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 63.inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's4.limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable5.between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damagedduring installation and replace it with new cable.Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat6.lamps shall not be used.

Open-Cable Installation:C.

Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces1.with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.Suspend speaker cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceiling2.by cable supports not more than [60 inches] <Insert dimension> apart.Cable shall not be run through structural members or be in contact with pipes, ducts, or3.other potentially damaging items.

Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power wiringD.runs. Install in separate raceways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, separate conductorsat least 12 inches apart for speaker microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephonewiring. Separate other intercommunication equipment conductors as recommended byequipment manufacturer.

INSTALLATION3.3




Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matchingA.networks where required.

Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and cableB.marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination with systemwiring diagrams.

Volume Limiter/Compressor: Equip each zone with a volume limiter/compressor. Install inC.central equipment cabinet. Arrange to provide a constant input to power amplifiers.

Wall-Mounted Outlets: Flush mounted.D.

Floor-Mounted Outlets: Conceal in floor and install cable nozzles through outlet covers.E.Secure outlet covers in place. Trim with carpet in carpeted areas.

Conductor Sizing: Unless otherwise indicated, size speaker circuit conductors from racks toF.loudspeaker outlets not smaller than No. 18 AWG and conductors from microphone receptaclesto amplifiers not smaller than No. 22 AWG.

Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or whereG.exposed to weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.

Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial connections using tap settingsH.indicated on Drawings.

Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power ConductorsI.and Cables."

GROUNDING3.4

Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops,A.common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system andB.equipment grounding.

Install grounding electrodes as specified in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding forC.Electrical Systems."







Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test performance.1.After installing public address and mass notification systems and after electrical circuitry2.has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.Operational Test: Perform tests that include originating program and page messages at3.microphone outlets, preamplifier program inputs, and other inputs. Verify proper routingand volume levels and that system is free of noise and distortion.Signal-to-Noise Ratio Test: Measure signal-to-noise ratio of complete system at normal4.gain settings as follows:

Disconnect microphone at connector or jack closest to it and replace it in the circuita.with a signal generator using a 1000-Hz signal. Replace all other microphones atcorresponding connectors with dummy loads, each equal in impedance tomicrophone it replaces. Measure signal-to-noise ratio.Repeat test for each separately controlled zone of loudspeakers.b.Minimum acceptance ratio is 50 dB.c.

Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated power. Feed5.signals at frequencies of 50, 200, 400, 1000, 3000, 8000, and 12,000 Hz into eachpreamplifier channel. For each frequency, measure distortion in the paging and all-callamplifier outputs. Maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is 3 percent totalharmonics.Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into system using octaves centered at 500 and6.4000 Hz. Use sound-level meter with octave-band filters to measure level at fivelocations in each zone. For spaces with seated audiences, maximum permissiblevariation in level is plus or minus 2 dB. In addition, the levels between locations in samezone and between locations in adjacent zones must not vary more than plus or minus 3dB.Power Output Test: Measure electrical power output of each power amplifier at normal7.gain settings of 50, 1000, and 12,000 Hz. Maximum variation in power output at thesefrequencies must not exceed plus or minus 1 dB.Signal Ground Test: Measure and report ground resistance at pubic address equipment8.signal ground. Comply with testing requirements specified in Division 26 Section"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires andC.terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging speaker-line matchingtransformers.

Public address and mass notification systems will be considered defective if they do not passD.tests and inspections.


Include a record of final speaker-line matching transformer-tap settings, and signal1.ground-resistance measurement certified by Installer.




STARTUP SERVICE3.6

[Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform] [Perform] startup service.A.

Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and1.installation requirements.Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.2.

ADJUSTING3.7

On-Site Assistance: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide on-siteA.assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting transformer taps, and adjusting controls to meetoccupancy conditions.

Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within [12] <Insert number> months of date ofB.Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupiedconditions. Provide up to [two] <Insert number> visits to Project during other-than-normaloccupancy hours for this purpose.

DEMONSTRATION3.8

[Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train] [Train] Owner's maintenanceA.personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the public address and mass notification systems andequipment.





SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Fire-alarm control unit.1.System smoke detectors.2.Notification appliances.3.

DEFINITIONS1.3

LED: Light-emitting diode.A.

NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.B.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION1.4

Noncoded, [UL-certified] [FMG-placarded] addressable system, with multiplexed signalA.transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

Noncoded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors andB.multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

SUBMITTALS1.5

General Submittal Requirements:A.

Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them1.to Architect.Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:2.

Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.a.NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, [Level III] [Level IV] minimum.b.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1



Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.c.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B.

Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, andC.attachments to other work.

Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of1.Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.2.Include battery-size calculations.3.Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that4.each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humiditypossible when air-handling system is operating.Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,5.drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them.Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detectorhousing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according tomanufacturer's written recommendations.Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding6.schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable7.device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply withD.performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by thequalified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and1.installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector.Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of2.detection, complying with NFPA 72.


Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include inF.emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"1.Chapter in NFPA 72.Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent2.Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.Record copy of site-specific software.3.Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of4.the same name and include the following:

Frequency of testing of installed components.a.




Frequency of inspection of installed components.b.Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.c.Manufacturer's user training manuals.d.

Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.5.Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.6.Copy of NFPA 25.7.

Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:G.

Software operating and upgrade manuals.1.Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data2.files.Device address list.3.Printout of software application and graphic screens.4.


Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer forA.installation of units required for this Project.

Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarmB.[Level II] [Level III] [Level IV] technician.

Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system fromC.single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as,an extension of existing system.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,D.by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL.E.

NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.F.

NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 in the form of a placard by anG.FMG-approved alarm company.

NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by <Insert certificationH.agency>.


Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilitiesA.occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then onlyafter arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:




Notify [Architect] [Construction Manager] [Owner] no fewer than [two] <Insert1.number> days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service.Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without [Architect's]2.[Construction Manager's] [Owner's] written permission.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING1.8

Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until newA.equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT INSERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service andlabel existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.

Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnectedB.fire-alarm equipment and wiring.

SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT1.9

Comply with UL 864.A.

Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for [two]B.<Insert number> years.

Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and programC.software upgrades that become available within [two] <Insert number> years from date ofSubstantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shallinclude new or revised licenses for use of software.

Provide [30] <Insert number> days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to1.system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1



Amseco - a Potter brand; Potter Electric Signal Company.1.




Federal Signal Corporation.2.Fire Lite Alarms; a Honeywell company.3.NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company.4.Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.5.SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International company.6.<Insert manufacturer's name>.7.

SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION2.2

Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices[ and systems]:A.

Flame detectors.1.Smoke detectors.2.Automatic sprinkler system water flow.3.Fire-extinguishing system operation.4.Fire standpipe system.5.<Insert alarm-initiating devices and systems>.6.

Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:B.

Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.1.Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit.2.Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.3.Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.4.Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.5.Activate voice/alarm communication system.6.Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.7.Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system8.panel.Activate stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.9.Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.10.Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.11.Activate emergency lighting control.12.Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.13.Record events in the system memory.14.<Insert signal-initiating actions>.15.

Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:C.

Valve supervisory switch.1.Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.2.Elevator shunt-trip supervision.3.<Insert supervisory signal-initiating devices and actions>.4.

System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:D.

Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.1.




Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating2.devices.Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.3.Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.4.Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.5.Break in standby battery circuitry.6.Failure of battery charging.7.Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.8.Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.9.Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.10.<Insert trouble signal-initiating devices and actions>.11.

System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciateE.at fire-alarm control unit. Record the event on system printer.

FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT2.3

General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:A.

Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with1.electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.

System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasablea.programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information throughfailure of primary and secondary power supplies.Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder andb.printer.

Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.2.

Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting[ and allow fora.adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit].Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivityb.range of the device.

Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.3.

Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operatorB.at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation andsupervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programmingand control menu.

Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, [1] [2] [3] line(s) of [40] [80] characters,1.minimum.Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control2.commands[ and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system forcontrol of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters].




Stairwell Pressurization: Provide an output signal using an addressable relay to start theC.stairwell pressurization system. Signal shall remain on until alarm conditions are cleared andfire-alarm system is reset. Signal shall not stop in response to alarm acknowledge or signalsilence commands.

Pressurization starts when any alarm is received at fire-alarm control unit.1.Alarm signals from smoke detectors at pressurization air supplies have a higher priority2.than other alarm signals that start the system.

Elevator Recall:D.

Smoke detectors at the following locations shall initiate automatic elevator recall.[1.Alarm-initiating devices, except those listed, shall not start elevator recall.]

Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor.a.Smoke detector in elevator machine room.b.Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway.c.

Elevator lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors shall be programmed to2.move the cars to the alternate recall floor.Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room3.shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay.

Water-flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may have aa.delay to allow elevators to move to the designated floor.

Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors inE.smoke barrier walls shall [be] [not be] connected to fire-alarm system.

Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory,F.and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundantG.microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided [in a separate cabinetlocated in the fire command center] [as a special module that is part of fire-alarm controlunit].

Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different1.announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use ofthe central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed byan NRTL.

Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and, ata.same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any combination.Programmable tone and message sequence selection.b.Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."c.Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended byd.




NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliancecircuits of fire-alarm control unit.

Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the2.status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units,3.on primary equipment failure.

Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module.H.Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, [supervisorysignals] [supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters] [and] [digital alarmradio transmitters] shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-1.supply module rating.

Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, andI.automatic transfer switch.

Batteries: [Sealed lead calcium] [Sealed, valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid]1.[Vented, wet-cell pocket, plate nickel cadmium].

Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic orJ.glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describeappropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of thesystem under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS2.4

General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:A.

Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.1.Detectors shall be [four] [two]-wire type.2.Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,3.or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a4.twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base forconnection to building wiring.Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to5.restore them to normal operation.Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated[ and power-6.on status].Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,7.individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarmcondition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unita.




for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall beb.settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.c.

Ionization Smoke Detector:B.

Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to1.identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to2.manually access the following for each detector:

Primary status.a.Device type.b.Present average value.c.Present sensitivity selected.d.Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).e.

NONSYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS2.5

Single-Station Smoke Detectors:A.

Comply with UL 217; suitable for NFPA 101, residential occupancies; operating at 120-1.V ac[ with 9-V dc battery as the secondary power source. Provide with "low" or"missing" battery chirping-sound device].Auxiliary Relays: One [Form C rated at 0.5 A] [Form A and one Form C, both rated at2.0.5 A].Audible Notification Appliance: Piezoelectric sounder rated at 90 dBA at 10 feet3.according to UL 464.Visible Notification Appliance: 177-cd strobe.4.Heat sensor, 135 deg F [combination rate-of-rise and ]fixed temperature.5.Test Switch: Push to test; simulates smoke at rated obscuration.6.Tandem Connection: Allow tandem connection of number of indicated detectors; alarm7.on one detector shall actuate notification on all connected detectors.Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted8.in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base forconnection to building wiring.Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to9.restore them to normal operation.Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated[ and power-10.on status].

NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES2.6

General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to aA.signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system




connections.

General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signalB.circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals forsystem connections.

Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-1.mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals forsystem connections.

Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operatingC.mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure levelof 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 testprotocol.

Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear orD.nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" isengraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

Rated Light Output:1.

[15] [30] [75] [110] [177] <Insert value> cd.a.15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.b.

Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.2.For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined3.with guards in place.Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.4.Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.5.Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, [red] [white].6.

Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:E.

Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL.1.High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.2.Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.3.Mounting: [Flush] [semirecessed] [or] [surface mounted and bidirectional].4.Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker5.location.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION3.1

Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.A.




Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:B.

Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating1.Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices"2.Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed [30 feet] <Insert distance>.3.Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high4.ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A [or Appendix B ]in NFPA72.HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than [3 feet] [5 feet] from air-supply diffuser or5.return-air opening.Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting6.fixture.

Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so theyC.extend the full width of duct.

Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. InstallD.bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealedbehind a grille.

Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at leastE.6 inches below the ceiling.

Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.F.

Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inchesG.above the finished floor.

Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.H.

CONNECTIONS3.2

For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors inA.smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connecthardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this1.Section before making connections.

Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices andB.systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make anaddressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or systembeing controlled.




Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter1.smoke-control system panel.Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.2.Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.3.Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.4.Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.5.Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.6.Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.7.Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.8.Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.9.Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase-10.reversal condition.Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.11.<Insert connections>.12.

IDENTIFICATION3.3

Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements forA.identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.B.

GROUNDING3.4

Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install aA.ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


Field tests shall be witnessed by [Architect] [authorities having jurisdiction] <Insert namesA.or titles of witnesses>.

Perform tests and inspections.B.



Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.1.

Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and systema.documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents,




Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of FireAlarm Systems" Chapter.Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section ofb.the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the2."Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written3.instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2requirements in ANSI S1.4.Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's4.written instructions.Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written5.instructions.Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of6.Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire AlarmSystems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records"Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added orD.replaced devices and appliances.

Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.E.

Prepare test and inspection reports.F.

Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,G.quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarmH.system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use formsdeveloped for initial tests and inspections.

